Loading...
Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System Improvements Phase 1SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT SOUTH TAHOE, CALIFORNIA FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I 1990 BID NO. 89-90-22 DIRECTORS ROBERT MASON NOEL B. WALKER NAT SINCLAIR LOU PIERINI STEVE ONYSKO JOHN CAROLLO ENGINEERS RNOENIA AZ WALNUT CREEK CA SANTA ANA, CA • SACRAMENTO CA SAN BERNARDINO, CA • TUCSON. AZ SAN DIEGO CA • BAKERSFIELD CA FRESNO CA • LOS ANGELES CA VISALIA. CA 1 SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I WO #32668.10 APRIL 1990 BID NO. 89-90-22 0 A SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE INVITING BIDS NB -1 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS IB -1 Securing Documents IB -1 Bid IB -1 Bid Security IB -3 Experience and Business Standing IB -3 Withdrawal of Bid IB -4 Notice of Award and Bonds IB -4 Notice to Proceed IB -5 Interpretation of Plans and Documents IB -5 Questions During Bid Period IB -6 Addenda IB -6 Award or Rejection of Bids IB -6 Execution of Contract IB -6 Bidders Interested In More Than One Bid IB -7 Site Conditions IB -7 Nonrestrictive Specification IB -8 Plans and Specifications To Successful Bidder IB -8 Contract Time IB -8 Liquidated Damages IB -9 Prebid Conference IB -9 Permits and Licenses IB -9 Sheeting, Shoring, Bracing, and Ventilating IB -9 Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values IB -10 Wage Rates IB -10 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 1 DEFINITIONS GC1-1 1-1 Definitions GC1-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 2 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT GC2-1 2-1 Award GC2-1 2-2 Execution of Contract GC2-1 2-3 Contractor's Insurance GC2-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 3 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND PROGRESS GC3-1 3-1 Commencement GC3-1 3-2 Subcontracting GC3-1 3-3 Contractor's Representative GC3-2 3-4 Errors and Omissions GC3-2 3-5 Character of Workmen GC3-2 3-6 Suspension of Work GC3-2 00 1990 TC -1 W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) 3-7 Weather Related Extension of Time GC3-3 3-8 Termination For Breach of Contract GC3-3 3-9 Methods and Appliances GC3-4 3-10 Date of Actual Completion GC3-4 3-11 Final Acceptance GC3-4 3-12 Protection of Work GC3-5 3-13 Warranty of Work GC3-5 3-14 Contingencies GC3-6 3-15 Liquidated Damages GC3-6 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 3A WARRANTY FORM GC3A-1 GENERAL CONDITION - PART 4 SCOPE OF WORK GC4-1 4-1 Intent of Plans and Specifications GC4-1 4-2 Performance of Work GC4-1 4-3 Addenda, Revisions, and Supplementary Drawings GC4-2 4-4 Changes In the Work GC4-2 4-5 Force Account GC4-2 4-6 Extra Work GC4-4 4-7 Change Order GC4-4 4-8 Claims for Extra Work GC4-5 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 5 CONTROL OF WORK GC5-1 5-1 Work Schedule GC5-1 5-2 Authority of the Engineer GC5-1 5-3 Formal Protest GC5-1 5-4 Plans GC5-2 5-5 Documents Available at the Site GC5-2 5-6 Conformity With Plans and Allowable Deviations GC5-2 5-7 Coordination and Interpretation of Plans and SpecificationsGC5-2 5-8 Order of Work GC5-3 5-9 Inspection GC5-3 5-10 Lines and Grades GC5-4 5-11 Correction of Work GC5-4 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP GC6-1 6-1 General GC6-1 6-2 Substitution of Material or Equipment GC6-1 6-3 Sample and Testing GC6-2 6-4 Fabricated Materials and Shop Drawings _ GC6-2 6-5 Materials Furnished By the Owner GC6-2 6-6 Storage of Materials GC6-2 6-7 Rejected Materials GC6-3 1990 TC -2 W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY ... GC7-1 7-1 Laws To Be Observed GC7-1 7-2 Work Hours and Safety GC7-1 7-3 Employment of Apprentices GC7-1 7-4 Payroll Records GC7-2 7-5 Permits and Licenses GC7-2 7-6 Patented Devices, Materials, and Processes GC7-2 7-7 Survey Land Monuments GC7-2 7-8 Protection of Person and Property GC7-3 7-9 Utilities GC7-3 7-10 Driveways and Walks GC7-4 7-11 Trees and Shrubbery GC7-5 7-12 Irrigation Ditches and Structures GC7-5 7-13 Roads and Fences GC7-5 7-14 Protection of Antiquities GC7-5 7-15 Responsibility for Damage Claims GC7-5 7-16 Nonresponsibility of the Owner GC7-6 7-17 Property Rights In Material GC7-6 7-18 Assignment of Payments GC7-6 7-19 Payment for Labor and Material GC7-6 7-20 Work During Disputes and Litigation GC7-6 7-21 Attorneys' Fees GC7-7 7-22 Notice and Service Thereof GC7-7 7-23 Assignment to Awarding Body GC7-7 7-24 Provisions Required By Law GC7-7 7-25 Retention of Legal Rights GC7-7 7-26 Prohibited Interests GC7-8 7-27 Satisfaction of Liens GC7-8 7-28 Clean Air Act and Federal Water Pollution Control Act GC7-8 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 8 PAYMENT TO CONTRACTORS GC8-1 8-1 General GC8-1 8-2 Payment GC8-1 8-3 Partial Payment GC8-1 8-4 Payment of Items in Bid GC8-2 8-5 Payment for "Extra Work" and for "Changes in the Work" GC8-2 8-6 Time of Partial Payments GC8-2 8-7 Substitution of Securities for Amounts Withheld GC8-2 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 8A AGREEMENT CONCERNING INVESTMENT OF FUNDS GC8A-1 Section 1. Purpose and Scope GC8A-1 Section 2. Escrow Agent GC8A-1 1990 TC -3 W32668.10 32666.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) Section 3. Substitution of Securities GC8A-1 Section 4. Payment of Retained Funds GC8A-1 Section 5. Expenses GC8A-2 Section 6. Conversion of Securities GC8A-2 Section 7. Assignment or Pledge GC8A-2 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 9 REQUIRED PROVISIONS GC9-1 9-1 Arbitration Procedures GC9-1 DIVISION 1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1-1 010010 Project Description 1-1 010020 Construction Stakes, Lines, and Grades 1-5 010060 Regulatory Requirements 1-6 010090 Definitions and Abbreviations 1-6 010200 Project Meetings 1-9 010210 Preconstruction Conference 1-9 010220 Progress Meetings 1-9 010300 Submittals 1-10 010310 Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values 1-10 010320 Shop Drawings, Schedules, and Samples 1-17 010400 Quality Control 1-19 010410 Authority and Duties of Inspector 1-19 010420 Samples and Tests 1-20 010430 Equipment Tests 1-21 010500 Temporary Facilities 1-22 010510 Temporary Offices 1-22 010520 Temporary Utilities 1-22 010530 Construction Facilities 1-23 010540 Warning Devices and Barricades 1-24 010550 Project Security 1-25 010560 Access Roads 1-25 010570 Special Controls 1-26 010600 Erosion Control 1-26 010700 Project Closeout 1-27 010710 Cleaning 1-27 010720 Project Record Documents 1-27 010730 Touch-up and Repair 1-27 010740 Equipment Start-up 1-28 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 2-1 020000 General 2-1 020300 Earthwork 2-3 020320 Excavation 2-5 1990 TC -4 W32663.10 32663.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) 020330 Compacted Fills 2-10 020340 Trench Excavation 2-14 020400 Site Drainage 2-17 020410 Existing Channels 2-18 021020 Planting of Trees, Shrubs, and Ground Covers 2-18 021030 Maintenance 2-23 SECTION 2-A SOILS REPORT 2A-1 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 3-1 SECTION 3-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE 3A-1 030000 General 3A-1 030100 Workmanship and Methods 3A-2 030110 Classes of Concrete 3A-5 030120 Aggregate 3A-5 030150 Water 3A-7 030160 Portland Cement 3A-7 030180 Admixtures - General 3A-8 030200 Forms and Accessories 3A-8 030300 Reinforcement 3A-11 030310 Reinforcing Bars 3A-11 030400 Mixing Concrete 3A-13 030410 Machine Mixing 3A-14 030500 Conveying and Placing Concrete 3A-14 030520 Placing and Consolidation 3A-15 030600 Curing Concrete - General 3A-18 030610 Concrete Finishing 3A-19 030700 Cement Mortar and Grout 3A-20 030710 Nonshrink Grout 3A-21 SECTION 3-B CONCRETE SEALING/WATERPROOFING 3B-1 31000 General 3B-1 31100 Materials 3B-1 31200 Storage of Materials 3B-1 31300 Surface Preparation 3B-1 31400 Mixing Material 3B-2 31500 Application 3B-2 31600 Repair of Surface Defects 3B-3 31700 Surface Application 3B-3 31800 Curing 3B-3 DIVISION 4 (NOT USED) 4-1 1990 TC -5 W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) DIVISION 5 METALS 5-1 050100 Structural and Miscellaneous Metals 5-1 050110 General 5-1 050120 Materials 5-1 050130 Fabrication and Erection 5-2 050500 Metal Fastening 5-3 050510 Bolting 5-3 050520 Fasteners for Use in Concrete 5-4 050800 Welding 5-5 050830 Welding Stainless Steel 5-6 050850 Welding Steel 5-6 051000 Structural Metal 5-6 051400 Structural Steel 5-6 056000 Miscellaneous Metal 5-7 056100 Miscellaneous Aluminum 5-7 056200 Miscellaneous Cast Iron 5-7 056210 Manhole Frames and Covers 5-7 056220 Preformed Roofing 5-7 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 6-1 060000 General 6-1 060100 Rough Carpentry 6-1 060120 Materials 6-2 060130 Workmanship 6-4 060200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork 6-6 060220 Materials 6-7 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 7-1 070000 General 070300 Building Insulation 070500 Membrane Roofing 070820 Metal Flashing and Counterflashing 070830 Plumbing Flashing 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINDOWS, AND HARDWARE 8-1 080000 General 8-1 080200 Hollow Metal Door and Steel Frames 8-1 080210 Materials 8-1 080700 Hardware 8-3 080710 General 8-3 080720 Installation 8-3 080730 Catalog Numbers 8-3 080740 Submittals 8-3 1990 TC -6 W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC 0 SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) 0! 080750 Guarantee 8-4 080760 Finish Hardware 8-4 080780 Hardware Groups 8-5 0 A 0 0 0 0 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 9-1 090000 General 9-1 090100 Painting - General 9-1 090110 Factory -Painted Equipment 9-8 090120 Items Not Painted 9-8 090130 Painting Metal Surfaces 9-9 090150 Painting Wood Surfaces 9-16 DIVISION 10 BUILDING SPECIALTIES 10-1 SECTION 10-A SAFETY EQUIPMENT 10A-1 100100 General 10A-1 100130 Girst Aid Kit 10A-1 100140 Fire Extinguishers 10A-1 SECTION 10-B IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 10B-1 100200 General 10B-1 100220 Plastic Signs 10B-1 100230 Sign Schedules 10B-1 DIVISION 11 PROCESS EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) 11-1 DIVISION 12 PUMPS 12-1 SECTION 12-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 12A-1 120100 General 12A-1 120110 Construction 12A-2 120120 Installation 12A-2 120130 Motors 12A-2 120140 Tests 12A-2 120150 Shop Drawings 12A-3 120160 Operating Manuals 12A-4 SECTION 12-B SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMPS 12B-1 120210 Pumps 12B-1 120220 Motor 12B-3 120230 Painting 12B-4 1990 TC -7 W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) 120240 Float Switches and Controls 12B-4 120250 Tests 12B-5 120260 Shop Drawings 12B-5 DIVISION 13 (NOT USED) 13-1 DIVISION 14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 14-1 SECTION 14-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 14A-1 140100 General 14A-1 140110 Installation of Equipment 14A-3 140120 Motors 14A-5 140130 Mechanical Power Transmission Equipment 14A-7 140140 Electrical Work 14A-7 140150 Lubrication Fittings 14A-7 140160 Machinery and Equipment Guards 14A-7 140170 Testing 14A-8 140180 Special Tools 14A-8 140190 Warning Signs 14A-8 SECTION 14-B STANDBY GENERATOR 14B-1 140200 General 14B-1 140210 Propane Engine 14B-2 140220 Generator 14B-6 140230 Generator System Operations 14B-7 140240 Painting 14B-8 140250 Installation 14B-8 140260 Submittals 14B-8 140270 Instruction of Operating Personnel 14B-9 140280 Testing, Startup, and Services 14B-10 SECTION 14-C ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS 14C-1 140310 Louvers 14C-1 140320 General 14C-1 140330 Performance 14C-1 140340 Acoustical Louvers 14C-2 140350 Painting 14C-2 DIVISION 15 PIPING, VALVES, GATES, AND SPECIALTIES 15-1 150000 General 15-1 150010 Exposed Piping 15-1 150020 Buried Piping 15-2 1990 TC -8 W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) 150030 Cleaning and Testing 15-3 150060 Piping Schedule 15-4 150070 Connection To In -Service Lines 15-7 150200 Steel Pipe 15-7 150210 Joints 15-8 150220 Fittings 15-8 150240 Pipe Coating 15-9 151800 Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings 15-10 151810 Polyvinyl -Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 15-14 152100 Piping Specialties 15-15 152110 Flexible Pipe Couplings 15-15 152130 Expansion and Vibration Control 15-17 152200 Pressure Gauges 15-19 152400 Sight Glasses 15-20 152250 Vacuum Gauges 15-20 152620 Roof Drains 15-20 153000 Valves 15-21 153010 Installation of Valves 15-22 153210 Gate Valves Underground 15-23 153300 Eccentric Plug Valves 15-23 153400 Check Valves 15-23 153410 Swing Check Valves 15-23 154500 Valve and Gate Operators 15-24 154520 Key Operated Valves 15-25 154530 Geared Valve Operators 15-26 154600 Pipe Hangers and Supports 15-26 154610 Anchor Bolts and Inserts 15-27 154620 Single Pipe Hangers and Supports 15-27 154630 Trapeze Hangers 15-28 154640 Wall Brackets 15-28 154660 Floor Stands and Stanchions 15-28 154670 Riser Supports 15-28 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16-1 160100 General 16-1 160110 Conforms to Record Documents Drawings 16-4 160200 General Materials and Methods 16-5 160220 Float Switch 16-16 160400 Pump Station Control Panels (ES -1, ES -2 & ES -3) 16-17 160500 Circuit Breakers - Low Voltage 16-18 160600 Motor Control - Low Voltage 16-21 163100 Lighting 16-22 163110 General 16-22 160120 Installation 16-22 163130 Ballasts 16-22 1990 TC -9 W3266B.10 32663.10 TOC FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWER COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS PHASE I TABLE OF CONTENTS Continued) 163140 Fixture schedule 16-23 167100 Meter and main disconnect combination 16-23 169840 Automatic transfer switch 16-23 169920 Alarm panels (annunciators) 16-25 Bid Form BD -1 Schedule of Prices BD -1 Lump Sum Bid BD -1 Costs Included in Preceding Lump Sum Bid BD -1 List of Equipment Manufacturers BD -2 List of Subcontractors BD -2 Experience Data BD -4 Closing Statement BD -5 Persons and Parties Interested in This Proposal BD -6 Declaration BD -6 Sample Bidder's Bond BD -7 Noncollusion Affidavit BD -9 Formal Contract Sample Payment Bond Sample Faithful Performance Bond CD -1 CD -5 CD -7 1990 TC -10. W3266B.10 32668.10 TOC NOTICE INVITING BIDS Bid No. 89-90-22 Design Engineer John Carollo Engineers 450 North Wiget Lane Walnut Creek, California 94598 or - John Carollo Engineers 2530 J Street, Suite 302 Sacramento, California 95816 District South Tahoe Public Utility District South Lake Tahoe, California Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System Improvements, Phase I Sealed bids will be received by the South Tahoe Public Utility District, Clerk of the Board, at the South Tahoe Public Utility District Offices, 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, South Lake Tahoe, California, from 1:00 p.m. until 2:00 p.m. local time, May 22, 1990, for construction of the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System Improvements, Phase I. Bids received after this time will not be accepted, and will be returned unopened. No mailed bids shall be accepted. However, bids which are timely delivered to said offices by Federal Express or United Parcel Service shall not be considered mailed. At said place and promptly after the bid closing, all bids that have been duly received will be publicly opened and read aloud. All interested parties are invited to attend. The Work to be performed includes; site grading, preparation and installation of a new emergency power generation building and a new poured -in-place concrete holding tank; removal of two existing pneumatic ejectors and one existing single phase grinder pump and all appurtenant piping and valving; sealing existing concrete vaults and the installation of duplex submersible grinder pumps including appurtenant piping, valving, valve boxes and pressure cleanouts at three separate locations; note that by-pass pumping will be required in all three instances; installation of a 30 KW emergency generator including electrical runs from Sierra Pacific Power to the new emergency generator building and from the new generator building to each of the three locations being converted to grinder pump stations; installation of electrical service includes a new transfer switch and MCC in the new generator building and new control panels at each of the three new grinder pump stations; new electrical power cable and signal cable from the new generator building to each of the new grinder pump stations; new electrical pull boxes will be required on an existing air line being converted for use as an electrical conduit; conversion of an existing vacuum main into a force main including slip lining the existing 4 -inch vacuum main with 3.5 -inch O.D. polyethylene, the installation of two air release valves on the converted main with appurtenant piping and valve vaults; installing new valving on existing lines feeding into the force main; installing approximately 40 feet of pipe to connect the converted vacuum main to MH A-45; removal of two existing vacuum valve stations; removal of a 1000 gallon concrete storage tank at VVS-1; repair and reconnection of existing improvements affected by the Work and incidentals for a complete and usable facility. 1990 NB -1 W3266B.10 32668.10 NB Note that the existing facility must remain in operation throughout this project except for short intervals arranged for in advance with the District. Proposed methods of bypassing each ejector station and the vacuum main being converted to a force main must be submitted to the District for approval before commencing operations. Bids shall be a total lump sum based on a combination of lump sum items on the forms provided in the Specifications. Copies of the Plans and Specifications are on file and may be examined at the office of the Design Engineer at 450 North Wiget Lane, Walnut Creek, California 94598, 2530 J Street, Suite 302, Sacramento, California 95816, and at the Wastewater Reclamation Plant, 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, South Lake Tahoe, California. Copies of the Plans and Specifications for use in preparing Bids may be obtained from the South Tahoe Public Utility District, 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, P.O. Box 70542, South Lake Tahoe, California 95705, (916) 544-6474 for a non-refundable cost of $50.00 for each set. A prebid conference will be held at the Wastewater Reclamation Plant at 1:00 p.m., local time on May 9, 1990. A site tour will be conducted immediately following the prebid conference. Attendance at the prebid conference is =auditory. Any bidder absent from the prebid conference shall have their bid disqualified as non-responsive. Interested parties shall meet at the Wastewater Reclamation Plant, 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, South Lake Tahoe, California. Each bidder shall file with his Bid a Bid Security in accordance with the Information For Bidders. The Board of Directors for the South Tahoe Public Utility District has obtained from the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations a determination of the general prevailing rate of per diem wages and the general prevailing rate for legal holiday and overtime work in the locality in which said work is to be performed for each craft, classification, or type of worker needed. Not less than the determined rates shall be paid to all workers employed in the performance of the contract. Such rates of wages are on file with the Department of Industrial Relations and in the office of the District and are available to any interested party upon request. Pursuant to Government Code Section 4590, equivalent securities may be substituted for monies withheld to ensure performance of the contract. The District reserves the right to solely determine the adequacy of the securities being proposed by the Contractor and the value of those securities. The District shall also be entitled to charge an administrative fee, as determined by District in its sole discretion, for substituting equivalent securities for retention amounts. The District's decisions with respect to the administration of the provision of Section 4590 shall be final and shall include, but not be limited to, determinations of what securities are equivalent, the value of securities, the negotiability of the securities, the costs of administration and the determination whether or not the administration should be accomplished by an independent agency or by the District. The District shall be entitled, at any time, to request the 1990 NB -2 W3266B.10 32668.10 NB deposit of additional securities of a value designated by the District, in District's sole discretion, to satisfy this requirement. If the District does not receive satisfactory written request, District shall be entitled to withhold amounts due to Contractor until securities of satisfactory value to District have been received. The Bidder to whom a Contract is awarded will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond for payment of all debts and faithful performance under the Contractor's warranty and guarantee. No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of 90 days after the date Bids are opened. Bidders shall hold a current California Class "A" Contractor's license at the time of bidding. The South Tahoe Public Utility District reserves the right to reject any orallBids, and to waive any informalities, nonconformities or irregularities therein. 1990 32668.10 NB SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT By: Robert G. Baer Acting General Manager April 20. 1990 Date NB -3. W3266B.10 0 0 0 INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS SECURING DOCUMENTS Plans and Specifications may be procured from the South Tahoe Public Utility District (STPUD) offices, 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, South Lake Tahoe, California, 95705, telephone (916) 544-6474, at a non-refundable cost of fifty ($50.00). One set of Plans and Specifications will be available for examination on the premises of the South Tahoe Public Utilities District offices located at 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, South Lake Tahoe, California. Additional sets of Plans and Specifications will be available for examination in the offices of John Carollo Engineers, 450 North Wiget Lane, Walnut Creek, California 94598 and 2530 J Street, Suite 302, Sacramento, California 95816. BID Bids to receive consideration shall be made in accordance with the following instructions: A. Examination of Documents, Site, and Conditions. 1. Before submitting a bid, bidders shall carefully examine the Plans, read the Specifications and the forms of other Contract Documents, visit the site of the work, fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and limitations, and shall include sums in the bid covering the cost of each item included in the Contract. 2. Submission of a Bid shall be considered prima facie evidence that the bidder has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work and as to the requirements of the Plans, Specifications, and other Contract Documents. B. Execution of Bids. 1. Bids shall be properly executed upon the Bid form attached to and made part of these Contract Documents. a. No bid will be considered unless it is made upon the Bid forms in and submitted with the book of Specifications and Contract Documents. 2. All bids shall be made in accordance with applicable statutes of the State of California including the California Labor Code, applicable local laws, and as specified in this Book of Specifications. 3. Numbers shall be stated both in writing and in figures where so required. a. In case of a difference between written words and figures, the amount stated in written words shall govern. 4. The completed forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. 1990 IB -1 W3266B.10 32668.10 I8 5. No Book of Specifications and Contract Documents shall be disassembled. (Bid Bond may be stapled to page BD -6.) 6. Notarized Noncollusion Affidavit must accompany Bid. C. Irregular Bids. 1. Bids may be considered irregular and may be rejected by the District if they show any alterations of form, unauthorized additions, unauthorized conditional or alternate bids, incomplete bids, recapitulations, unbalanced prices, erasures, or irregularities of any kind. 2. No bid will be considered unless accompanied by the Bid Security in the type and amount specified. 3. No oral, telegraphic, telephonic, or modified bid will be considered. D. Signing the Bid Form. 1. The bid shall: a. Include the legal name of the bidder. b. Identify the bidder as a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or any other legal entity. c. Be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract for the execution of the Work. d. Include a list of subcontractors. 2. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current Power of Attorney attached certifying the agent's, authority to bind the bidder. 3. The signature of all persons signing shall be in longhand. E. Submitting Bids. 1. Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope. a. The outside, upper lefthand corner of the envelope shall be marked as follows: Bid of bidder) For the South Tahoe Public Utility District, Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System Improvements, Phase I. 2. Sealed bids shall be delivered as instructed in the Notice Inviting Bids, on or before the day and hour set for the opening of bids in the Notice Inviting Bids. No mailed bids shall be accepted. 1990 IB -2 W3266B.10 32668.10 IB However, bids which are delivered in a timely manner to said offices by Federal Express or United Parcel Service shall not be considered mailed. a. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received in proper time. b. Bids received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids will be returned to the bidder unopened. BID SECURITY A. Amount and Form. Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check, or bid bond acceptable to the District in an amount equal to at least ten 10) percent of the Bid, payable without condition to the District as a guarantee that the bidder, if awarded the Contract, will promptly execute such Contract in accordance with the Bid and in manner and form required by these Contract Documents and will furnish the specified bonds. B. Retention. 1. The bid securities of the three lowest bidders will be retained until the Contract is signed and satisfactory bonds furnished, or other disposition made thereof. 2. The bid securities of all bidders except the three lowest will be returned promptly after the survey of bids. EXPERIENCE AND BUSINESS STANDING A. Experience Statement. The District may require that Bidders under consideration for award of the Contract submit a statement setting forth his experience. 1. Along with this statement, each bidder shall list similar projects that he has constructed, showing total project costs when constructed and the names, addresses, and phone numbers of the owners. B. Financial Statement. The District may require that bidders under consideration for award of the contract submit a financial statement. 1. Such statement shall be in a form and substance similar or equal to the form furnished by the Associated General Contractors. 2. The financial statement shall be submitted within five days of receipt of the request from the District. 1990 IB -3 W3266B.10 32668.10 IB 3. If bidder fails to submit the financial statement, or if the financial statement is not satisfactory to the District, the bid of such bidder shall be considered nonresponsive, and such bid may be rejected by the District. WITHDRAWAL OF BID A. Prior to Bid Opening. Any bidder may withdraw his bid, either personally or by telegraphic or written request received by STPUD at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids. B. After Bid Opening. 1. A bidder may withdraw his bid after the opening of bids providing he can establish to the District's satisfaction that a mistake was made in preparing the bid. As outlined by Sections 5100 et seq., of the public contracts code of California a. A bidder desiring to withdraw shall give written notice to the District within five days after opening of bids specifying in detail how the mistake occurred and how the mistake made the bid materially different than it was intended to be. 2. Withdrawal will be permitted for mistakes made in filling out the bid and will not be permitted for mistakes resulting from errors in judgment or carelessness in inspecting the site of the Work or in reading the Plans and Specifications. NOTICE OF AWARD AND BONDS A. Required Bonds. The successful bidder, upon Notice -of -Award will be required to execute the contract and furnish the required bonds and evidence of insurance within 10 calendar days from the date of the notice. The acceptance of the Notice -of -Award must be executed and returned to the District within 5 working days of the date of the Notice -of -Award. B. Warranty Period. The Performance Bond shall extend through the warranty period as specified in the General Conditions. C. Surety Company. Said Bonds shall be secured from a surety company satisfactory to the District. D. The surety company shall: 1. Have a sound financial standing. 2. Have a record of service satisfactory to the District. 1990 IB -4 3266B.10 IB W3266B.10 0 3. Have the legal authority to do business in the State of California. E. Examination of Forms. The form of Contract, which the successful bidder as Contractor will be required to execute, and the forms of bonds which he will be required to furnish, shall be carefully examined by the bidder. 1. Such forms are included in this book of Specifications. F. Number of Copies. The Contract and the Bonds will be executed in 2 (two) original counterparts. NOTICE TO PROCEED G. Upon execution of the contract and evidence of insurance and bonds, District will issue a Notice -to -Proceed. Acceptance of notice shall be signed within 5 calendar days from the date of the Notice -to -Proceed and returned to the District. No work shall proceed until said acceptance is timely received. All commitments, subcontracts, and materials ordered until said acceptance is received shall be at risk of Bidder. INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND DOCUMENTS A. Questions About Documents. If any person contemplating submitting a bid for the proposed Contract is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Plans, Specifications, or other proposed Contract Documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions from the Plans or Specifications, he shall submit to the Engineer a written request for an interpretation or correction thereof. 1. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. B. Interpretations or Corrections. Interpretation or correction of the proposed documents will be made only by Addendum duly issued and a copy of such Addendum will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of such documents. 1. The District will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed documents. C. Documents to Rely Upon. Only the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, and Addenda shall be relied upon for preparation of Bids, and unless corroborated by the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents, or Addenda, statements or representations made by the Design Engineer or the District regarding the Project prior, during, or after the bidding will not be binding. 1990 IB -5 W3266B.10 3266B.10 IB QUESTIONS DURING BID PERIOD Questions regarding the bidding documents and bidding procedures shall be directed to John Carollo Engineers, 450 North Wiget Lane, Walnut Creek, California 94598, telephone (415) 932-1710 or John Carollo Engineers, 2530 J Street, Suite 302, Sacramento, California 95816, telephone (916) 442-4428. ADDENDA Addenda issued during the time of bidding shall be covered in the bid and shall become a part of the Contract Documents. A. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of any and all addenda in their bid. AWARD OR REJECTION OF BIDS A. Award. If awarded, the Contract will be awarded to the lowest responsive responsible bidder complying with these instructions and with the Notice Inviting Bids. B. Rejection. The District reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids if it may deem it best for the public good, and to waive any informality, irregularity, and nonconformity in the bids received when deemed advisable for the public good. C. Time of Award. The award, if made, will be within ninety (90) days after the opening of bids. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT A. The Notice -of -Award will be issued by the District to the successful bidder which indicates the time schedule for execution of the Contract Agreement. 1. The Contract Agreement package will be mailed with Notice of Award. B. Said Contract Agreement package and all required related documents including the Faithful Performance Bond, Labor and Materials Bond, Corporate Resolution, insurance certificates and other required documents, as set forth in the Specifications shall be executed, completed, and filed with the South Tahoe Public Utility District, not later than 4:30 p.m. on the tenth calendar day following the Notice of Award of the contract. C. In the event the documents submitted do not meet the requirements of the District, District staff will notify the bidder, by telephone, as to how said documents are insufficient, or incomplete, and said bidder shall have two (2) working days, from said phone call to remedy such insufficient or incomplete documents. 1990 IB -6 W3266B.10 32668.10 IB D. In the event the bidder fails to remedy insufficient or incomplete documents within two (2) working days or the bidder fails to submit the documents within the time limitation set forth in preceding paragraph B, then bidder shall be considered to have defaulted and shall have no further rights under and by virtue of the award of the contract. The District may award the contract to the next lowest, responsive, responsible bidder. 1. Upon default of bidder the District shall have the right to collect the bid security. 2. In addition, failure to complete the contracting procedure shall constitute grounds for denial of future contracts with the South Tahoe Public Utility District. BIDDERS INTERESTED IN MORE THAN ONE BID A. Interest in More Than One Bid. No person, firm, or corporation, under the same or different name, shall make, file, or be interested in more than one bid for the same work unless alternate bids are called for. 1. A person, firm, or corporation who has submitted a sub -bid to a bidder, or who has quoted prices on materials to a bidder, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a sub -bid or quoting prices to other bidders. B. Rejection in Case of Collusion. 1. Reasonable ground for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one Bid for the same work, will cause the rejection of all Bids for the Work in which such a bidder is interested. 2. Any or all Bids will be rejected if there is reason for believing that collusion exists among any of the bidders. C. Noncollusion Affidavit. 1. Pursuant to provisions in Section 7106 of the State of California Public Contract Code, bidders shall submit with their bids the notarized Noncollusion Affidavit executed in the form included with the proposal documents. SITE CONDITIONS Bidders are required to inform themselves fully of the conditions relating to construction and labor under which the work for the Project will be or is now being performed, and the Contractor shall employ, as far as possible, such methods and means in carrying out his work as will not cause any interruption or interference to others working at the site. 1990 IB -7 W3266B.10 326613.10 IB NONRESTRICTIVE SPECIFICATION A. Materials and Equipment Identified By Brand or Trade Names. Some materials and equipment specified in the Contract Documents are identified by brands or trade names. 1. Except where specified otherwise, it is the intent of the Contract Documents to allow bidders to select such materials and equipment from two or more brands or trade names listed in the Specifications and in the Plans or from other brands or trade names of materials and equipment of equal quality and utility to those specified and in accordance with provisions contained in the Specifications. 2. Where only one brand or trade name is listed followed by the words or equal," only one brand or trade name was known to the Design Engineer when preparing the Contract Documents. 3. Pursuant to the provisions of Section 3400 of the California public contracts Code, the bidder to whom award is made shall have 35 days after award of the Contract for submission of data substantiating a request for a substitution of an "or equal" item. B. In order to match existing installations, some materials and equipment specified may not be substituted. Such materials and equipment are identified in the Specifications. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO SUCCESSFUL BIDDER A. Sets Free of Charge. The bidder to whom award is made may obtain ten (10) sets of Plans and Specifications for the Work at no extra cost. B. Additional Sets. Additional sets may be purchased at the cost of reproduction. BASIS OF BID The bidder's total lump sum price shall be based on the lump sum items and unit prices if any applied to the specific quantities, for construction of the entire work depicted on the Plans and specified herein within the times specified under CONTRACT TIME. CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time shall be 100 calendar days from the date specified in the Notice -to -Proceed. Except that all excavation or work that would disturb existing ground shall be completed by October 15, 1990, in accordance with requirements of the Tahoe Regional Planning Agency. 1990 IB -8 W3266B.10 32668.10 IB LIQUIDATED DAMAGES That pursuant to the provisions under liquidated damages in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of said Specifications, five hundred dollars ($500) shall be the amount of liquidated damages for every day of delay in the completion of work. PREBID CONFERENCE A. Time and Place: A prebid conference will be held at the time and place specified in the Notice Inviting Bids. B. Attendance: Attendance at the prebid conference is manditory. Any bidder absent from the prebid conference shall have their bid disqualified as non- responsive. The conference will be conducted by the District and Design Engineer. C. Site Tour: A site tour will be conducted immediately following the conference. PERMITS AND LICENSES A. Procurement of Permits and Licenses: The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, fees, and taxes and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. B. California Contractor's License: Bidders shall have a valid California contractor's license for the type of work required on this Contract. C. The Contractor shall be aware of and abide by the conditions and restrictions of the Tahoe Regional Planning Agency (TRPA) permit for this project. A copy of the TRPA permit is on file at the District office. D. The Contractor shall be aware of and abide by the conditions and restrictions of the Lahontan Regional Water Quality Control Board permit for this project. A copy of this permit is on file at the District office. SHEETING, SHORING, BRACING, AND VENTILATING Pursuant to the provisions of California Labor Code, Section 6707, each bid submitted in response to this Notice Inviting Bids shall contain, as a bid item, adequate sheeting, shoring, bracing, and ventilation or equivalent method, for the protection of life and limb in trenches, open excavation, scaffolding, and vaults which shall conform to applicable safety orders. 1990 IB -9 W3266B.10 32668.10 I8 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. The bidder selected by the District shall prepare and submit the Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values as specified under Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values, and subsequent titles in the SPECIAL CONDITIONS. WAGE RATES A. State Determination. Bidders are hereby notified that pursuant to provisions of the Labor Code of the State of California, the Director of Industrial Relations has ascertained the prevailing rate of per diem wages of the locality in which this work is to be performed, applicable to the work to be done. Copies of these wage determinations are on file with the District. B. Classification Not Listed: Bidders shall notify promptly the District, in writing, about all the classifications of labor not listed in the prevailing wage determination but necessary for the performance of the Work. 1990 IB -10. W3266B.10 32663.10 IB GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 1 DEFINITIONS 1-1 DEFINITIONS Wherever in these Specifications, or in other Contract Documents, the following terms are used, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as specified herein. Additional definitions and abbreviations are specified in the Special Conditions. ADDENDUM: A supplement to any of the Contract Documents issued in writing prior to the opening of bids. APPRENTICE: (1) A person employed and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau; or (2) a person in his first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Council (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. AWARD: The formal acceptance of the Bid by the District's Board of Directors authorizing a contract and Notice -of -Award. BIDDER: Any individual, firm, co -partnership, or corporation submitting a Bid for the Work, acting directly or through a duly authorized agent. CONTRACT: The written instrument executed by the Contractor and the District by which the Contractor is bound to furnish all labor, equipment, and materials and to perform the Work, and by which the District is obligated to compensate the Contractor therefore at the prices set forth therein. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Notice Inviting Bids, Information for Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Bid, Certificates and Affidavits, Contract, Payment Bond, Evidence of Insurance, Performance Bond, Plans, and Addenda, if any. CONTRACTOR: The person or persons, co -partnership, or corporation who has or have entered into a contract with the District for the performance of the Work. DAYS: Unless otherwise designated, days will be understood to mean calendar days, and is defined as every day appearing on the calendar. DESIGN ENGINEER: The firm or person and his properly authorized assistants, designated by the District to prepare Plans and Specifications for the Work. DISTRICT: The South Tahoe Public Utility District, El Dorado County, California, acting through the Board of Directors or other duly authorized authority. 1990 GC 1-1 W3266B.10 32666.10 GC1 DISTRICT MANAGER: The duly appointed manager of the South Tahoe Public Utility District acting directly or through the Board of Directors and its authorized agents, or the assistant manager so acting on behalf of the manager. DRAWINGS: Plans. ENGINEER: The firm or person and his properly authorized assistants, designated as such by the District. FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND: The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his surety as a guarantee that the Contractor will be responsible for the entire and satisfactory fulfillment of the Contract. INSPECTOR: An authorized representative of the Engineer assigned to make all necessary inspection of the Work performed, or being performed, or of the material furnished or being furnished by the Contractor. MATERIALS: Material incorporated in the project, and equipment and other material consumed in the performance of the Work. NOTICE INVITING BIDS: The public announcement inviting bids for the performance of the Work. NOTICE OF AWARD: A written notice issued by the District, accepting the Contractors bid. NOTICE TO PROCEED: A written directive issued by the District, authorizing the Contractor to start performance of the Work. OWNER: The individual, company, municipality or other legal entity that has contracted for the performance of the Work or for whom the Work is being performed. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR OWNER'S AGENT: The authorized representative of the District, which may be an individual or a firm, the Engineer, or his assistants assigned to the Work, the Project, or any part thereof during the performance of the Work by the Contractor and until final acceptance. PAYMENT BOND: The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his surety as a guarantee that he will pay in full all bills and accounts for materials and labor used in the construction of the Work, as provided by law. This bond sometimes referred to as Labor and Materials Bond. PLANS: All drawings or reproductions thereof pertaining to details of the Work and which are made a part of the Contract Documents. PROJECT: The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. SPECIFICATIONS: The written directions, provisions, and requirements for performing the Work. 1990 GC 1-2 W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC1 SUBCONTRACTOR: The person or persons, co -partnership, or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or furnishing material worked into a special design in accordance with the Plans and Specifications for the Work. SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT: Written amendment to the Contract Documents executed by the District and the Contractor. SURETY OR SURETIES: The corporate bodies which are bound by the Faithful Performance Bond and the Payment Bond with and for the Contractor, and which are engaged to be responsible for the entire and satisfactory fulfillment of the Contract and for the payment of all lawful debts incurred in fulfilling the Contract. WORK: The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 1990 GC 1-3. W3266B.10 32668.10 GC1 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 2 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT 2-1 AWARD The District, through its duly authorized body or agent, will award the Contract to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder, or all bids will be rejected, as soon as practicable after the date of opening of bids. A Notice of Award will be sent to the successful bidder either hand delivered or sent by certified mail. The low bid will be determined by the lowest lump sum base bid price. The District may accept or reject any or all alternates. 2-2 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT The successful bidder shall, within the time specified in the Information for Bidders, execute the Contract and simultaneously therewith furnish the required Payment Bond and Performance Bond, in the amounts indicated in the Information for Bidders, and shall file insurance policies and/or certificates of insurance as required herein. 2-3 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE A. GENERAL. On all projects, the Contractor shall carry all insurance required by Federal, State, County, and local laws. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the life of the Contract, adequate fire, workmen's compensation, public liability, and property damage insurance. The specific requirements for insurance as set forth in these General Conditions, shall be considered as minimum requirements. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof of carriage of insurance, and shall submit to the District, before work on the contract starts, certificates of all insurance policies and bonds. Neither the Contractor, nor any subcontractor, shall commence work under this Contract until the District has approved all required insurance policies. The certificates of insurance will be attached to the Contract by the District's and filed in the District's office. Insurance certificates shall set forth the following information and shall be signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company. The District shall not execute said contract until this General Condition 2-3-A is complied with. 1. Name and address of the insured. 2. The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. 3. The number of the policy and the type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by the certificate. 1990 GC 2-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 OC2 4. The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by the certificate. 5. A statement that the insurance covered by the certificate applies to all of the operations on and at the site of the project which are undertaken by the insured during the life of the Contract. 6. Public liability and Comprehensive General Liability, completed operations broad form property damage insurance shall include elevator liability, water damage liability, and automobile liability including nonowned and rented cars. 7. A statement that all coverage is on an occurrence basis rather than a claims made basis. 8. A statement that "explosion, collapse, and underground" coverage is included. 9. A provision that the policy or policies may not be cancelled or reduced in coverage until at least ninety (90) days after written notice has been sent to the District. 10. A statement that a cross liability or severability of interests clause is included (unless a separate policy covering the District is provided). B. COMPENSATION INSURANCE. The Contractor shall take out and maintain Workmen's Compensation Insurance as required by the Labor Code of the State of California for all his employees employed at the site of the project during the life of his Contract. In case any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require each subcontractor to provide Workmen's Compensation Insurance for his employees unless such employees are covered by the Contractor. In the event any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under this Contract is not protected by the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the Contractor shall provide, and shall cause the subcontractor to provide special insurance for the protection of such employees not otherwise protected. C. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE. The Contractor shall procure, and maintain during the life of his Contract, such comprehensive general liability and property damage insurance necessary to protect him, the South Tahoe Public Utility District (STPUD), Board Members, and their employees, agents, and servants, the Design Engineer, the Engineer, and any subcontractor performing work under his Contract, from all claims for bodily injury, including accidental death and property damage claims arising from operations under this Contract, whether such operations are the Contractor's or the subcontractor's. The STPUD and Design Engineer and Engineer shall be named as additional primary insureds without offset against their existing insurance, and the certificate of insurance shall include reference to such provisions. All insurance by the Contractor shall be primary to the District's insurance. 1990 GC 2-2 W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC2 1. Unless otherwise specifically required by the Special Conditions, the minimum limits of comprehensive general liability and property damage liability shall be as follows: a. Comprehensive general liability insurance for injuries, including accidental death, to any one person in an amount not less than b. Subject to the same limits on account of one occurrence, in a total amount not less than 1,000,000 1,000,000 c. Broad form property damage insurance in an amount not less than $1,000,000 2. Such policy shall not exclude coverage for the following: a. Injury to or destruction of any property arising out of the collapse of/or structural injury to any building or structure due: 1) To grading of land excavation, borrowing, filling, backfilling, tunneling, pile driving, cofferdam work, or caisson work; or 2) To moving, shoring, underpinning, raising, or demolition of any building or structure, or removal or rebuilding of any structural support thereof. b. Injury to or destruction of wires, conduits, pipes, mains, sewers, or other similar property or any apparatus in connection therewith, below the surface of the ground, if such injury or destruction is caused by and occurs during the use of mechanical equipment for the purpose of grading of land, paving, excavating, drilling; or injury to or destruction of any property at any time resulting therefrom. c. Injury to or destruction of any property arising out of blasting or explosion. d. Motor vehicle public liability and property damage insurance to cover each automobile, truck, and other vehicle used in the performance of the Contract in an amount of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000.00) for one person, and One Million Dollars ($1,000,000.00) for more than one person, and property damage in the sum of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000.00) resulting from any one occurrence which may arise from the operations of the Contractor in performing the work provided for herein. 1990 GC 2-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC2 3. The Contractor shall carry and maintain fire and extended coverage with an endorsement for vandalism and malicious mischief in his name and also in the name of the District in an amount of at least fifty percent (50%) of the value of the Contract. Except that on pipeline and similar projects where fire hazard is negligible or nonexistent the District may waive the requirement for fire insurance for that value of the contract that concerns pipelines or similar projects. 4. The Contractor shall secure "All Risk" type Builder's Risk Insurance for Work to be performed. Unless specifically authorized by the District, the amount of such insurance shall not be less than fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price. Such policy shall include coverage for earthquake, landslide, flood, collapse, or loss due to the results of faulty workmanship, during the Contract Time and until final acceptance of Work by the District. 1990 GC 2-4. W3266B.10 32668.10 GC2 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 3 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND PROGRESS 3-1 COMMENCEMENT The Contractor or subcontractor shall commence work on or before the tenth 10th) day after receiving the Notice to Proceed, and shall complete all work under the Contract within the period of time specified in the Formal Contract. Notice to Proceed will be issued not later than forty-five (45) days after the Contract has been awarded unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, or as may be specified in the Special Conditions, provided satisfactory evidence of insurance and the construction bonds have been submitted to the District. 3-2 SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty subcontractors on those parts of the Work which, under normal contracting practices, are performed by specialty subcontractors. The Contractor shall not award any work to any subcontractor not listed on his bid without prior written approval of the District, which approval will not be given until the Contractor submits to the District, a written statement concerning the proposed award to the subcontractor, which statement shall comply with the provisions of Sections 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code which permit such subcontracted work. The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the District for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the General Conditions and other contract documents insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the District may exercise over the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents. Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relations between any subcontractor and the District. Contractor shall not substitute any person as subcontractor in place of a subcontractor listed in his Bid Proposal, without the written approval of the Engineer. Substitutions must be in accordance with the provisions of the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act, beginning with Section 4100 of the Public Contracts Code. Violation of this act by the Contractor may subject him to, but are not limited to, penalties which may include cancellation of Contract, assessment of the ten percent (10%) of the subcontractor's bid and disciplinary action by the Contractor's State License Board. 1990 GC 3-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC3 3-3 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The Contractor shall, at all times during working hours, be represented in all matters pertaining to this project by one, and only one, fully competent and experienced general superintendent. Instructions and information given by the Engineer to the Contractor's superintendent on the work shall be considered as having been given to the Contractor. Before any work is done at the jobsite, the Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer stating who the Contractor's superintendent will be, giving his home address and telephone number. The Engineer shall be informed in writing prior to any change of general superintendent. A statement naming more than one representative at a time to be in charge and depending upon which is present at the time will not be acceptable. 3-4 ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The written dimensions on the Plans are presumed to be correct, but the Contractor shall check carefully all dimensions before beginning the Work. If any errors or omissions are discovered, the Engineer shall be so advised in writing and will furnish detailed instructions or changes in the work if required. Any such adjustments made by the Contractor without prior review and acceptance shall be at his own risk, and the settlement of any complications or disputed expenses arising from such adjustment shall be made by the Contractor, at his own expense. 3-5 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN Whenever, in the opinion of the Engineer, any superintendent, foreman, or workman employed by the Contractor or his subcontractors is disrespectful, intemperate, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable, he shall, at the written request of the Engineer, be removed and not again employed on the work without the written consent of the Engineer. 3-6 SUSPENSION OF WORK In case of suspension of Work from any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and shall store them properly if necessary and shall provide suitable drainage and erect temporary structures where necessary. Temporary storage shall be as specified elsewhere in these General conditions. In the event of temporary suspension of work, or during inclement weather, or whenever the District Manager shall direct, the Contractor will protect carefully his work and material against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor to so protect his work, such materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Should the District be prevented or enjoined from proceeding with work or from authorizing its prosecution either before or after its prosecution, by reason of any litigation, the Contractor shall not be entitled to make or assert claim for damage by reason of said delay, but time for completion of 1990 GC 3-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC3 the Work will be extended to such reasonable time as the District may determine will compensate for time lost by such delay with such determination to be set forth in writing. The Engineer may at any time, by notice in writing to the Contractor, suspend any part of the work for such period of time as may in his opinion be necessary to prevent improper execution of the work, and the Contractor shall have no claim for damage or additional compensation on account of any such suspension. If it should become necessary to stop work for a definite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not become an obstruction, nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed; he shall provide suitable drainage by opening ditches, shoulder drains, and erect temporary structures where necessary. 3-7 WEATHER RELATED EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor may be entitled to an extension of Contract time if the Work has been suspended in whole or in part due to weather conditions which delayed progress; provided that such delayed progress is clearly beyond the control of the Contractor, that the Contractor is not at fault, and that the Contractor is not negligent under the terms of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit the request for a weather related extension of time so that such request is received by the Engineer not later than ten (10) days following the end of the delay causing condition. Such request shall be in writing and shall state the reason for and the extent of the requested time extension. The District will ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay, and make a finding of the facts thereon. No extension in Contract Time will be allowed for the first ten (10) working days requested and ascertained to be justifiably lost due to weather conditions. An extension of time may be granted by the District after the expiration of the time originally fixed in the Contract or as previously extended, and the extension so granted shall be deemed to commence and be effective from the date of such expiration. No other compensation or payment will be allowed for time lost due to weather. Any extension of time shall not release the sureties upon any bond required under the Contract. 3-8 TERMINATION FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT In the event that the Contractor fails to perform any of the terms of the Contract, he shall be in default and notice in writing will be served upon him by the District of such default, and should he neglect or refuse to comply with all the terms of the Contract immediately, as specified in such notice, the District shall have the power to terminate all of the rights of the Contractor in such Contract, but said termination shall not affect or terminate any of the rights of the District as against the Contractor or his surety then existing or which may thereafter accrue because of such default. 1990 GC 3-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC3 If the rights of the Contractor are terminated, as above provided, the District may, at the expense of the Contractor and his surety, complete the Contract, or cause the same to be completed. The determination by the Engineer of the question as to whether the Contractor has failed to perform any of the terms of the Contract shall be conclusive upon the Contractor, his surety and any and all other parties who may have any interest in the Contract or any portion thereof. In the event of any such termination, the District will immediately serve written notice thereof upon the Surety and the Contractor, and the Surety shall have the right to take over and perform the contract; provided, however, that if the Surety within fifteen (15) days after the serving upon it of a notice of termination does not give the District written notice of his intention to take over and perform the Contract, or does not commence performance thereof within thirty (30) days from the date of serving said notice, the District may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion by contract or by any other method the District may deem advisable for the account and at the expense of the Contractor, and his surety shall be liable to the District for any excess cost or other damage occasioned the District thereby, and in such event the District may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing the work such materials, appliances, plants and other property belonging to the Contractor that may be on the site of the work and be necessary therefor. For any portion of such work that the District elects to complete by furnishing employees, materials, tools and equipment, the District shall be compensated for such in accordance with the schedule of compensation for force account work in the section on payment for changes in the work. The foregoing provisions are in addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or remedies available to the District. 3-9 METHODS AND APPLIANCES The methods and equipment adopted by the Contractor shall be such as will secure a satisfactory quality of work and will enable the Contractor to complete the work in the time agreed upon. The selection and use of these methods and appliances is the responsibility of the Contractor. 3-10 DATE OF ACTUAL COMPLETION The date upon which the project will be considered as complete shall be that date upon which the work is accepted by the District. 3-11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE After the Contractor has completed to the best of his knowledge all the work under this Contract, including all of the Contractor's testing and cleanup, the Contractor shall then inform the Engineer by written memorandum that the work has been completed. The Contractor shall then request a final inspection by the Engineer. The Engineer will then make an inspection. If items are found by the Engineer to be incomplete or not in compliance with the Contract requirements, the Engineer will inform the Contractor of such 1990 GC 3-4 W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC3 items. After the Contractor has completed these items, the procedure shall then be the same as specified above for the Contractor's statement of completion and request for final inspection. After all work under the Contract has been completed, as determined by the Engineer, and after the District's final seven-day (7 -day) test operation if such is required, the Engineer will recommend in writing to the District that final acceptance of the entire work under this Contract be made as of the date of the Engineer's final inspection. If the District agrees with the Engineer's recommendation, the District will make final acceptance promptly after receiving the Engineer's recommendation. Unless otherwise specified under Special Conditions, no partial acceptance of any portion of the work will be made and no acceptance other than the final acceptance of the overall completed project will be made. No inspection or acceptance pertaining to specific parts of the project shall be construed as final acceptance of any part until the overall final acceptance by the District is made. 3-12 PROTECTION OF WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the Work until its completion and final acceptance, and he shall at his own expense, replace damaged or lost material, or repair damaged parts of the work, and the Contractor and his Sureties shall be liable therefor. 3-13 WARRANTY OF WORK The Contractor shall guarantee the Work against defective materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of its final acceptance under this Contract except where longer warranty periods are specifically stated. The Contractor shall carry insurance in the amounts specified herein during the entire warranty period. Pursuant to the provisions herein specified, the Contractor shall execute and deliver to the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the Work by the District, a warranty in the form appended to this Part 3 of the General Conditions. All work which has been rejected shall be remedied, or removed and replaced, by the Contractor at his own expense, with work conforming to the Plans and Specifications. Any defective material or workmanship which may be discovered before final acceptance or within one (1) year thereafter shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor at his own expense notwithstanding that it may have been overlooked in previous inspections and estimates. Failure to inspect work at any stage shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform sound and reliable work as herein described. It is the Contractor's ultimate responsibility to deliver at the time of final acceptance a complete project that complies in all details with these Contract Documents. All items shall be ready to operate. Any omission or failure on the part of the Engineer to discover or notify the Contractor of or to condemn defective work or material at the time of construction shall not be deemed an acceptance, and the Contractor will be required to correct defective work or material prior to final acceptance. 1990 GC 3-5 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC3 The Engineer will endeavor to locate any errors or defective materials or workmanship and call them to the attention of the Contractor prior to subsequent work being performed. However, the Engineer is under no obligation to do so and neither the District nor the Engineer shall be held liable because errors or defective material or workmanship by the Contractor are not discovered by the Engineer prior to subsequent work. During the one (1) year warranty period, should the Contractor fail to remedy defective material and/or workmanship, or to make replacements within five (5) days after written notice by the District, it is agreed that the District may make such repairs and replacements and the actual cost of the required labor and materials shall be chargeable to and payable by the Contractor. In the event it is necessary for the District to file suit to enforce any liability of the Contractor pursuant to this section WARRANTY OF WORK, the District shall be entitled to recover from the Contractor, in addition to all other amounts found due and owing, costs of suit and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys' fees, incurred by the District in successfully enforcing the Contractor's obligations, all to be taxed as costs and included in any judgement rendered. The warranty provided herein shall not be in lieu of, but shall be in addition to any warranties or other obligations otherwise imposed by the Contract Document or by law. The remedies provided herein shall not be exclusive and the District shall be entitled to any and all remedies provided by law. 3-14 CONTINGENCIES All loss or damage arising from obstruction or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, from the action of the elements, or from any act or omission on the part of the Contractor or any person or agent employed by him shall be borne by the Contractor. 3-15 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is agreed by the parties to the Contract that in case all the work called for under the Contract is not completed before or upon the expiration of the time limits set forth in the Contract Documents, damage will be sustained by the District, and that it is and will be impracticable to determine the actual damage which the District will sustain in the event of and by reason of such delay, and it is therefore agreed that the Contractor will pay to the District the amount specified in the Formal Contract for each calendar day between the completion date required by the Contract, and the date of final acceptance by the District, as liquidated damages and not as penalty. It is further agreed that the amounts stipulated are reasonable estimates of the damages that would be sustained by the District and the Contractor agrees to pay such liquidated damages as herein provided. In case the liquidated damages are not paid, the Contractor agrees that the District may deduct the amount thereof from any money due to or that may become due the Contractor by progress payments or otherwise under the Contract, or if said amount_is not sufficient, recover the total amount. 1990 GC 3-6 W3266B.10 32663.10 GC3 The Contractor shall not be assessed with liquidated damages during any delay in the completion of the work caused by acts of God, acts of criminals, acts of the District, acts of the public utilities, fire, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, labor strikes that delay the critical sequence of the work, or delays of subcontractors due to such causes, provided that the Contractor shall notify the District in writing the causes of such delay as stated hereinbefore. 1990 GC 3-7. W3266B.10 32668.10 GC3 0 WARRANTY FORM WARRANTY FOR SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT We hereby guarantee the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System Improvements Phase I Project, and all associated work that we have constructed for a period of one (1) year after the date of acceptance of the work by the South Tahoe Public Utility District. We agree that if any of the equipment should fail due to any reason other than improper maintenance or improper operation, if any pipe or appurtenances should develop leakage, or if any settlement of fill or backfill occurs, or should any portion of the Work fail to fulfill any of the requirements of the Specifications, we will, within five days after written notice of such defects, commence to repair or replace the same together with any other work which may be damaged or displaced in so doing. In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within a reasonable time after being notified, or should the exigencies of the case require repairs or replacements to be made before we can be notified or respond to notification, we do hereby authorize the South Tahoe Public Utility District to proceed to have the defect repaired and made good at our expense, and we will pay the cost therefor upon demand. We agree to carry insurance for the amounts called for in the Specification throughout the one (1) year warranty period. The warranty provided herein shall not be in lieu of, but shall be in addition to any warranties or other obligations otherwise imposed by the Contract Documents and by law. Contractor: Signed: Title: Date: Authorized Representative) Authorized Representative) 1990 GC 3A-1. W3266B.10 32663.10 GC3A 0 0 GENERAL CONDITION - PART 4 SCOPE OF WORK 4-1 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The intent of the Plans and Specifications is to prescribe a complete work or improvement which the Contractor shall perform in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and in full compliance with the terms of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide the District with a complete and operable Work or improvement, even though the Plans and Specifications may not specifically call out all items or items of work required of the Contractor to complete his tasks, incidental appurtenances, materials, and the like, and without additional compensation. The Notice Inviting Bids, Information for Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Plans, and all supplementary documents are intended to be complete, and complementary and to prescribe a complete work. If any omissions are made of information necessary to carry out the full intent and meaning of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately call the matter to the attention of the Engineer for furnishing of detail instructions or changes in the work. Any drawings or Plans listed anywhere in the Specifications or Addenda thereto shall be regarded as a part thereof and of the Contract. Anything mentioned in these Specifications and not indicated on the Plans, or anything indicated on the Plans and not mentioned in these Specifications, shall be in the same force and effect as if indicated or mentioned in both. 4-2 PERFORMANCE OF WORK Unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, water, light, power, trans- portation, temporary construction, superintendence, and incidentals; includ- ing, but not limited to, dust, site drainage, noise, and traffic control measures; and shall perform work involved in executing the Contract in accor- dance with the requirements of the Contract Documents within the time specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary supervision, control, and direction to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: A. All employees on the Work or work site and other persons and organizations who may be affected thereby; B. All the work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage or on or off the site; and C. All other property at the site. 1990 GC 4-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC4 4-3 ADDENDA, REVISIONS, AND SUPPLEMENTARY DRAWINGS The Work shall conform to such other provisions and drawings relating thereto as may be furnished by the District prior to the opening of Proposals as part of the addenda and to such drawings, explanation of details, or minor modifications as may be furnished from time to time during construction including such minor modifications as the District may consider necessary during the prosecution of the Work. 4-4 CHANGES IN THE WORK The District, without invalidating the Contract and without notification of Sureties, may order extra work or may make changes by altering or deleting any portion of the Work as specified herein or as deemed necessary or desirable by the District. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original Contract except that any claim for extension of time and additional costs caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such extra work or change. In giving instructions, the Engineer shall have authority to make minor changes in the Work, not involving extra cost, and not inconsistent with the purposes of the Work. No extra work or change shall be made unless in pursuance of a written order by the District, and no claim for an addition to the total amount of the Contract shall be valid unless so ordered, except in an emergency endangering life or property. It is mutually understood that it is inherent in the nature of municipal construction that some changes in the Plans and Specifications may be necessary during the course of construction to adjust them to field conditions, and that it is of the essence of the Contract to recognize a normal and expected margin of change. The Engineer shall have the right to make such changes, from time to time, in the Plans, in the character of the work, and in the termini of the project as may be necessary or desirable to insure the completion of the work in the most satisfactory manner without invalidating the Contract. Upon demand of either the Contractor or the District an equitable adjustment satisfactory to both parties shall be made in the basis of payment for extra work. The prices agreed upon and any agreed upon adjustment in Contract time shall be incorporated in the written order issued by the District, which will be written so as to indicate acceptance on the part of the Contractor as evi- denced by his signature. In the event prices cannot be agreed upon, the District reserves the right to terminate the Contract as it applies to the items in question and make such arrangements as it may deem necessary to complete the work, or it may direct the, Contractor to proceed with the items in question on a force account basis as provided hereinafter. 4-5 FORCE ACCOUNT If so directed by the District, the Contractor shall perform extra work and changes in the Work under force account procedures. Under such procedures the Contractor will be compensated as follows: 1990 GC 4-2 W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC4 A. LABOR. 1. For all labor and for foremen in direct charge of the specific 0 operations the Contractor will be paid: a. The actual cost of wages paid by Contractor, but at rates not to exceed those for comparable labor currently employed on the Project. b. The actual cost of industrial accident or Workmen's Compensation Insurance. c. The actual cost of social security taxes and unemployment compensation insurance. d. The actual amounts paid by the Contractor by reason of an employment Contract generally applicable to his employees. B. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT For any machine power tools and special or heavy equipment used, the Contractor shall be paid in accordance with the latest edition of "Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates" published by the State of California, Department of Transportation, Caltrans. In the event that any of the equipment to be used is not shown in said schedule, the rental rate for such equipment shall be as agreed upon in writing before the work is started. No allowance shall be made for the use of small tools and minor items of equipment which shall be considered as part of the overhead. As used herein, such tools and equipment are defined as individual tools or pieces of equipment having a replacement value of One Hundred Fifty (150) Dollars each or less. Rental paid shall be only for the time the applicable equipment is actively engaged in the work. C. MATERIALS. For all materials accepted by the Engineer and used in the work the Contractor shall be paid the actual cost of such material, including transportation charges. D. SUPERVISION, OVERHEAD, AND PROFIT NEGOTIATED. 1. The cost of general superintendence will not be included in the preceding items. Such cost shall be understood to be included in the amount allowed for overhead. 2. Overhead and profit for the work contemplated shall be a lump sum negotiated with the Contractor and the District. a. The Contractor shall furnish data satisfactory to the Engineer substantiating Contractor's claim for overhead and profit. b. The District will pay not more and Contractor agrees to be paid not more than the following amounts for overhead and profit. The District may pay amounts less than those stipulated below based on negotiated overhead and profit. 1990 GC 4-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC4 1) For work performed by the Contractor. a) For cost of the work contemplated less than $10,000, 20 percent of direct costs. b) For cost of the work contemplated $10,000 or more, 15 percent of direct costs. 2) For the Contractor when work is performed by a subcontractor, 10 percent of direct costs. 3) The maximum amount shall apply regardless of the number of tier subcontractors involved. E. DEFECTIVE WORK. The Contractor shall repair, reconstruct, replace, or otherwise make acceptable the work found by the Engineer to be defective, and cost therefor shall be considered as included in the overhead and profit lump sum. F. RECORDS. 1. The Contractor's representative and the Engineer shall compare the records of the work performed as ordered on a force account basis at the end of each day on which such work is performed. 2. Copies of these records shall be made on suitable forms provided for this purpose and signed by both the Engineer and the Contractor's representative. 3. All claims for work done on a force account basis shall be certified and submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor, and such statements shall be filed with the Engineer not later than the fifth (5th) day of the month following that in which the work was actually performed. 4-6 EXTRA WORK Work will be classified as extra work when determined by the Engineer that such work is not covered by the Contract Documents. 4-7 CHANGE ORDER A. Unless ordered by force account, extra work and changes in the Work will be ordered in writing by the District by means of a Change Order in which the adjustments of Contract Price and Contract Time will be set forth, prior to execution of the extra work. B. Change Orders shall be executed by the District, the Engineer, and the Contractor. C. The value of extra work and changes shall be determined and paid for in one of the following ways: 1990 GC 4-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC4 1. By unit prices mutually agreed upon by the District and Contractor. 2. By a lump sum based upon the Contractor's estimate and the Engineer's review and acceptance of the estimate. 3. Payment for extra work and changes in the Work required to be performed pursuant to the provisions of this section, in the absence of an executed Change Order, will be made by Force Account as provided herein, or as may be otherwise agreed by the Contractor and the District. D. The Contractor shall do such extra work and changes in the Work and furnish material and equipment therefor upon receipt of an approved Change Order or other written order of the District, and in the absence of such Change Order or other written order of the District, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment for such extra work and changes in the Work. 1. In no case shall extra work or changes in the Work be undertaken without written notice from the District to proceed with such extra work or changes. E. Contractor shall submit to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data to substantiate Contractor's request for payment. F. Extensions to the Contract Time will be made only if and to the extent that the acceptable causes of delay affect the prosecution of Work having a direct effect on the critical sequence of performance (critical path) required to complete the Contract within the Contract Time. 4-8 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA WORK If the Contractor claims that any instructions involve extra cost or additional time under this Contract, he shall give the District written notice thereof within seventy-two (72) hours after the receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute the work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, and the procedure shall then be as provided for under CHANGES IN THE WORK. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within fifteen (15) days of such occurrence unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. If the Contractor claims that defective Plans and Specifications involve extra work under this Contract, he shall give the District written notice thereof within seventy-two (72) hours after the occurrence of the cost and time associated with such extra work, and the procedures shall be as specified before under Changes in the Work. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within fifteen (15) days of such occurrence unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 1990 GC 4-5. W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC4 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 5 CONTROL OF WORK 5-1 WORK SCHEDULE The Contractor shall submit work schedules as specified in the SPECIAL CONDITIONS. The Contractor shall assume the full responsibility for performing the Work in an orderly procedure under the Contract. 5-2 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER The Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and will decide questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of the completed work. In observing the Contractor's work, the Engineer's efforts will be directed towards providing Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the intent of the Contract Documents. Neither the authority of the Engineer to act under this section or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, nor any decision made in good faith shall give rise to any duty by Engineer to Contractor or to any other person or organization, including but not limited to, subcontractors, suppliers, insurers, employees, or agents, whether performing work on the site or not. The Engineer shall not be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction or for the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for the safety of persons or property on or about the site of the Work. 5-3 FORMAL PROTEST If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him to be outside the requirements of the Contract, or if he considers any instructions, ruling, or decision of the Engineer to be unfair, he shall, within ten (10) days after any such demand is made, or instruction, ruling or decision is given, file a written protest with the Engineer, stating clearly and in detail his objections and the reasons therefor. Except for such protests as are made of record in the manner and within the time above stated, the Contractor shall be deemed to have waived and does hereby waive all claims for Extra Work, damages and extensions of time resulting from demands, instructions, rulings and decisions of the Engineer. Upon receipt of any such protest from the Contractor, the Engineer shall review the demand, instructions, rulings, or decisions objected to and shall promptly advise the Contractor in writing of his final decision, which shall be binding, unless within ten (10) days thereafter the Contractor shall file with the District a formal protest against said final decision of the Engineer. The District shall consider and render a final decision of any such protest within thirty (30) days of receipt of same. 1990 GC 5-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 Gc5 5-4 PLANS The Contract Plans consist of general drawings. These indicate such details as are necessary to give a comprehensive idea of the construction contemplated. All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given on the Contract Plans shall be in writing. The Contract Plans shall be supplemented by such working or shop drawings prepared by the Contractor as are necessary to adequately control the work. No change shall be made by the Contractor in any working or shop drawing after it has been stamped by the Engineer "Resubmittal not Required." Any drawings or Plans listed in the Specifications shall be regarded as a part thereof and the Engineer will furnish from time to time such additional drawings, Plans, profiles, and information as he may consider necessary for the Contractor's guidance. All authorized alterations affecting the requirements and information given on the Plans shall be in writing. No changes shall be made of any Plan or drawing after the same has been stamped by the Engineer "Resubmittal not Required." 5-5 DOCUMENTS AVAILABLE AT THE SITE The Contractor shall keep a copy of the Contract Documents at the site of the Work and shall give access thereto to the Engineer at all times. 5-6 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND ALLOWABLE DEVIATIONS Finished surfaces in all cases shall conform with lines, grades, cross sections, and dimensions indicated on the Plans. Allowable deviations, other than specified tolerances, from the Plans and working drawings will in all cases be determined by the Engineer. 5-7 COORDINATION AND INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The Plans, including schematic drawings, Specifications, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Contract Change Orders, and all supplementary documents are essential parts of the Contract, and a requirement occurring in one is as binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to be coordinated and to describe and provide for a complete work. Should it appear that the Work or any of the matters relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall apply to the Engineer for such further explanations as may be necessary and shall conform to them as part of the Contract. In the event of any doubt or question arising regarding the true meaning of the Contract Documents, reference shall be made to the Engineer, whose decision thereon shall be final. In the event of any discrepancy, between any drawing and the figures written thereon, the figures shall be taken as correct. Figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions. Scaled dimensions shall not be used in the performance of the Work. In the event of there being a conflict between one Contract Document and any of the other Contract Documents, the Document highest in precedence shall control and supersede the Document which is contrary to it. The order of 1990 GC 5-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 CCS precedence of the Contract Documents from the highest to the lowest in precedence, shall be as follows: FIRST: Supplemental Agreements, the last in time being the first in precedence. SECOND: The Formal Contract. THIRD: Notice Inviting Bids. FOURTH: Information for Bidders. FIFTH: Tahoe Regional Planning Agency Permit. SIXTH: Lahontan Regional Water Quality Control Permit SEVENTH: Special Conditions (Division 1). EIGHTH: Specifications (Division 2 through 17). NINTH: Plans. TENTH: General Conditions. ELEVENTH: Contractor Bid. 5-8 ORDER OF WORK When required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall follow the sequence of operations as set forth therein. Full compensation for conforming with such requirements will be considered as included in the prices paid for Contract items of work and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor. 5-9 INSPECTION The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with every reasonable facility for ascertaining whether or not the work as performed is in accordance with the requirements and intent of the Specifications and Contract. If the Engineer requests it, the Contractor at any time before acceptance of the Work shall remove or uncover such portions of the finished work as may be directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the Work to the standards required by the Specifications. Should the work thus exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering or removing and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed, will be paid for as provided under CHANGES IN THE WORK, but should the work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable the uncovering or removing and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed shall be at the Contractor's expense. Inspection or supervision by the Engineer shall not be considered as direct control of the individual workman and his work. The direct control shall be solely the responsibility of the Contractor's foremen and superintendent. 1990 GC 5-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 GCS The inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill his Contract as herein provided, and unsuitable materials may be rejected notwithstanding that such work and materials may have been previously overlooked and accepted or estimated for payment. Should any work be covered up before acceptance or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. 5-10 LINES AND GRADES Profiles and elevations are shown on the Plans. Elevations are referred to a datum as shown on the Plans. All work under this Contract shall be built in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Plans. These lines and grades may be modified as provided in the Contract. The establishment of the lines and grades shall be as set forth under Special Conditions. 5-11 CORRECTION OF WORK All work, all materials, whether incorporated in the Work or not, all processes of manufacture, and all methods of construction shall be at all times and places subject to the inspection of the Engineer who shall be the final judge of the quality and suitability of the Work, materials, processes of manufacture, and methods of construction for the purpose for which they are used. Should they fail to meet his approval, they shall be forthwith reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected, as the case may be, by the Contractor at his own expense. Rejected material shall immediately be removed from the site. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is undesirable to replace any defective or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor hereunder shall be reduced by such amount as in the judgement of the Engineer shall be equitable. The Contractor shall promptly remove all work which does not meet specifications determined by the Engineer as failing to conform to the Contract and shall promptly replace and re-evaluate such work in accordance with the Contract and without additional expense to the District, and shall bear all costs of making good any work destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. Materials condemned or rejected by the Engineer as not meeting the requirements of the Specifications may be branded or otherwise marked by the Engineer and shall, on demand, be at once removed by the Contractor to a satisfactory distance from the Work. If the Contractor does not remove such material within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the District may remove and store the materials at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal and storage within ten 10) days thereafter, the District may, upon ten (10) days written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale. The District will account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all the costs and expenses that should have been borne by the Contractor, including the costs and expenses of sale. 1990 GC 5-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC5 Re-examination of any work may be ordered by the Engineer at any time prior to final acceptance, and if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the District will pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such costs. No partial payment, inspection, taking possession of, or other act made or done by the Engineer or the District with respect to the Work prior to the final completion and acceptance thereof shall affect or prejudice the right of the Engineer or the District to reject any defective work or material or to require the complete fulfillment of all provisions of the Contract. If the Engineer deems it expedient and not in the best interest of the District to correct work injured or done not in accordance with the Contract, the defective work may be accepted subject to an equitable deduction from the Contract Price which may be made therefore by the District upon certificate from the Engineer. 1990 GC 5-5. W32663.10 32663.10 GC5 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 6 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 6-1 GENERAL All equipment, materials, and articles incorporated in the work covered by this Contract shall be new and subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. Where equipment, materials, or articles are referred to in the Specifications as "or equal," or "equal to" any particular standard, the Engineer shall decide the question of equality. Wherever any standard published specification is referred to, the latest edition or revision, including all amendments, shall be used unless otherwise specified. Materials of a general description shall be the best of their several kinds, free from defects, and adapted to the use for which provided. The physical characteristics of all materials not particularly specified shall conform to the latest standards published by the American Society for Testing and Materials, where applicable. All material shall be new and of the specified quality and equal to the accepted samples, if samples have been submitted. All work shall be done and completed in a thorough, workmanlike manner notwithstanding any omission from these Specifications or from the Plans; and it shall be the duty of the Contractor to call the Engineer's attention to apparent errors or omissions and request instructions before proceeding with the work. The Engineer may, by appropriate instructions, correct errors and supply omissions, which instructions shall be as binding upon the Contractor as though contained in the original Specifications or Plans. 6-2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT Where material or equipment is designated on the Plans or in the Specifications by a trade or manufacturer's name, it is so designated primarily to establish standards of quality, finish, appearance, and performance. It is not the intent to limit the choice of materials and equipment to the specific product designated. However, requests relative to substitutions for materials or equipment specifically designated on the Plans and in the Specifications will not be considered until after award of the Contract. Requests relative to substitutions for materials or equipment specifically designated on the Plans or in the Specifications shall be made in writing, and such requests shall be accompanied by complete data on which the Engineer can make determination on the merits of the proposed substitution. The written request shall state how the product proposed for a substitution compares with or differs from the designated product in composition, size, arrangement, performance, etc., and in addition, the request shall be accompanied by documentary evidence of equality in price and delivery or evidence of difference in price and delivery. Data on price shall be in the form of certified quotations from suppliers of both the designated and proposed items. All items accepted for substitution shall be subject to all applicable provisions of the Specifications. All specific 1990 GC 6-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC6 requirements of the Specifications must be adhered to, and all necessary modifications shall be made in the articles specified by trade name, type, or model of manufacturer's equipment to make it conform to the specific requirements of the Specifications and the actual conditions under which the product is required to be used. Should a substitution be allowed under the foregoing provisions, and should the item subsequently prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it was intended, the Contractor, shall without cost to the District, and without obligation on the part of the Engineer, replace the item with the material originally specified. 6-3 SAMPLE AND TESTING All materials to be incorporated in the work shall be subject to sampling, testing, and acceptance. Samples furnished by the Contractor shall be representative of the materials to be used. The Engineer may select samples or may require that samples be delivered to and tested at a laboratory designated by the Engineer at no additional cost to the District. All sampling and testing of materials shall be done in accordance with the latest designated standard methods of AASHTO or ASTM, or in accordance with special methods designated in the Specifications. Sieves used in determining the grading of samples of aggregates, select material, and other graded materials, shall conform to ASTM Designation E 11. Sieves 1/4 -inch and larger shall have square openings and are designated by the size of opening in inches. Sieves smaller than 1/4 -inch shall have square openings and are designated by number. 6-4 FABRICATED MATERIALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS Fabricated materials and shop drawings shall be handled as set forth in the Special Conditions. 6-5 MATERIALS FURNISHED BY THE OWNER All materials and/or services furnished by the District shall be obtained by the Contractor as indicated in the Special Conditions. The cost of handling and placing District furnished materials shall be included in the price paid for the Contract item involving such material. 6-6 STORAGE OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall provide proper storage facilities and exercise such measures as will insure the preservation of the specified quality and fitness of all materials and equipment to be used in the work. Stored materials shall be located so as to provide reasonable access for inspection. That portion of the right-of-way not required for public travel may be used for storage purposes unless prohibited by other provisions of the Contract Documents or by the agency having jurisdiction over the right-of-way. Any additional space required shall be provided by the Contractor at no cost to the District. Protection of materials and equipment stored on the site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The District reserves the right to direct the Contractor to provide proper means of protection for materials if such is deemed advisable by the Engineer; however, the exercise of or failure 1990 GC 6-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC6 to exercise this right shall not be deemed to relieve the Contractor of his primary responsibility for protecting the material and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable warehouses or other adequate means of protection for such of the materials and equipment as require storage or protection. The Contractor shall store and care for the materials and equipment in the most suitable manner to protect them from distortion, rain, dust, or other damage. The cost of replacing any material or equipment damaged in storage shall be borne by the Contractor, and the fact that material or equipment has been damaged after partial payment has been made shall not relieve the Contractor of his primary responsibility. No motor shall be left uncovered or unprotected. 6-7 REJECTED MATERIALS Materials not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications, whether in place or not, may be rejected. Rejected materials shall be removed immediately from the site of the work unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. No rejected material, the defects of which have been subsequently corrected, shall be used unless accepted by the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to remove and replace rejected material, the District has authority to do so and to deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 1990 GC 6-3. W3266B.10 32668.10 GC6 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY 7-1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED The Contractor is presumed to know, and at all times shall observe and comply with, all Federal and State laws and Regional Laws and Ordinances, local ordinances, workmen's compensation, occupational disease, and unemployment compensation laws together with the payment of all premiums and taxes therefor; also all laws, ordinances, and regulations in any manner affecting the conduct of the Work, and shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the District and John Carollo Engineers and their officers, agents, and employees against claims arising from the violation of laws, bylaws, ordinances, or regulations, whether by Contractor or by Contractor's Subcontractors or suppliers, his subcontractor or by the subcontractor's employees. 7-2 WORK HOURS AND SAFETY Contractors shall comply with provisions of the Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 327 ET Seq) and the regulations issued thereunder. Contractors shall comply with provisions of the Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, promulgated by the Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, as set forth in Title 29, C.F.R. 7-3 EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES Attention is directed to the provisions in Section 1777.5 (Chapter 1411, Statutes of 1968) and 1777.6 of the California Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices by the Contractor or any subcontractor under him. Section 1777.5, as amended, required the Contractor or subcontractor employing tradesmen in any apprenticeable occupation to apply to the joint apprenticeship committee nearest the site of the public works project and which administers the apprenticeship program in that trade for a certificate of approval. The certificate will also fix the ratio of apprentices to journeymen that will be used in the performance of the Contract. The ratio of apprentices to journeymen in such cases shall not be less than one to five except: A. When unemployment in the area of coverage by the joint apprenticeship committee has exceeded an average of fifteen (15) percent in the ninety 90) days prior to the request for certificate, or B. When the number of apprentices in training in the area exceeds a ratio of one to five, or C. When the trade can show that it is replacing at least 1/30 of its membership through apprenticeship training on an annual basis statewide or locally, or 1990 GC 7-1 W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC7 D. When the Contractor provides evidence that he employs registered apprentices on all of his Contracts on an annual average of not less than one apprentice to eight journeymen. The Contractor is required to make contributions to funds established for the administration of apprenticeship programs if he employs registered apprentices or journeymen in any apprenticeable trade on such Contracts and if other Contractors on the public works site are making such contributions. The Contractor and any subcontractor under him shall comply with the requirements of Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 in the employment of apprentices. Information relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules, and other requirements may be obtained from the Director of Industrial Relations, ex officio the Administrator of Apprenticeship, San Francisco, California, or from the Division of Apprenticeship Standards and its branch offices. 7-4 PAYROLL RECORDS The Contractor and each subcontractor shall keep an accurate payroll record showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and over time hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed. The payroll records shall be certified, available for inspection, and copies thereof furnished as prescribed in Section 1776 of the Labor Code. The Contractor shall submit certified payroll forms for the workmen covered in each payment request to the District at the time that the request is submitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance with these requirements by all subcontractors. Penalties for noncompliance include a forfeiture of $25 per day per worker which may be deducted from any moneys due the Contractor. 7-5 PERMITS AND LICENSES The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary and incident to the due and lawful prosecution of the work. 7-6 PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS, AND PROCESSES The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the District, its duly authorized representatives, and John Carollo Engineers and their duly authorized representatives from all liabilities, judgments, costs, damages, and expenses which may result from the infringement of any patents, trademarks, and copyrights by reason of the use of any proprietary materials, devices, equipment, or processes incorporated in or used in the performance of the work under this Contract. 7-7 SURVEY LAND MONUMENTS Survey land monuments and property marks shall not be moved or otherwise disturbed by the Contractor until an authorized agent, of the agency having jurisdiction over the land monuments or property marks setting, has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location, and only then in accordance with the requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. 1990 GC 7-2 W3266B.10 32669.10 GC7 7-8 PROTECTION OF PERSON AND PROPERTY The Contractor shall adopt every practical means and comply with all laws, ordinances, and regulations in order to minimize interferences to traffic, and inconveniences, discomfort and damage to the public, including the provision of adequate dust control measures. All obstructions to traffic shall be guarded. The Contractor shall not trespass upon private property and shall be responsible for all injury or damage to persons or property, directly or indirectly, resulting from his operations in completing this work. He shall comply with the laws and regulations of the District, County, and State, relating to the safety of persons and property, and will be held responsible and required to make good any injury or damage to persons or property caused by carelessness or neglect on the part of the Contractor or subcontractor(s), or any agent or employee of either during the progress of the work and until its final acceptance. The Contractor shall protect against injury any pipes, sewer conduits, electrical conduits, lawns, gardens, shrubbery, trees, fences, or other structures or property, public and/or private, encountered in this work except as stipulated elsewhere herein. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for any injury to such pipe, structures, and property. 7-9 UTILITIES The Engineer has endeavored to determine the existence of utilities at the site of the work from the records of the District and owners of known utilities in the vicinity of the work. The positions of these utilities as derived from such records are shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall make his own investigations, including exploratory excavations, to determine the locations and type of existing service laterals or appurtenances when their presence can be inferred from the presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meters, and junction boxes on or adjacent to the site of the work. The Contractor shall expose all shown or inferred utilities, service laterals, appurtenances, and the like which might interfere with construction of the project, in order to permit survey location prior to construction. If the Contractor discovers utility facilities not identified in the Plans or Specifications or in a position different from that shown on the Plans and Specifications, he shall immediately notify in writing the Engineer and the owner of the utility facility. In case it should be necessary to remove, relocate, protect, or temporarily maintain a utility because of interference with the work, the work on such utility shall be performed and paid for as follows: A. When it is necessary to remove, relocate, protect, or temporarily maintain an existing main or trunk line utility facility not indicated on the Plans and Specifications with reasonable accuracy, the District will compensate the Contractor for the costs of locating; for the costs of repairing damage not due to the failure of the Contractor to exercise reasonable care; for the costs of removing, relocating, protecting, or 1990 GC 7-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC7 temporarily maintaining such utility facilities; and for the costs for equipment on the site necessarily idled during such work. These costs and the work to be done by the Contractor in locating, removing, relocating, protecting, or temporarily maintaining such utility facilities shall be covered by a written change order conforming to the provision of "Changes In The Work" and "Change Orders" in Part 5 of these GENERAL CONDITIONS. The District may make changes in the alignment and grade of the work to obviate the necessity to remove, relocate, protect, or temporarily maintain such utility facilities or to reduce the costs of the work involved in removing, relocating, protecting, or temporarily maintaining such utility facilities. Changes in alignment and grade will be ordered in accordance with the provisions for "Changes In The Work." B. When it is necessary to remove, relocate, protect, or temporarily maintain the utility (other than [1] existing main or trunk line utility facilities not indicated in the Plans and Specifications with reasonable accuracy, or [2] existing service laterals or appurtenances when their presence cannot be inferred from the presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meters, and junction boxes on or adjacent to the site of the work) the cost of which is not required to be borne by the owner thereof, the Contractor shall bear all expenses incidental to the work on the utility or damage thereto. The work on the utility shall be done in a manner satisfactory to the owner thereof; it being understood that the owner of the utility has the option of doing such work with his own forces, or permitting the work to be done by the Contractor. No representations are made that the obligation to remove, relocate, protect, or temporarily maintain any utility and to pay the cost thereof is or is not required to be borne by the owner of such utility and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to investigate to find out whether or not said cost is required to be borne by the owner of the utility. The right is reserved to governmental agencies and to owners of utilities to enter at any time upon any street, alley, right of way, or easement for the purpose of making changes in their property made necessary by the work and for the purposes of maintaining and making repairs to their property. The Contractor shall notify all owners of utilities when his work is in progress and shall make such arrangements as are necessary to make any emergency repair. The Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of the project when such delay was caused by the failure of the District or the owner of the utility to provide for removal or relocation of such utility facilities. 7-10 DRIVEWAYS AND WALKS Inconvenience caused by digging across driveways and sidewalks shall be kept to a minimum by restoring the serviceability of the drive or sidewalk as soon as possible. Before blocking driveways, the Contractor shall notify the property owner. The Contractor shall replace or repair any damage done to driveways and walks to not less than the condition existing prior to the 1990 GC 7-4 W3266B.10 32663.10 GC7 Contractor's work. If it is necessary to leave an excavation open across driveways or sidewalks, the Contractor shall provide temporary relief in the form of steel plates over the excavation. Direct access shall be provided at all times to fire engine houses, fire hydrants, hospitals, police stations, and at all other agencies or services where emergencies may require immediate access to same. 7-11 TREES AND SHRUBBERY All trees and shrubbery within the right-of-way or easements shall be protected by the Contractor insofar as practicable. In the event shrubbery or trees must be trimmed, or removed, the Contractor shall notify the property owner to do so within a reasonable time prior to construction. All shrubbery or trees not removed by the property owner shall be trimmed or removed by the Contractor and hauled from the job at the Contractor's expense. All trees, shrubs, hedges, brush, etc. designated on the Plans, or by the Engineer for removal, shall be completely removed and disposed of as indicated on the Plans or specified. Tree removal shall be in accordance with the rules and regulations of the TRPA. 7-12 IRRIGATION DITCHES AND STRUCTURES The Contractor shall contact the owners of any ditches, irrigation lines, and appurtenances which interfere with the work and shall make arrangements for dry -up or scheduling of water deliveries. The Contractor shall be liable for any damage due to irrigation facilities damaged by his operations and shall repair such damaged facilities to an "equal or better than" original condition. 7-13 ROADS AND FENCES Streets and roads subjected to interference by the prosecution of this work shall be kept open and maintained by the Contractor until the work is completed. All fences located in easements, when damaged or temporarily removed, shall be restored to a condition equal to or better than the original condition. Such fences shall be restored at the Contractor's expense. 7-14 PROTECTION OF ANTIQUITIES State and Federal laws pertaining to the protection and preservation of sites or objects of archeological, paleontological or historic interest are applicable to the Work. Procedures shall be as specified in the SPECIAL CONDITIONS. 7-15 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGE CLAIMS The Contractor and his Surety shall indemnify and save harmless the District and its officers, agents, and representatives and John Carollo Engineers and their officers, agents, and representatives and the Engineer and its 1990 GC 7-5 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC7 officers, agents, and representatives from all suits, actions, loss, damage, expense, costs, or claims of any character or nature brought on account of any injuries or damages sustained by any person or property arising out of the work done in fulfillment of the construction of the improvement under the terms of this agreement, or on account of any act of omission by the Contractor or his agents, or from any claims or amounts arising or recovered under workmen's compensation laws or any other law, bylaw, or ordinance, order, or decree. Regardless of whether the loss is caused in part by District, its agents, and employees. 7-16 NONRESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER Indebtedness incurred for any cause in connection with this work must be paid by the Contractor, and the District is hereby relieved at all times from any indebtedness or claim other than payments under terms of the Contract. 7-17 PROPERTY RIGHTS IN MATERIAL Nothing in the Contract shall be construed as vesting in the Contractor any right of property in the material used after they have been attached or affixed to the work or the soil and accepted. All such materials shall become the property of the District upon being so attached or affixed and accepted. 7-18 ASSIGNMENT OF PAYMENTS No assignment by the Contractor of any Contract to be entered into hereunder, or of any part thereof, or of funds to be received thereunder by the Contractor will be recognized by the District unless such assignment has had prior consent of the District and the Surety has been given due notice of such assignment in writing and has consented thereto in writing. 7-19 PAYMENT FOR LABOR AND MATERIAL Contractor shall pay when due, all valid charges for labor and material incurred by Contractor and used in the construction of the Work and shall also be responsible for keeping the job free of mechanics' liens recorded by or under Contractor or his subcontractors. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to waive any immunities or other provisions of law preventing imposition of mechanics' liens on public property. If Contractor fails to make any payments required under this paragraph, or if Contractor fails to keep the Project free of mechanics' liens incurred by or under Contractor or his subcontractors, District may settle such claims and Contractor shall, on demand, reimburse District for amounts so paid. 7-20 WORK DURING DISPUTES AND LITIGATION In the event of a dispute between the parties as to performance of the Work, the interpretation of this Contract, or payment or nonpayment of work performed, parties shall attempt to resolve the dispute. If the dispute is not resolved, Contractor agrees to continue the Work diligently to completion and will neither rescind this Contract nor stop the progress of the Work, but will submit such controversy to determination in accordance with the terms of 1990 GC 7-6 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC7 the Contract Documents. In the event any litigation is commenced with respect to this Contract, such litigation shall not serve to suspend Contractor's obligation to continue performance of the Work hereunder. 7-21 ATTORNEYS' FEES In case any litigation is commenced with respect to this Contract, party shall pay it's own respective costs of suit, expenses and fees, including attorneys' fees. 7-22 NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF Any Notice to the Contractor from the District relative to any part of this Contract shall be in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed when said Notice is posted, by registered mail, to the said Contractor at his last given address, or delivered in person to said Contractor or his authorized representative on the Work. 7-23 ASSIGNMENT TO AWARDING BODY In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the Contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 US.C. Section 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700] of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the public works contract or the subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the Contractor, without further acknowledgement by the parties. 7-24 PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though they were included herein. If through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 7-25 RETENTION OF LEGAL RIGHTS Actions of the Engineer, or of his duly authorized representatives, measurement or certificate by the Engineer, any order by the District for the payment of money, acceptance of any work or any extension of time, or any possession taken by the District shall not operate as a waiver of any provision of the Contract, or any power therein reserved to the District, or any right to damages therein provided. Any waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. The District reserves the right to correct any error that may be discovered in any estimate that may have been paid, and to adjust the same to meet the requirements of the Contract and Specifications. The District reserves the right to claim and recover by process of law, sums as may be sufficient to 1990 GC 7-7 W3266B.10 32668.10 GC7 correct the error or make good any deficit in the work resulting from such error, dishonesty or collusion discovered in the work after the final payment has been made. 7-26 PROHIBITED INTERESTS No official of the District who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the District to negotiate, make, accept or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting, or approving any architectural, engineering inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of this Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or any part hereof. No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer, or inspector of or for the District who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the District to exercise any legislative, executive, supervisory or other similar functions in connection with the construction of the Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof, and material supply contract, subcontract, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the Project. 7-27 SATISFACTION OF LIENS Prior to judicial determination of any claim or claims or in accordance therewith, the District may apply any amount withheld to the payment and satisfaction of recorded liens or just claims against the Contractor or any subcontractors for labor and services rendered and material furnished. In so doing, the District shall be deemed the agent of the Contractor and any payment so made by the District shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the District to the Contractor, and the District shall not be liable to the Contractor for any payment made in good faith; provided that such payment will not be made except by court order if the Contractor furnishes a bond satisfactory to the District to indemnify it against any lien or claim. Before the District will make final payment to the Contractor, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with lien releases from all subcontractors and suppliers of material, together with a certified statement that the released represent all the material furnished and all the subcontractors engaged for the Work on the Project. 7-28 CLEAN AIR ACT AND FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT The Contractor shall comply with all State, special District, or other public entity air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances, and statutes which apply to any work performed pursuant to the Contract, including any air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and statutes specified in Section 11017 of the Government Code and any amendments thereto. The Contractor agrees to comply with Federal clean air and water standards during the performance of this Contract and specifically agrees to the following: 1990 GC 7-8 W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC7 A. The term "facility" means (1) any building, plant, installation structure, mine, vessel, or other floating craft, location or site of operations; (2) owned, leased, or supervised; (3) by the Contractor or subcontractors; (4) for the construction, supply and service contract entered into by the Contractor. B. That any facility to be utilized in the accomplishment of this Contract is not listed on the Environmental Protection Agency's (EPA) List of Violating Facilities pursuant to 40 CFR, Part 15.20. C. That in the event a facility utilized in the accomplishment of the Contract becomes listed on the EPA list, this Contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part. D. That it will comply with all the requirements of Section 114 of the Air Act and Section 308 of the Water Act relating to inspection, monitoring, entry, reports, and information, as well as all other requirements specified in Section 114 and Section 308, respectively, and all regulations and guidelines issued thereunder. E. That it will promptly notify the Government of the receipt of any notice from the Director, Office of Federal Activities, EPA, indicating that any facility utilized or to be utilized in the accomplishment of this Contract is under consideration for listing on the EPA list of Violating Facilities. F. That it will include the provisions of paragraphs A through G in every subcontract or purchase order entered into for the purpose of accomplishing this Contract, unless otherwise exempted pursuant to the EPA regulations implementing the Air or Water Act (40 CFR, Part f15.5), so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. G. That in the event that the Contractor or the subcontractors for the construction, supply and service contracts entered into for the purpose of accomplishing this Contract were exempted from complying with the above requirements under the provisions of 40 CFR, Part 15.5(1), the exemption shall be nullified should the facility give rise to a criminal conviction (See 40 CFR, Part 15.20) during the accomplishment of this Contract. Furthermore, with the nullification of the exemption, the above requirements shall be effective. The Contractor shall notify the Government, as soon as the Contractor or subcontractor's facility is listed for having given rise to a criminal conviction noted in 40 CFR, Part 15.20. H. Attention is directed to Section 7-1.O1G of the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Standard Specifications and any amendments thereto. 1990 GC 7-9. W3266B.10 3266B.10 GC7 GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 8 PAYMENT TO CONTRACTORS 8-1 GENERAL The basis of payment for construction of a project shall be in full for all work actually performed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and shall include all labor and materials incorporated in the completed work. Upon final inspection and acceptance of the work, the District will pay the Contractor the amount earned under the Contract, as stipulated herein. 8-2 PAYMENT For and in consideration of the faithful performance of the work, the District will pay to the Contractor the amount earned as computed from the actual quantities of work performed under the Contract and to make such payment in the manner and at the time(s) specified, as follows: Within thirty (30) days after final acceptance of the work completed under the Contract, the Engineer shall render to the District and to the Contractor, a final estimate which shall show the amount of work performed according to the Contract. Within forty (40) days after the final completion and final acceptance of the work under the Contract and recording of Notice of Completion by the County Clerk, the District will pay to the Contractor all amounts due him under the provisions of the Contract, except that before the final payment will be made, the Contractor shall satisfy the District by affidavit that all bills for labor and materials incorporated in the work have been paid, and shall complete and submit to the Engineer a Certification relinquishing any and all claims or right of lien under, in connection with, or as a result of the work under the Contract. The basis of payment shall be in full for all work actually performed in accordance with these Specifications, and shall include all labor and materials incorporated in the completed work. 8-3 PARTIAL PAYMENT Once each month the District will process the Contractor's request for partial payment on the basis of an estimate prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer for work completed during the preceding month. The estimate will cover the work performed by the Contractor during the preceding month plus the paid invoice cost of material suitably stored at the site of the project if the Contractor desires payment for material stored. The District will retain a portion of the amount otherwise due the Contractor. The amount retained by the District will be as follows: A. Withholding of 10 percent of the payment claimed until work is 50 percent complete. 1990 GC 8-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 GCB B. When the work is 50 percent complete, no further withholding, provided that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and there is no specific cause for greater withholding, as determined by the District. C. The District may reinstate up to 10 percent withholding if the District determines, at its discretion, that the Contractor is not making satisfactory progress or there is other specific cause for such withholding. Cost of material stored will be based on vendors' paid invoices which shall be listed by the Contractor. A copy of each such invoice shall accompany the first estimate in which payment is requested for material covered by the invoice. This list shall be revised and brought up-to-date by the Contractor for each estimate. The revised list shall show the total amount of each invoice, the invoice amount that has been incorporated in the work, and the remaining invoice amount that is stored for which payment is requested that month. Only those materials that will become an integral part of the final completed project may be included for partial payment as material stored. If required by the Bid or Special Conditions, the Contractor shall furnish a detailed breakdown of the lump sum Contract Price, showing unit prices and quantities for use in preparing the monthly estimate. No partial payment will be made until this breakdown is presented by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Partial payments for jobsite delivered material or equipment will in no way reduce the Contractor's responsibility for such material or equipment until it has been installed. 8-4 PAYMENT OF ITEMS IN BID Only those items listed in the Bid are Pay Items. Compensation for all work necessary for the completion of the project or improvement shall be included by the bidder in the price bid for the items shown in the Bid. 8-5 PAYMENT FOR "EXTRA WORK" AND FOR "CHANGES IN THE WORK" Payment for "Changes in the Work" and for "Claims for Extra Work" will be made as stated in Part 5 of these GENERAL CONDITIONS. 8-6 TIME OF PARTIAL PAYMENTS The District will make each partial payment within 30 days following the date of receipt by the District of the Contractor's request for partial payment as approved by the Engineer. 8-7 SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES FOR AMOUNTS WITHHELD Pursuant to Section 4590 of the California Government Code, the Contractor may substitute securities for any money withheld by the District to_ensure performance of the Contract. At the request and expense of the Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be deposited with the District or with a State or Federally chartered bank as the escrow agent, who 1990 GC 8-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 CCB shall release such securities to Contractor following the expiration of 35 days from the date of filing of a Notice of Completion of the Work by the District, to the extent such securities have not previously been utilized by District for purposes as provided hereinafter or are not then subject to withholding by District to satisfy stop notices, claims, and costs associated therewith. The request for substitution of securities to be deposited with the District, or with a State or Federally chartered bank as escrow agent, shall be submitted on the form appended to this Part 8, which form when executed by the Contractor and the District shall constitute a Supplemental Agreement forming a part of the Contract Documents. The District shall have thirty 30) days from receipt of any such written request, properly completed and signed by the Contractor and, if applicable, accompanied by an escrow agreement in a form acceptable to District, to approve said request and effect the substitution. District will not unreasonably withhold approval of said request. District will determine the value of any security so deposited. Such Supplemental Agreement and any escrow agreement shall provide for the release of the securities to Contractor as set forth herein and shall also set forth the manner in which District may convert the securities or portions thereof to cash and apply the proceeds to the accomplishment of any purposes for which moneys may be withheld and utilized as described in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the completion of the Work, correction of defective work, and the answering of any stop notice, claims, and costs associated therewith. Securities eligible for investment under this section shall be those listed in California Government Code Section 16430 or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for moneys withheld and shall receive any interest thereon. The agreement is set forth on Pages 8A-1 through 8A-3. 1990 GC 8-3. W3266B.10 32668.10 GCB 0 0 0 0 A s 0 AGREEMENT CONCERNING INVESTMENT OF FUNDS THIS AGREEMENT made and entered into as of this day of , 19, by and between South Tahoe Public Utility District, hereinafter referred to as "District" and hereinafter referred to as "Contractor." IN CONSIDERATION OF THE MUTUAL PROMISES, CONVENANTS, AND CONDITIONS HEREINAFTER SET FORTH, THE PARTIES DO HEREBY AGREE as follows: SECTION 1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE Contractor has entered into a contract dated for the construction of facilities for the District. Pursuant to provisions in the Contract Documents, the District will retain a portion of the Contractor's progress payments, but the Contractor may request that securities be substituted for these retained funds. This agreement covers the substitution of securities for retained funds. SECTION 2. ESCROW AGENT The Contractor shall designate the escrow agent who shall hold the substitute securities and shall provide the District with a copy of the escrow instructions at least ten days prior to the proposed substitution of securities. If the escrow agent and escrow instructions are approved by the District, then the District will allow the substitution of securities. The District will approve the escrow agent if the escrow agent is the District or a State or Federally Chartered Bank. The District will approve the escrow instructions if the instructions provide that the securities and income thereon shall be paid to the Contractor only if the District states in writing to the escrow agent that the Work has been completed to the satisfaction of the District and the period for filing labor and material stop notices has ended. SECTION 3. SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES The Contractor may deposit securities with the escrow agent pursuant to the escrow instructions any time after the escrow agent and escrow instructions have been approved by the District. Such securities shall consist of bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit or securities eligible for investment pursuant to California Government Code, Section 16430. The amount of the deposit shall be determined by the Contractor. The escrow agent shall notify the District of the amount of the initial deposit and the type of security so deposited, and shall notify the District of the amount and type of any securities which are subsequently deposited. SECTION 4. PAYMENT OF RETAINED FUNDS In addition to that portion of the progress payments under the Contract Documents not affected by retention requirements, the District will pay the Contractor an amount equal to the total retained amount or the total amount of eligible securities on deposit with the escrow agent, whichever is less. Such payments of retained amounts will be authorized at the same time as 1990 GC 8A-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 GCBA progress payments are authorized for payment but will not be paid until, and except to the extent, that substitute securities are on deposit with the escrow agent. SECTION 5. EXPENSES Contractor shall pay all costs and expenses associated with this Agreement including but not limited to escrow fees and expenses or penalties incurred in the conversion or sale of the securities pursuant to this Agreement or attorneys' fees incurred in the enforcement of this Agreement. Contractor shall also pay the District an administrative charge equal to the District's cost to maintain necessary books of account and to supervise the escrow concerning the substitute securities in an amount not to exceed $15.00 for each progress payment. Such amounts may be deducted from any sums due to the Contractor from the District. SECTION 6. CONVERSION OF SECURITIES The District may, at any time, sell or otherwise convert to cash such portion of the securities as in the District's discretion, may be necessary to cover any of the matters set forth in the contract relative to the fulfillment of obligation under the Contract Documents, correction of work or payment of stop notice claims or other claims, expenses, deductions, and forfeitures and may apply the proceeds thereof to such purposes in the manner permitted by the aforesaid Contract Documents and the provisions of law; provided, however, the Contractor shall be given not less than two working days written notice of the District's intent to do so and within said two working days Contractor may deliver to the District, in cash, the amount which the District has so notified Contractor it intends to use and the District shall first utilize such funds prior to converting or selling any of the securities. The proceeds remaining, if any, from securities converted to cash hereunder, after accomplishment of the purposes of the District, shall be retained by the District in the same manner as any other funds which are retained under the Contract Documents, unless or until the Contractor substitutes other securities therefor pursuant to this Agreement. Any escrow agreement entered into hereunder shall contain provisions to effect the District's rights under this section, including a provision requiring the escrow agent to release the securities to the District upon its demand for use or application as set forth herein. SECTION 7. ASSIGNMENT OR PLEDGE No substitute security deposited with an escrow agent pursuant to this Agreement shall be deposited or pledged by the Contractor to any other person or for any other purpose or obligation until such security is released to the Contractor under the terms hereof. 1990 GC 8A-2 W3266B.10 32663.10 CCBA IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement or caused it to be executed as of the day, month, and year first above written. 0 DISTRICT: CONTRACTOR: ATTEST: 0 0 0 0 0 0 1990 GC 8A-3. W3266B.10 0 3266B.10 GCBA i GENERAL CONDITIONS - PART 9 REQUIRED PROVISIONS 9-1 ARBITRATION PROCEDURES If arbitration is selected to resolve a dispute as agreed upon by the District and Contractor, the costs related to the arbitration procedures shall be shared by the Contractor and the District. The arbitrator shall be jointly selected by the parties or be appointed by a court if the parties do not agree. The arbitration award shall be presented in writing and shall include the following elements: A. Legal "findings of fact" established by the arbiter. B. Specific breakdown of the dollar amounts allocated for each issue under arbitration. C. The arbiter's "conclusion of law." D. A summary of the evidence. E. Reasons underlying the arbiter's award. The arbitrators' findings and award shall be pursuant to Title 9 of the California Code of Civil Procedure Sections 1280 through 1294.2. The arbitrators award shall be supported by law and substantial evidence. A court of law, subject to Section 1286.4, may vacate the award if after review of the award it is determined either that the award is not supported by substantial evidence or that it is based on error of the law. The performance of the Work shall not be interrupted or delayed during arbitration procedures. 1990 GC 9-1. W3266B.10 32663.10 GC9 r DIVISION 1 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 010010 PROJECT DESCRIPTION It is the District's intent to construct the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System Improvements - Phase I. 010011 SUMMARY OF WORK The Work to be performed includes; site grading, preparation and installation of a new emergency power generation building and a new poured -in-place concrete holding tank; removal of two existing pneumatic ejectors and one existing single phase grinder pump and all appurtenant piping and valving; sealing existing concrete vaults and the installation of duplex submersible grinder pumps including appurtenant piping, valving, valve boxes and pressure cleanouts at three separate locations; note that by-pass pumping will be required in all three instances; installation of a 30 KW emergency generator including electrical runs from Sierra Pacific Power to the new emergency generator building and from•the new generator building to each of the three locations being converted to grinder pump stations; installation of electrical service includes a new transfer switch and MCC in the new generator building and new control panels at each of the three new grinder pump stations; new electrical power cable and signal cable from the new generator building to each of the new grinder pump stations; new electrical pull boxes will be required on an existing air line being converted for use as an electrical conduit; conversion of an existing vacuum main into a force main including slip lining the existing 4 -inch vacuum main with 3.5 -inch O.D. polyethylene, the installation of two air release valves on the converted main with appurtenant piping and valve vaults; installing new valving on existing lines feeding into the force main; installing approximately 40 feet of pipe to connect the converted vacuum main to MH A-45; removal of two existing vacuum valve stations; removal of a 1000 gallon concrete storage tank at VVS-1; repair and reconnection of existing improvements affected by the Work and incidentals for a complete and usable facility. 010012 LOCATION OF PROJECT The Work is located on the southern portion of Fallen Leaf Lake on Fallen Leaf Lake Road off of California State Highway 89, Lake Tahoe, California. 010014 WORK BY OTHERS The District, utilities, and others may be working within the project area while the Work is in progress. If so, the Contractor shall schedule his work in conjunction with these other organizations to minimize mutual interference, if possible within the time constraints of this Project. Others working on associated facilities and probably interfacing with the Contractor at some time during the execution of the work include: 1990 1-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 A. Operations and Maintenance of the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewer Collection System. B. Operations of Stanford Sierra Camp. C. Sierra Pacific Power Company. The Contractor shall cooperate to make the necessary connections at a minimum cost and time delay for all involved. In the event of lack of agreement the Engineer will determine how and where the interface shall be made and his decision shall be final. 010016 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR If any part of the Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of others, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work of others that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of others as fit and proper except as to defects which may develop in the work of others after execution of the Work by the Contractor. 010017 WORK INVOLVING EXISTING COLLECTION SYSTEM All work shall be executed while the existing Fallen Leaf Lake Collection System is in operation. Operation of the existing system shall not be jeopardized or materially reduced in efficiency as a result of the execution of Work. The Contractor shall request shutdowns of any portion or all of the existing collection system by the District at least 48 hours (two working days) in advance of the scheduled shutdown. No shutdown shall occur without obtaining prior District approval. Existing materials and equipment removed in the execution of the Work and designated as salvageable by the District or the Engineer, shall remain the property of the District. All reasonable efforts shall be made to remove and preserve such material and equipment in an undamaged condition, and it shall be stored at the Work site as the Engineer may direct. All material not deemed salvageable by the District or the Engineer shall be disposed of by the Contractor. The Contractor shall exercise extreme caution when working near electrical, mechanical and hydraulic equipment which, if damaged, could result in rendering a portion of or the whole system inoperable. The Contractor shall be responsible for any fines levied against the District for sewage spills during construction that are a direct result of the Contractor's negligence. 010018 COORDINATION OF WORK The Contractor shall maintain overall coordination for the execution of the Work. Based on the Construction Schedule prepared in accordance with these Specifications, he shall obtain from each of his subcontractors a similar 1990 1-2 W3266B.10 326613.10 Div. 1 schedule which shall be integrated into the construction schedule. The Contractor shall then be responsible for all parties maintaining these schedules or for coordinating required modifications. 010019 WORK SEQUENCE AND CONSTRAINTS A. The Work shall be executed while the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System is in operation. Any shutdowns of the facility or any portion thereof, required to install connections, by-pass pumping or piping or other equipment shall be coordinated with the District. The Contractor shall request the District to perform a system shutdown at least two working days before the commencement of the operation requiring the shutdown. The Contractor shall not make any tie-ins without approval from the District. Further, the Contractor shall have all materials and equipment on-site to complete the tie-in in such a manner as to disrupt the operation of the system as little as possible. In no case shall the procedures take more than: 4 hours between 10:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. 6 hours between 11:00 p.m. and 5:00 a.m. In all cases, the requirements for safe operation of the system shall take scheduling priority. Requests for road closures shall be accomplished in the same manner as outlined above. No system shutdowns or road closures may occur on Saturdays. B. Upon receiving the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall, as a first priority, initiate the submittal/review process for the 30 KW emergency generator. This piece of equipment and its appurtenances may involve a very long lead time to effect complete installation. C. The Contractor shall initiate construction of the emergency generator station and complete the installation of electrical service from the Sierra Pacific Power Company to the new emergency generator building and from the new emergency generator building to ES -1 before beginning work on the conversion of ES -1. The Contractor shall continue to pull electrical power and signal cable from ES -1 to ES -3 utilizing an existing compressed air line being converted to use as electrical conduit. A system shutdown and road closure will be required to locate and cut the existing compressed air line at ES -3. Compressed air must be supplied to ES -3 until its conversion to a grinder pump station ie completed. The Contractor will have to install pull boxes on the converted compressed air line to facilitate pulling electrical power and signal cable. Once power is supplied to the ejector stations to be converted into grinder pump stations work can be initiated on each ejector station conversion. D. Prior to initiating by-pass pumping, the Contractor shall prepare a spill contingency plan for approval by the District that will include as a minimum: 1. 24 hour on-site surveillance monitoring by the Contractor any time by-pass pumping is in operation. 2. Septic tank pumper truck on stand-by, on-site, during any shutdown of the system or whenever by-pass pumping is in operation. 1990 1-3 w3266B.10 41 3266B.10 Div. 1 3. Enough extra hose, materials and equipment to create a redundant by-pass system. 4. Installation of downslope containment around each station while it is being worked on. The Contractor may use water dams as constructed by Water Structures Unlimited or approved equal. E. Initiate conversion at ES -1. The Contractor will require a system shutdown to install by-pass pumping around the existing ejector vault. By-pass pumps shall be electrically operated utilizing newly established power for operation. No small engine driven generator or pumps will be used for this work. By-pass pumps shall be capable of pumping 80 gallons per minute against a total dynamic head (TDH) of 120 feet. The conversion of each station shall be completed with the station being put back into service before proceeding to the next station to be converted. By-pass pumping operations shall be done at one location at a time, overlapping shall not be permitted. Included in the conversion of each ejector station is the installation of electrical control panels, duplex grinder pumps, guide rails, appurtenant piping, valves and cleanouts as shown on the Plans. Control panels shall be capable of operating the installed grinder pumps and sending the alarm signals identified in Division 12 and 16. The order of ejector station conversion shall be ES -1, ES -2, and ES -3 last. F. Following the completion of ejector station conversion, the Contractor shall undertake the conversion of the existing 4 -inch vacuum main into a force main. The Contractor shall prepare and install approved by-pass piping to allow sliplining of the existing 4 -inch vacuum main with 3.5 -inch (O.D.) polyethyene (butt welded) while the collection system is in operation. By-pass piping must include the system served by VVS-2 unless other arrangements for shutdown of this component of the existing system can be made. The Contractor shall expose the main to be converted as required to affect connections around VVS-1, VVS-2, MH A-45 and to install the air release valves as shown on the Plans. The Contractor is required to locate the 45 degree elbows to be replaced as shown on the Plans using sonic or other methods before beginning excavation. Road closures will be required to prepare the connections as well as system shutdowns to complete the connections. Road closures and system shutdowns shall be subject to the conditions contained in A and D above. G. The installation of the increased storage at VVS-3 will occur without removing the station from service. The Contractor shall be aware that the installation of the increased storage will require dewatering procedures during installation and that by-pass pumping may be required. By-pass pumping shall be subject to the conditions listed in item D above. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all dewatering operations within the guidelines established by the Lahontan Regional Water Quality Control Board (LRWQCB) and Tahoe Regional Planning Agency. Further, at least one lane access to and from Stanford Sierra Camp, the permittee's cabins and Glen Alpine Road must be maintained during the completion of this Work. 1990 1-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 H. The Contractor shall be aware that the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System is currently under a "Cease and Desist" order from the LRWQCB. Any spills which occur during the progress of this project will be subject to fines from LRWQCB. The Contractor will be held responsible for all spills occurring as a result of his operations including any resulting fines. I. The Contractor shall also be aware that there will be change orders involved with this Work. The Design Engineer has made every attempt possible to determine the extent and location of all existing facilities within the project zone. However, the inexact nature of existing knowledge and as -built plans will virtually require the issuing of change orders to reflect changed conditions. All change orders shall be handled using the procedures contained in the General Conditions of this Specification. 010020 CONSTRUCTION STAKES, LINES, AND GRADES The Work shall be executed in accordance with the lines and grades indicated in the Contract Documents. Distances and measurements, except elevations and structural dimensions, shall be made on horizontal planes. Staking for the emergency generator building will be provided for the Contractor by the District. Staking the existing VVS-3 easement boundary's will also be completed by the District. 010021 SITE WORK The Contractor shall establish such control and reference points as he may need and as will be required to properly lay out the work. Monuments for principal control points shall be set by the Contractor and shall be protected by the Contractor from disturbance. If the monuments are disturbed, any work that is governed by these monuments shall be held in abeyance until the monuments are re-established by the Contractor. The accuracy of all the Contractor's stakes, alignments, and grades is the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the Engineer has the discretionary right to check the Contractor's stakes, alignments, and grades at any time. Where such discretion is to be exercised by the Engineer, he will notify the Contractor of his intention, stating the time at which the checking will commence. Any part of the work in progress, the results of which are predicated directly upon the Contractor's stakes, alignments, or grades to be checked, shall be held in abeyance until the Engineer has notified the Contractor that the checking has been completed. 010037 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE OF WORK After completion of certain portions of the Work, including all testing and other preparation necessary for operation of such portions by the District as herein specified, but prior to final completion of the Work, provisions may be made for partial acceptance in writing by the District for such portions only. The portions of the Work to be included for partial acceptance prior to final project completion will be noted at the preconstruction conference in accordance with Contractor's schedule, or by written notice to the Contractor at the earliest possible time. 1990 1-5 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 The guarantee period for such portions of the Work shall commence with the date of their acceptance for use by the District. However, full payment for such portions will not be made until final acceptance of the total Work. Acceptance of any portion of the Work prior to acceptance of the whole shall not be construed as absolving the Contractor of responsibility for any item of construction or incidental work included in the Contract. Prior to such occupancy or use the District will enter into a written agreement with the Contractor delineating the portions of the Work released to the District for occupancy or use and indicating what, if any, work remains to be done within the occupied or released area. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation, or extension of time, or both, as may be determined by the District after consideration of recommendations by the Engineer. Should any portion of the Work in use be damaged thereby, the District shall bear the expense for repairing such damage. However, if the portion being so used should reveal deficiencies of materials or workmanship, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to replace the defective construction. 010060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall be aware of and abide by the conditions and restrictions of the Tahoe Regional Planning Agency (TRPA) and the Lahontan Regional Water Quality Control Board (LRWQCB) permits for this project. 010090 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS 010091 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS Whenever in these Specifications, or in other Contract Documents, the following terms are used, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows: BID: The offer of a bidder, on the prescribed form, to perform the Work. BID FORM: The approved form on which the District requires bids to be prepared and submitted for the Work. BID GUARANTEE: The security furnished with a bid to guarantee that the bidder will enter into the Contract if his bid is accepted. CALENDAR DAY: Every day shown on the calendar. CONTRACT TIME: The number of calendar days for completion of the Work, including authorized time extensions. In case a calendar date of completion is specified in the bid in lieu of the number of calendar days, the Work shall be completed by that date. The Contract Time shall be computed by excluding the first and including the last day; and if the last day be Sunday or a legal holiday, that shall be excluded. DESIGN ENGINEER: John Carollo Engineers, 450 North Wiget Lane, Walnut Creek, California 94598, telephone (415) 932-1710, and 2530 J Street, Suite 302, Sacramento, California 95816, telephone (916) 442-4428. 1990 1-6 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 1 w DISTRICT: Owner. ENGINEER: The firm or person and his properly authorized assistants, designated as such by the District. EQUIPMENT: (Construction) - All machinery and equipment, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep and maintenance, and also tools and apparatus necessary for the proper construction and acceptable completion of work. (Installed) - All material or articles used in equipping a facility as furnishings or apparatus to fulfill a functional design. EXTRA WORK: An item of work not provided for in the Contract as awarded but found essential to the satisfactory completion of the Contract within its intended scope. LABORATORY: The established materials testing laboratory of the Contracting Agency's Engineering Department, or other laboratories acceptable to or authorized by the Engineer to test materials and work involved in the Contract. OWNER: South Tahoe Public Utility District, P.O. Box 70542, 1275 Meadow Crest Drive, South Lake Tahoe, California, 95705, telephone (916) 544-6474. PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE: The Engineer's authorized representative at the site of the Work. REFERENCED DOCUMENTS: Bulletins, Standards, Rules, Methods of Analysis or Test, Codes and Specifications of public or private agencies, Engineering Societies, or Industrial Associations. Reference shall be to the latest edition thereof, including Amendments, which are in effect and published at the time the Notice Inviting Bids is issued, unless a specific edition is identified, in which case reference shall be to such specific edition. SHOP DRAWINGS: Drawings or reproduction of drawings, detailing, fabrication and erection of structural elements, falsework and forming for structures, fabrication of reinforcing steel, installed equipment and installation of systems, or any other supplementary plans or similar data. STATE SPECIFICATIONS: The Standard Specifications, State of California, Business and Transportation Agency, Department of Transportation. SUPERINTENDENT: The Contractor's authorized representative in responsible charge of the Work. TITLE AND HEADINGS: The titles or headings of the section and subsections in the Contract Documents are intended for convenience of reference and shall not be considered as having bearing on their interpretation. WORKING DAY: A calendar day, exclusive of Saturdays, Sundays, and District's recognized legal holidays, on which weather and other conditions not under the control of the Contractor will permit construction operations 1990 1-7 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 to proceed for the major part of the day with the normal working force engaged in performing the controlling item or items of work which would be in progress at that time. 010092 ABBREVIATIONS AAN American Association of Nurserymen AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (formerly AASHO) ACI American Concrete Institute AFBMA Anti -Friction Bearing Manufacturers' Association, Inc. AGMA American Gear Manufacturers' Association AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI American National Standards Institute API American Petroleum Institute ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute FS Federal Specification NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association PS Product Standard SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 1990 1-8 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 010200 PROJECT MEETINGS 010210 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed, or at an earlier time if mutually agreeable, the Engineer will arrange a preconstruction conference to be attended by the Contractor's superintendent, the District, the Engineer or his representative, and representatives of utilities, major subcontractors, and others involved in the execution of the Work. The purpose of this conference shall be to establish a working understanding between the parties and to discuss the Construction Schedule, shop drawing submittals and processing, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, applications for payment and their processing, and such other subjects as may be pertinent for the execution of the Work. 010220 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor shall arrange and conduct progress meetings. These meetings shall be conducted at least once every two (2) weeks and shall be attended by the Contractor's superintendent and representatives of all subcontractors, utilities, and others, that are active in the execution of the Work. The purpose of these meetings shall be to expedite the work of any subcontractor or other organization that is not up to schedule, resolve conflicts, and in general, coordinate and expedite the execution of the Work. The agenda of progress meetings shall include review of progress and schedule, review payment request at monthly intervals, review of narrative report, review of the latest Construction Schedule update, and review of the record documents if necessary. 010221 PROGRESS AND SCHEDULE REVIEW The progress of the Work and the Construction Schedule shall be reviewed to verify: A. Actual start and finish dates of completed activities since the last progress meeting. B. Durations and progress of all activities not completed. C. Reason, time, and cost data for Change Order work that is to be incorporated into the Construction Schedule or payment request form. D. Payment due to the Contractor based on percentage complete of items in the submitted payment request form. E. Reason and duration of required revisions. F. Record drawings. 1990 1-9 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 010222 REVIEW OF PAYMENT REQUEST The Contractor shall have his copy of the payment request form and all other data required by the Contract Documents filled in and completed prior to the progress meeting at which the request is to be presented. The Engineer will process Contractor's payment request after satisfactory review of the narrative report and schedule update. The Contractor shall be aware that District Board of Directors must approve all payment requests prior to issuing payment. The District Board of Directors meet regularly on the first and third Thursday each month. Payment requests must be submitted by the Engineer no later than ten (10) days prior the the Board's meeting. The Contractor shall submit payment requests early enough to allow ample time for Engineer review. 010224 REVIEW OF NARRATIVE REPORT The Contractor shall submit a brief narrative report at the progress meeting as a part of the bi-weekly progress review and update, in a form agreed upon by the Contractor and the Engineer. The narrative report shall include a description of problem areas; current and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other activities and completion dates; and an explanation of corrective action taken or proposed. 010226 REVIEW OF SCHEDULE UPDATE The schedule shall be updated on a monthly basis. After each monthly update, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer one copy of the last accepted Construction Schedule, marked up in red in accordance with the monthly review meeting; and one copy incorporating the updated schedule information. 010300 SUBMITTALS In ample time for each to serve its purpose and function, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer such schedules, reports, drawings, lists, literature samples, instructions, directions, and guarantees as are specified or reasonably required for construction, operation, and maintenance of the Work. 010310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND SCHEDULE OF VALUES 010311 POST -BID PRE -AWARD SCHEDULE As a condition of award during the period after the opening of bids and prior to actual award of the Contract by the District, the apparent low bidder shall prepare a Construction Schedule as set forth in this section. The costs shall be developed from the Schedule of Values submitted concurrently with this post -bid pre -award submittal. This schedule shall essentially be the same as the final project Construction Schedule required to be submitted and maintained for this project. The Construction Schedule shall indicate the time of starting and completion of each major structure or phase of the Work. The construction schedule shall be placed in chronologicalorder to develop the project critical path. The schedule shall also indicate the anticipated date of receipt of major items of equipment, and all items of equipment receipt and installation of which is critical to the scheduled 1990 1-10 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 1 progress of the project. A bar -chart type of construction schedule indicating the above information will be sufficient to satisfy these requirements. Within five (5) calendar days after bid date, the apparent low bidder shall designate in writing, an authorized representative in its firm who will be responsible for the preparation of the post -bid pre -award Construction Schedule as set forth in this Section. After fulfilling requirements above, the apparent low bidder's representative, shall complete the preparation of the schedule within 10 calendar days after the 5 -day period noted above. The schedule shall include costs allocations which make up a phase of work. All the identifiable work items in the lump sum breakdown of bid, as listed on the Breakdown of Lump Sum Items of Work, shall be included in this schedule and the sum of allocations shall equal the total of the lump sum bid proposal submitted by the apparent low bidder. 010312 POST -AWARD SCHEDULE Within five days of award of Contract by the District, the Engineer will return the post -bid pre -award Construction Schedule to the Contractor. The Contractor shall modify the schedule to include any modifications, or changes resulting from final phasing and scheduling of work items or control points. The Contractor shall complete these modifications within five calendar days from date the schedule is returned to him and shall resubmit it for review. Upon receiving written notice from the Engineer that the schedule, as revised, has been accepted, it will then become the initial Construction Schedule by which the Contractor shall construct the Work and shall be subject to progress reporting, revision, and updating procedures implemented during the course of construction as specified elsewhere in this DIVISION 1. The initial Construction Schedule shall contain no contract changes or delays which may have occurred during the interim submittal period. Changes shall be entered at the first update revision as specified hereinafter under Revisions to Construction Schedule. If the Contractor's progress has fallen behind the accepted Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall take such steps as may be required, including but not limited to, increasing the number of personnel, shifts, overtime operations, days of work, and amount of construction equipment until such time as the Work is back on schedule. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall maintain working hours as stipulated elsewhere in these Specifications. He shall also submit at the next progress meeting such supplementary schedule or schedules as may be deemed necessary to demonstrate the manner in which the approved rate of progress will be regained. 010313 WEEKLY ACTIVITIES PLAN On the last working day of every week Contractor shall submit to Engineer Contractor's Plan of Activities for the following two weeks. The Plan of Activities shall describe the activity and location of the activity. 1990 1-11 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 010314 REVISIONS TO CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE The Contractor shall submit a revised Construction Schedule within five days of the occurrence of any of the following: A. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicates an overrun of the Contract time or control point requirement, by 30 working days or ten percent (10 percent) of the remaining duration, whichever is less. B. Delays in submittals, deliveries, or work stoppage are encountered which make replanning or rescheduling of the work necessary. C. The schedule does not represent the actual prosecution and progress of the project as being performed in the field. Acceptance of the revised Construction Schedule and all supporting data is contingent upon compliance with other related requirements specified before in this DIVISION 1 and any other previous agreements or requirements with or by the Engineer. The cost of revisions to the Construction Schedule resulting from Contract changes will be included in the cost for the change in the Work, and will be based on the complexity of the revision or Change Order, man-hours expended in analyzing the change, and the total cost of the change. The cost of revision to the Construction Schedule not resulting from authorized changes in the Work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 010315 SCHEDULE OF VALUES In conjunction with the submittal of the post -bid, pre -award Construction Schedule, the apparent low bidder shall submit a schedule of values of the work, including quantities and unit prices. The aggregate of these extended prices shall equal the Lump Sum Contract Price. This schedule shall be satisfactory in form and substance to the Engineer and shall subdivide the work into the specified component parts. Upon approval by the Engineer the schedule shall be incorporated into the form for Application for Payment, and shall become the basis for preparing monthly pay estimates. Where so specified, a structure, system, or facility shall be broken down into components of work related to the Divisions of the Specifications. The cost for work specified in each Division shall be listed and the sum of the Division costs shall represent the total cost for such structure, system, or facility. A. Mobilization. 1. The amounts included under this item shall be limited to the amounts which meet the following simultaneous conditions: a. The amounts represent only cost directly related to the Work incurred for the sub -items listed under Mobilization in the Schedule of Values. 1990 1-12 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 A b. The amounts represent costs borne directly by the Contractor and shall not include costs incurred by subcontractors. c. The amounts are found reasonable and acceptable by the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall furnish data and documentation to substantiate the amounts claimed under the item Mobilization. 3. Mobilization of construction equipment shall not be included in this category. 1990 1-13 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 Item 1. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Description of Item Mobilization A. Specified bonds and insurance B. Contractor's/Engineer's field office at the site of the Work C. Temporary utilities D. Permits, licenses, and fees directly related to and necessary for the perfor- mance of the Work Total - Item 1 2. Site grading and installation of 10,000 gallon cast -in-place concrete storage tank including piping, valves and risers with lids to ground surface as shown on the Plans. Total - Item 2 3. Conversion of Existing Ejector Stations A. Cost to install and maintain bypass pumping around existing ejector vault per station). A-1 Subtotal for 3 Stations B. Cost for removal of existing pneumatic ejector and associated appurtenances per station) . B-1 Subtotal for 2 Stations C. Cost for removal of existing single phase grinder pump and appurtenances from ES -2. C-1 Subtotal for 1 Station D. Cost for preparing and sealing each vault for use as a wet well per station). D-1 Subtotal for 3 Stations E. Cost for purchase and installation of 5 Hp, grinder pumps (per station) E-1 Subtotal for 3 Stations Lump Sum Cost 1990 1-14 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 1 F. Spill Contingency Measures F-1 Subtotal Total - Item 3 (A -1+B -1+C -1+D -1+E -1+F-1) 4. Conversion of existing 4 -inch vacuum line. A. Sliplining existing 4 -inch vacuum main with 3 -inch polyethylene. slipline pipe = 3.5 -inch O.D.-SDR17, 100 psi polyethylene) B. Installing new 4 -inch force main from connection to converted 4 -inch vacuum main to MH A-45 including new connection into MH. C. Installing new air release valves and vaults on converted line per ARV) C-1 Subtotal for 4 ARV's D. Removal of existing Vacuum Valve Stations 1 and 2 (VVS-1, VVS-2) including connections to new force main. E. Installation of check valve on existing gravity line from Stanford Hill Total - Item 4 (A+B+C-1+D+E) 5. Purchase and install a 30 KW emergency generator, construct generator building and concrete foundation, complete. 6. Electrical/Instrumentation - Installation of power connections from existing Sierra Pacific Power to the emergency generator transfer switch and then to each of the converted pump stations. Signal cables will be brought back from the converted pump stations and stubbed up inside the emergency generator building for connection to a new telemetry system (telemetry system to be completed by others). 7. Miscellaneous work items and all other costs not included in previous items and necessary to complete the Work 8. Cost to carry insurance through entire warranty period 1990 1-15 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 9. Demobilization Total Lump Sum Bid 1990 1-16 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 1 010320 SHOP DRAWINGS, SCHEDULES, AND SAMPLES Shop drawings, layout diagrams, catalog data, test reports, and information in sufficient detail to show complete compliance with all specified requirements shall be furnished to the Engineer covering but not limited to the items under Materials and Equipment List. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall make such changes in the required drawings as may be necessary to conform to the Contract Documents. After completion of such checking, verification, and revising, the Contractor shall stamp and sign the drawings indicating his approval and submit the shop drawings and pertinent data to the Engineer for review. Prior to the Engineer's review of such drawings, any work which the Contractor may do on the fabrications covered by the same shall be at his own risk, as the District will not be responsible for any expense or delays incurred by the Contractor for changes to make the same conform to the Contract Documents. 010321 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT LIST Asphalt Mixes for Road Repair Concrete and Grout Mixes Doors and Frames Electrical Pull Boxes Electrical Load Centers Electrical Conduit, Wire and Specials (Including Signal Wire) Fences, Barricades and Gates Gravel Bedding Hardware Instrumentation (Flow Monitoring Equipment) Motors, Starters and Controls Paints and Coatings Pipes, Fittings and Specials Pipe Layout Pipe Support, Anchors and Hangers Pumps and Controls Reinforcing Steel Roofing and Waterproofing Valves and Valve Boxes Valve Operators Ventilation Wood Frame Building Materials 010322 SUBMITTAL Shop drawings and data shall be submitted to the Engineer in such number of copies as will allow him to retain four (4) copies of each submittal. The submittal shall clearly indicate the specific area of the Contract Documents for which the submittal is made. The additional copies received by him will be returned to the Contractor's representative at the jobsite. The Engineer's notations of the action which he has taken will be noted on one (1) of these returned copies. The above drawings, lists, prints, samples, and other data shall become a part of the Contract Documents, and a copy of the same shall be kept with the jobsite Contract Documents, and the fabrications furnished shall be in 1990 1-17 w3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 conformance with the same. However, the Engineer's review of the above drawings, lists, prints, specifications, samples, or other data shall in no way release the Contractor from his responsibility for the proper fulfillment of the requirements of this Contract nor for fulfilling the purpose of the installation nor from his liability to replace the same, should it prove defective or fail to meet the specified requirements. 010323 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES Drawings of minor or incidental fabricated materials and equipment may not be required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer tabulated lists of such fabrications and equipment, showing the names of the manufacturers and catalog numbers, together with samples or general data as may be required to permit determination as to their acceptability for incorporation in the Work. 010324 CRITICAL EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall make submittals to the Engineer in a timely manner for the work to be completed within the specified Contract Time. For the following equipment items, inquiry reveals that potentially long lead times for delivery are required, making these items critical for completion of the Work within the Contract Time. A. Submersible Grinder Pumps and Controls B. 30 KW Emergency Generator Fueled by LPG C. Electrical Controls and Cable (Signal & Power) The preceding list does not necessarily include all critical equipment items. The Contractor shall be responsible for identification and timely submittal of all equipment items. The Engineer will endeavor to expedite submittal review of the critical equipment items to aid in reducing submittal processing time. 010325 MILL TESTS The Contractor, at his own expense, shall submit, in triplicate, certified copies of all required factory and mill test reports to verify material quality and composition. Any materials shipped by the Contractor from a factory or mill prior to having satisfactorily passed testing and inspection shall not be incorporated in the Work, unless the Engineer shall have notified the Contractor in writing that such testing and inspection will not be required. The cost of performing all mill and factory tests shall be paid by the Contractor unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 010326 REINFORCING STEEL Shop drawings on reinforcing steel detailed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and returned. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a copy of all reinforcing steel detail drawings. Changes to the Contract Documents made by the Contractor in 1990 1-18 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 reinforcing steel shop drawings shall be called out in the letter of submittal. Such changes will not be acceptable unless the Engineer has expressed consent to such changes in writing. 010400 QUALITY CONTROL All materials and equipment shall be new and of the specified quality and equal to the samples found to be acceptable by the Engineer, if samples have been submitted. The Work shall be done and completed in a thorough, workmanlike manner, notwithstanding any omission in the Contract Documents; and it shall be the duty of the Contractor to call the Engineer's attention to apparent errors or omissions and request instructions before proceeding with the Work. The Engineer may, by appropriate instructions, correct errors and supply omissions, which instructions shall be as binding upon the Contractor as though contained in the original Contract Documents. At the option of the Engineer, materials and equipment to be supplied under this Contract will be tested and inspected either at their place of origin or at the site of the Work. The Contractor shall give the Engineer written notification well in advance of actual readiness of materials and equipment to be tested and inspected at point of origin. Satisfactory tests and inspections at the point of origin shall not be construed as a final acceptance of the materials and equipment nor shall such tests and inspections preclude retesting or reinspection at the site of the Work. Materials and equipment which will require testing and inspection at the place of origin shall not be shipped prior to such testing and inspection. 010410 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF INSPECTOR Owner's Representative (Inspector) employed by the Owner or Engineer shall be authorized to inspect all work done and materials and equipment furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the Work, and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the materials and equipment for the Work. The Inspector will not alter or waive the provisions of the Contract Documents. The Inspector will keep the Engineer informed as to the progress of the Work being done. Such deficiencies or defects in Work which may have been observed will be called to the Contractor's attention. The Inspector will not inspect Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction. The Inspector will not approve or accept any portion of the Work, issue instructions contrary to the intent of the Contract Documents, or act as foreman for the Contractor. The Inspector will conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Inspector will report to Engineer whenever Inspector believes the Work is faulty, defective, does not conform to the Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or whenever there is defective material or equipment; or whenever the Inspector believes the Work should be uncovered for observation or the Work requires special testing. 1990 1-19 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 010411 INSPECTION Materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to the inspection of, and rejection by, the Engineer, if not in conformance with the Contract Documents. Defective materials, equipment, or work shall be removed from the premises by the Contractor, whether in place or not, and shall be replaced with new and acceptable materials, equipment, or work. Repair of defective materials, equipment, or work shall be subject to the Engineer's acceptance. On all questions concerning the acceptability of materials or equipment, classification of materials or equipment, execution of the Work, and the determination of costs, the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding upon all parties. The Contractor shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access to all parts of the Work, to the shops wherein the Work is in preparation, and to all warehouses and storage yards wherein materials and equipment are stored, for purposes of inspection by the Engineer. Should any Work be covered up before the Engineer has had the opportunity to observe such Work, it shall, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. 010420 SAMPLES AND TESTS At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of materials for the Work shall be subject to tests and inspection before the delivery is started and before such materials are used in the Work. Representative preliminary samples of the character and quality prescribed shall be submitted by the Contractor or producer of materials to be used in the Work in sufficient quantities or amounts for testing or examination. All tests of materials furnished by the Contractor shall be made in accordance with the commonly recognized standards of national technical organizations, and such special methods and tests as are prescribed in the Contract Documents. 010421 SAMPLING The Contractor shall furnish such samples of materials as are requested by the Engineer, without charge. No material shall be used until the Engineer has had the opportunity to test or examine such materials. Samples will be secured and tested whenever necessary to determine the quality of the material. Samples and test specimens prepared at the jobsite, such as concrete test cylinders, shall be taken or prepared by the Engineer in the presence and with the assistance of the Contractor. 010422 TESTING Except for specified mill tests, all routine tests of materials shall be at the expense of the District and shall be performed in the District's laboratory or in a laboratory designated by the District. 1990 1-20 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 In the event the Contractor protests a failing test of material in place or to be used, he shall take additional samples as herein specified and have additional tests run at his own expense. In the event the original test proves to have been in error, the Contractor shall be reimbursed for his direct costs of sampling and testing. 010423 TEST STANDARDS All sampling, specimen preparation, and testing of materials shall be in accordance with the standards of nationally recognized technical organizations. The physical characteristics of all materials not particularly specified shall conform to the latest standards published by the American Society for Testing Materials, where applicable. 010430 EQUIPMENT TESTS All items of mechanical equipment shall be tested for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. 010432 PRELIMINARY EQUIPMENT TESTS All items of mechanical equipment shall be tested by the Contractor after installation for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity. The Contractor's test operation of each piece of mechanical equipment shall continue for not less than two hours without interruption. All parts shall operate satisfactorily in all respects, under continuous full load, and in accordance with the specified requirements, for the full duration of the 2 -hour test period. If any part of a unit shows evidence of unsatisfactory or improper operation during the test period, correction or repairs shall be made and the full 2 -hour test operation, as specified above, shall be repeated after all parts operate satisfactorily. The Contractor shall furnish all personnel, power, water, chemicals, fuel, oil, grease, and all other necessary facilities for conducting the Contractor's test operations. 010433 FINAL TEST OPERATION After all equipment is installed and the entire system is ready to operate, the District will test all equipment for a period not to exceed seven days by operating either under actual or simulated operating conditions before final acceptance is given. All defects of material or workmanship which appear during this test period shall be corrected by the Contractor. After such corrections are made, the seven-day test shall be run again before final acceptance. The District will supply power, water, oil, grease, auxiliaries, and operating personnel required for the final test operation. On certain items of equipment, the final adjustments and inspections shall be made by factory -trained service personnel other than sales representatives, who shall also supervise the test operation. This requirement shall be fulfilled when so specified in the Specifications covering such equipment. Manufacturers who furnish equipment in connection with which the presence of factory -trained service personnel is specified shall supply, at no additional 1990 1-21 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 1 cost to the District, factory -trained service personnel as described above to adjust such equipment until it has been tested by the Contractor and the results of these tests have been satisfactory. 010500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide all temporary facilities and utilities required for prosecution of the work, protection of employees and the public, protection of the work from damage by fire, weather or vandalism, and such other facilities as may be specified or required by any legally applicable law, ordinance, rule, regulation, or permit. 010510 TEMPORARY OFFICES 010511 PROJECT OFFICE The Contractor shall maintain on the project site for the District and Engineer a suitable office or other protected area in which shall be kept project copies of the Contract Documents, project progress records, project schedule, shop drawings, and other relevant documents which shall be accessible to the District and Engineer during normal working hours. The project office shall be adequately heated and air conditioned, lockable, contain private line telephone service, bottled drinking water service with dispenser, suitable sanitary facilities. The Contractor shall maintain his own telephone service, he shall not use the District's telephone. 010520 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 010521 ELECTRICAL SERVICE The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining adequate temporary electrical service. The Contractor shall then provide adequate jobsite distribution facilities conforming to applicable codes and safety regulations. 010522 WATER The Contractor shall pay for and shall construct all facilities necessary to furnish water for his use during construction. Water used for human consumption shall be kept free from contamination and shall conform to the requirements of the State and local authorities for potable water. The Contractor shall pay for all water used for the Contractor's operations prior to final acceptance. 010525 TEMPORARY LIGHTING The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas sufficient to maintain a lighting level during working hours not less than the lighting level required by California OSHA standards. 010526 HEATING AND VENTILATION The Contractor shall provide means for heating and ventilating all work areas as may be required to protect the Work from damage by freezing, high temperatures, weather, or to provide a safe environment for workers. 1990 1-22 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 Unvented direct fired heaters shall not be used in areas where freshly placed concrete will be exposed to combustable gases until at least two hours after the concrete has attained its initial set. 010527 SANITARY CONVENIENCES The Contractor shall provide suitable and adequate sanitary conveniences for the use of all persons at the site of the Work. Such conveniences shall include chemical toilets or water closets and shall be located at appropriate locations at the site of the Work. All sanitary conveniences shall conform to the regulations of the public authority having jurisdiction over such matters. At the completion of the Work, all such sanitary conveniences shall be removed and the site left in a sanitary condition. With respect to sanitation facilities, the Contractor shall cooperate with and follow directions of representatives of the Public Health Service and the State. State and County Public Health Service representatives shall have access to the Work, whether it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide facilities for such access and inspection. 010528 ACCIDENT PREVENTION Precaution shall be exercised by the Contractor at all times for the protection of persons (including employees) and property. The safety provisions of applicable laws, and of building and construction codes shall be observed. Machinery, equipment, and other hazards shall be guarded or eliminated. First aid facilities and information posters conforming at least to the minimum requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration shall be provided in a readily accessible location or locations. The Contractor shall make all reports as are, or may be, required by any authority having jurisdiction, and permit all safety inspections of the work being performed under this Contract. Before proceeding with any construction work, the Contractor shall take the necessary action to comply with all provisions for safety and accident prevention. The Contractor shall be aware of and comply with the District safety program requirements of Contractors. A copy of the program is available from the District upon request. 010530 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES Construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities shall be of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move the loads to which they will be subjected. Railings, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by law or for adequate protection of life and property shall be provided. 1990 1-23 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 010533 STAGING AND SHORING Temporary supports shall be designed with an adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing capability. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit design calculations by a professional registered engineer for staging and shoring prior to application of loads. 010534 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES When sandblasting, spray painting, spraying of insulation, or other activities inconveniencing or dangerous to property or the health of employees or the public are in progress, the area of activity shall be enclosed adequately to contain the dust, over spray, or other hazard. In the event there are no permanent enclosures of the area, or such enclosures are incomplete or inadequate, the Contractor shall provide suitable temporary enclosures. 010540 WARNING DEVICES AND BARRICADES The Contractor shall adequately identify and guard all hazardous areas and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers. Such devices shall, as a minimum, conform to the requirements of Cal/OSHA. In addition, the Contractor shall post a sign at WS -3 which shall be used to notify the public of impending road closures. The sign shall be at least three (3) feet square with the lettering: NOTICE ROAD CLOSURE AHEAD SCHEDULED FOR DATE - HOURS The date and hours shall be replaceable to allow the sign to be used each time a road closure is scheduled. Sign background shall be white and lettering shall be black. The sign shall be located in a visable area acceptable to the Engineer, which is easily readable by the public using Fallen Leaf Lake Road. The sign shall be mounted on its own pedestal and shall not be nailed or attached to existing structures or trees. 010542 HAZARDS IN PROTECTED AREAS Excavations on project sites from which the public is excluded shall be marked or guarded in a manner appropriate for the hazard. 010544 PROTECTION OF EXISTING ITEMS The Contractor shall protect all existing structures, machinery, trees, shrubs, and other items on the project site that are to be preserved, by substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with the hazard, from injury or destruction by vehicles, equipment, workmen, or other agents. 1990 1-24 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 1 010550 PROJECT SECURITY The Contractor shall make adequate provision for the protection of the Work area against fire, theft, and vandalism, and for the protection of the public against exposure to injury. 010552 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Sufficient number of fire extinguishers of the type and capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities, shall be provided in readily accessible locations. 010555 TEMPORARY FENCES Except as otherwise provided, the Contractor shall enclose the site of the Work with a fence adequate to protect the Work and temporary facilities against acts of theft, violence, or vandalism. In locations where the probability of such acts is reasonably remote, this fencing requirement may be limited to the temporary offices and storage areas. The Contractor shall bear the responsibility for protection of network and material on the site of the Work. In the event all or a part of the site is to be permanently fenced, this permanent fence or a portion thereof may be built to serve for protection of the Work site, provided however that any portions damaged or defaced shall be replaced prior to final acceptance. Temporary openings in existing fences shall be protected to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is performed at the site. The Contractor shall provide temporary closures or guard service to protect such openings, if necessary. Temporary openings shall be fenced when no longer necessary. 010560 ACCESS ROADS The Contractor shall maintain access roads to and on the site of the Work to provide for delivery of material and for access to existing and operating facilities on the site. A road to be considered adequately maintained shall be reasonably dustfree. 010563 ON-SITE ACCESS ROADS Adequately maintained access roads shall be maintained to all storage areas and other areas to which frequent access is required. Similar roads shall be maintained to all existing facilities on the site of the Work to provide access for maintenance and operation. Where such temporary roads cross buried utilities that might be injured by the loads likely to be imposed, such utilities shall be adequately protected by steel plates or wood planking, or bridges shall be provided so that no loads shall discharge on such buried utilities. 1990 1-25 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 010570 SPECIAL CONTROLS The Contractor shall take all reasonable means to minimize inconvenience and injury to the public by dust, noise, diversion of storm water, or other agencies under his control. 010571 DUST CONTROL The Contractor shall take whatever steps, procedures, or means as are required to prevent abnormal dust conditions being caused by his operations in connection with the execution of the Work; and on any unpaved road which the Contractor or any of his subcontractors are using, excavation or fill areas, demolition operations, or other activities. Control shall be by sprinkling, use of dust palliatives, modification of operations, or any other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction. 010573 NOISE ABATEMENT In inhabited areas, particularly residential, operations shall be performed in a manner to minimize unnecessary noise generation. In residential areas, special measures shall be taken to suppress noise generated by repair and service activities during the night hours. 010574 ODOR CONTROL The Contractor shall take whatever steps, procedures, or means as are required to prevent abnormal odors being caused by his operations. 010575 DRAINAGE CONTROL In excavation, fill, and grading operations care shall be taken to disturb the pre-existing drainage pattern as little as possible. Particular care shall be taken not to direct drainage water onto private property or into streets or drainageways inadequate for the increase flow. Drainage means shall be provided to protect the Work. 010600 EROSION CONTROL All excavated areas at the site shall be provided with temporary erosion control measures as follows. Temporary erosion control shall be required for all areas where neutral ground cover is disturbed, and all temporary excavation stockpiles including structure excavations. Erosion control shall be by means of filter fabric fences or hay bales placed to completely circumvent the downslope side of the excavated stockpile. Adequate erosion containment in this manner shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Protected areas shall be regularly inspected and maintained by the Contractor during the course of the Work. All excavations, spoils, and waste materials shall not be placed in areas subject to washout, flooding, or natural drainage. 1990 1-26 W3266B.10 326613.10 Div. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Construction equipment and vehicles shall be restricted to approved access roads only. Any dewatering of trenches or pipelines shall be done so as not to cause erosion or run-off from the construction site. 010700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT It is the intent of these Contract Documents that the Contractor shall deliver a complete and operable facility capable of performing its intended functions and ready for use. 010710 CLEANING Throughout the period of construction the Contractor shall keep the Work site free and clean of all rubbish and debris, and shall promptly remove from the site, or from property adjacent to the site of the Work, all unused and rejected materials, surplus earth, concrete, plaster, and debris, excepting select material which may be required for refilling or grading. 010711 FINAL SITE CLEAN-UP Upon completion of the Work, and prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, surplus material, and equipment belonging to him or used under his direction during construction. 010715 WASTE DISPOSAL The Contractor shall dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris and shall make necessary arrangements for such disposal. 010720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS The Contractor shall maintain at the site, available to the District and Engineer, one copy of the Contract Documents, Drawings, Shop Drawings, Change Orders, and other modifications in good order and marked to record all changes made during construction. These documents shall be delivered to the Engineer upon completion of the Work. During the progress meetings, such record documents shall be reviewed to ascertain that all changes have been recorded. 010730 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR The Contractor shall touch up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, or installations, that have been damaged prior to final acceptance. Surfaces on which such touch-up or repair cannot be successfully accomplished shall be completely refinished or in the case of hardware and similar small items, the item shall be replaced. 1990 1-27 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 010740 EQUIPMENT START-UP After all acceptance tests have been completed by the Contractor and District but prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall recheck all equipment for proper alignment and adjustment, check oil levels, relubricate all bearings and wearing points, and in general assure that all equipment is in proper condition for regular continuous operation. 010741 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS The Contractor shall not install any item of machinery or process equipment until he has delivered to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions. Prior to final acceptance the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer six (6) complete bound sets of Operating Instructions, Maintenance Instructions, and Parts Lists for all such equipment. 010742 FINAL EQUIPMENT CHECK After test operation and before final acceptance, or acceptance for the final seven-day test run by the District, each piece of machinery shall be lubricated and all components and couplings checked for proper alignment and adjustment. 1990 1-28. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 1 DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 020000 GENERAL The provisions herein shall apply to all demolition, clearing, grading, excavation, filling, and backfilling, and the construction of all utility lines, fences, roadways, and other construction outside the lines of structures and plant facilities. Existing improvements, adjacent property, utilities, and other facilities shall be protected from injury or damage resulting from the Contractor's operations. 020001 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FLORA All trees and shrubs found suitable for improvement and beautification, which will not interfere with excavation or embankment or cause disintegration of the improvements shall not be disturbed. The Contractor shall not damage, disturb, or cause injury to shrubbery, vines, plants, grasses, and other vegetation growing outside of the clearing limits. The dragging and the piling of materials of various kinds and the performing of other work which may be injurious to vegetation shall be confined to areas which have no vegetation or which will be covered by embankment or disturbed by excavation during grading operations. All trees which are to be removed shall be removed in accordance with all TRPA requirements pertaining to tree removal. 020002 COMPACTION CONTROL AND TESTING Maximum density, as used in these Specifications, shall be defined as the maximum density obtained in the laboratory by ASTM D 1557, Method C, Modified Proctor using a 10 -pound rammer and 18 -inch drop. In-place density of compacted backfill will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or by nuclear density test procedures in accordance with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to accomplish the specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other earthwork. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to control his operations by confirmation tests to verify and confirm that he has complied, and is complying at all times, with the requirements of these Specifications concerning compaction, control, and testing. The frequency of Contractor's confirmation tests shall be not less than as follows and each test location for trenches shall include tests for each layer, type, or class of backfill from bedding to finish grade. A. Trenches: 1. Along dirt or gravel roads 1 every 50 linear feet or off traveled right-of-way 1990 2-1 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 2 B. Structural and pipe backfill 1 every 20 cubic yards C. Base material 1 every 20 cubic yards Confirmation tests shall be paid by the Contractor. Copies of the test reports shall be submitted promptly to the Engineer. The Contractor's tests shall be performed by a soils testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of the following amounts of earthwork quantities: A. 20 linear feet of trench backfill. B. 10 cubic yards of base material. Until the specified degree of compaction on the previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, no additional earthwork of the same kind shall be performed. After satisfactory conclusion of the initial compaction demonstration and at any time during construction, earthwork which does not comply with the specified degree of compaction shall not exceed the previously specified amounts. Periodic compliance tests will be made by the Engineer to verify that compaction is meeting the requirements previously specified at no cost to the Contractor. For tests in backfill the Contractor shall remove the overburden above the level at which the Engineer wishes to test and shall backfill and recompact the excavation after the test is complete. If compaction fails to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall remove and replace the backfill at proper density or shall bring the density up to specified level by other means acceptable to the Engineer. Subsequent tests required to confirm and verify that the reconstructed backfill has been brought up to specified density shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor's confirmation tests shall be performed in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Frequency of confirmation tests for remedial work shall be double that amount specified for initial confirmation tests. 020003 SOILS REPORT A subsurface soils investigation has been prepared for design purposes. The report is contained in these Specifications as Division 2-A. The Owner makes no representation as to the correctness of the information contained in the report, nor as to the locations of the boring holes, nor that the report represents a cross section of the material to be encountered in performing excavation and earthwork on the Project. Any use made of the report by the Bidders or the Contractor is at the sole risk of such bidders or the Contractor who have the responsibility to satisfy themselves 1990 2-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 independently from other sources regarding the character and amount of rock, gravel, sand, silt, organic materials, groundwater, and all other material to be encountered in the work to be performed. The use of this report shall be at the Bidders' or the Contractor's discretion. The Bidders or the Contractor shall recognize the fact that the determination of the types and sizes of material was limited by the size of the auger or drill used to drill these holes. Bidders or Contractor shall make whatever other investigations as are necessary in order to determine to their or his satisfaction the conditions that exist. Bidders shall include in the price bid for the Work all work necessary to perform the tasks required to complete the Work as indicated on the Plans and specified herein; including, but not limited to, sheeting, shoring, blasting, dewatering, and any other work of temporary nature not a part of the permanent work or improvement. 020300 EARTHWORK The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists in furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and materials and in performing all operations in connection with the following: loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, subgrade preparation, compacting in final location, wet and dry, and all operations pertaining thereto for site grading for buildings, basins, reservoirs, boxes, pipelines, roads, and other structures of whatever nature and other purposes; furnishing, placing, and removing of all sheeting and bracing; pumping and draining of excavation; the supporting of structures above and below ground; the handling of all water encountered in the excavations; the backfilling, compacted and loose, around structures and backfilling of all trenches and pits; and all other incidental earthwork as indicated on the Plans, as specified and as required to complete the work ready for final use. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered, it shall be removed and the space refilled with good clean earth or gravel which can be compacted with no perceptible movement under the roller. 020301 WORK SEQUENCE The Contractor shall schedule the earthwork operations to meet the requirements as provided in these Specifications for excavation and uses of excavated material. If necessary, the Contractor shall stockpile excavated material in order to use it in the specified locations. 020302 CHARACTER AND AMOUNT OF MATERIAL The Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding the character and amount of rock, gravel, sand, silt, water, and other inorganic or organic material as well as gradation and shrinkage of excavation and fill material, and the suitability of the material for the use intended, and all other material to be encountered in the work to be performed. The quantity of material, and the cost thereof, required for the construction of all excavation and fill, whether from site excavation, borrow or imported material; and/or the wasting of excess material, if required, shall be included in the Contractor's quoted price for construction of the work to be performed under this project. 1990 2-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 020303 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES The Contractor, especially in the use of heavy equipment, shall protect existing power lines, roofs, buildings, pipelines, other structures, and utilities. The Contractor shall promptly repair or replace structures or facilities that are damaged by his construction activities. 020304 FINISH GRADE OF EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND FILL Fine grading under the concrete structures and subsurface holding tanks shall be such that the finished surfaces are never above the established grade or approved cross section and are never more than 0.10 foot below. All areas which are not under concrete shall be graded uniformly. Required slopes from one subsurface tank to another must be maintained. The finished surface shall be reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from blade grader operations, except as otherwise specified. The finished surface areas outside of structures shall be not more than 0.10 foot above or below the established grade or accepted cross section. Newly graded areas shall be protected from the action of the elements, and any settlement or washing that may occur from that or any other cause prior to acceptance of the Work shall be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes. 020305 REMOVAL OF WATER The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices with which to promptly remove and properly dispose of all water entering the excavation or other parts of the work, whether the water be surface water or underground water. No concrete or masonry footings, foundations, or floors shall be laid in water, nor shall water be allowed to rise over them until the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. Water shall not be allowed to rise unequally against walls for a period of 14 days following concrete placement. The Contractor shall dispose of the water from the work in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all water discharge permits that are required. No water shall be drained into work built or under construction. Water shall be disposed of in such a manner as not to be a menace to the public health. Water shall be disposed in such a manner consistent with TRPA and Lahontan Regional Water Quality Control Board regulations. Written permission shall be secured from the Engineer before locating any wells, well points, or drain lines for purposes of dewatering within the limits of a structure foundation or excavation. The Engineer shall have the right to require that any dewatering well, line, or French drain left in place within the structure foundation limits be filled with Class C concrete or grout as herein specified. 1990 2-4 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 2 020310 SITE PREPARATION The site indicated on the Plans shall be cleared of all natural obstructions and existing foundations, buildings, fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, weeds, rubbish, trees, boulders, utility lines, and any other items which will interfere with the construction operations or are designated for removal. The Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding the character and amount of clay, sand, gravel, quicksand, water, rock, hardpan, and all other material involved and work to be performed. 020311 STRIPPING Soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation shall be removed to a depth of 6 inches from all areas to receive fill or pavement and from the area within lines 2 feet outside all foundation walls and tank excavation. The stripped material shall be deposited in such locations as are directed by the Engineer; or, if accepted, the material may be used in the top 6 inches of areas to be used for future planting. Topsoil shall be replaced if and where indicated on the Plans. 020320 EXCAVATION Excavation shall comprise and include the satisfactory loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in the final location all materials, wet and dry, necessary to be removed for purposes of construction, or as required for ditches, grading, roads, and such other purposes as are indicated on the Plans; the furnishing, placing, and removing of all sheeting and bracing; all pumping, draining, and handling of water encountered in the excavations; the supporting of structures above and below ground. All excavated materials which are not required for fill and backfill, or which are unsuitable for fill or backfill, shall be disposed of by the Contractor, at his expense and responsibility, and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. No surplus material shall be dumped on private property unless written permission is furnished by the owner of the property. During construction, excavation and filling shall be performed in a manner and sequence that will provide drainage at all times. Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials, which are larger than 4 inches in greatest dimension shall not be placed in fill areas and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at no additional cost to the District. 020322 EXCAVATION SUPPORT A. General: Contractor shall support the faces of excavations and shall protect structures and improvements in the vicinity of excavations from damage due to settlement of soils and alternations in the ground water level caused to such excavations and related operations. 1. The provisions specified hereunder shall be understood: 1990 2-5 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 2 a. To complement, and not to substitute or diminish, the obligations of Contractor for the furnishing of a safe place of work pursuant to the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and its subsequent amendments and regulations and for the protection of the Work, structures, and other improvements. b. To represent a minimum requirement: 1) For the number and types of means needed to maintain soil stability. 2) For the strength of such required means, and 3) For the methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of the means used for maintaining soil stability. 2. Excavation support shall include sheeting, shoring, bracing, sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging groundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain the stability of soils. B. Contractor shall provide excavation support in trenches for the protection of workers from the hazard of caving ground. C. Excavation supports shall be provided: 1. Where, as a result of excavation work and an analysis performed pursuant to general engineering design practice, as defined hereinafter: a. The excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to slides, caving, or other type of failure, or b. The stability and integrity of structures and other improvements may be compromised by settlement or shifting of soils. 2. For trenches 5 feet and deeper. 3. Where indicated on the Drawings. D. References: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., Manual of Steel Construction, herein referenced as the Steel Manual. 2. International Conference of Building Officials, Uniform Building Code, herein referenced as the UBC. E. Definitions: As used under this title of Excavation Support, general engineering design practice shall be understood to mean the general engineering design practice in the area of the Project performed in accordance with recent literature on the subject of excavation support. 1990 2-6 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 1. Where general engineering design practice is specified it shall be understood that the design shall be performed, and the drawings and calculations shall be signed, by a civil or structural engineer registered in the State where the Project is located. a. The design calculations shall disclose clearly the assumptions made, the criteria followed, and the stress values used for the various materials. b. Where requested by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish acceptable references substantiating the appropriateness of the design assumptions, criteria, and stress values. F. Submittals: 1. For trench excavation, Contractor shall submit, in advance of excavation of trenches 5 feet or more in depth, detailed plans showing the design of excavation support for worker protection. a. Where such plans vary from the excavation support standards set forth in Title 8, California Code of Regulations, the design shall be performed pursuant to general engineering design practice. b. The excavation support shall not be less effective than is required in Title 8, California Code of Regulations. 2. For excavations other than trenches, Contractor shall submit: a. An analysis performed pursuant to general engineering design practice, as specified hereinbefore, identifying the conditions under which excavation support will be required. This analysis shall be submitted in advance of and shall cover: 1) Excavations 2 feet or more in depth adjacent to structures, and 2) Excavations 5 feet or more in depth at other locations. b. For excavations that will require excavation support, in accordance with the determination made under the preceding subparagraph a., Contractor shall submit excavation support design and details pursuant to general engineering design practice, as specified hereinbefore. 1) The same procedure shall be followed for subsequent changes to the excavation support design. 3. Pursuant to provisions specified hereinafter, Contractor shall submit the location and details of control points and method and schedule of measurements. 1990 2-7 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 4. Promptly upon performance of the measurements of control points specified hereinafter, Contractor shall submit a copy of the field notes with such measurements. G. Design Criteria: 1. Excavation support shall be designed in accordance with general engineering design practice. a. The preceding shall not apply to trench excavation support conforming to the standards set forth in Title 8, California Code of Regulations. 2. Steel members shall be designed in accordance with the Steel Manual. 3. Design involving materials other than steel shall be in accordance with the UBC. 4. Excavation support shall be designed in accordance with soil characteristics and design recommendations contained in a written report issued and signed by a civil or soil engineer registered in the state where the Project is located. a. A copy of the written report shall be available at the site of the Project for Engineer's review. b. The civil or soil engineer shall be retained by Contractor. 5. Where Contractor elects to design excavation support allowing materials to bear stresses higher than those prescribed in the referenced publications, the increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10 percent of the value of the prescribed stresses. 6. Where shoring is indicated on the Drawings, no other type of excavation support shall be used. H. Performance Requirements: Appropriate design and procedures for construction and maintenance shall be used to minimize settlement of the supported ground to prevent damage to existing structures and other improvements. Such design and procedures shall include: 1. Using stiff support systems. 2. Following an appropriate construction sequence. 3. Preventing soil loss through or under the support system. a. The support system shall be tight enough to prevent loss of soil and shall be extended deep enough to prevent heave or flow of soils from the supported soil mass into the excavation. 4. Providing surface runoff routing and discharge away from the excavation. 1990 2-8 w3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 0 0 s 0 0 0 5. Recharging groundwater, where necessary. a. Where dewatering is necessary, Contractor shall recharge the groundwater as necessary to prevent settlement in the area surrounding the excavation. 6. Not anchoring the support system to structures and other improvements. 7. Not applying support system loads to structures and other improvements. 8. Not changing existing soil loading on structures and other improvements. I. Installation: 1. Excavation support shall be installed as indicated in the approved submittals. 2. Excavation, including trenching, shall not begin until the excavation support submittals have been approved by the Engineer and until the materials necessary for the installation are on site. J. Maintenance: 1. Where loss of soil occurs, Contractor shall plug the gap in the support system and shall replace the lost soil with suitable fill material. 2. Where measurements and observations indicate the possibility of failure of the excavation support, determined in accordance with general engineering practice, Contractor shall take appropriate action immediately. 3. Control Points: a. Contractor shall establish control points on the support system and on structures and other improvements in the vicinity of the excavation for measurement of horizontal and vertical movement. 1) Control points in the support system shall be set at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level. Support levels shall be the levels of tie -backs, whalers, bottom of excavation, and other types of supports. 2) Control points shall be set in corners of structures and on curbs, manholes, and other locations indicated on the Plans. b. Contractor shall provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating the original position of the plumb bobs at locations indicated on the Plans. 1990 2-9 W3266B.10 32665.10 Div. 2 c. Contractor shall perform horizontal and vertical measurements of the control points at least once every week. 020323 BARRICADES Barriers shall be placed at each end of all excavations and at such places as may be necessary along excavations to warn all pedestrian and vehicular traffic of such excavations. Lights shall also be placed along excavations from one hour before sunset each day to one hour after sunrise of the next day until such excavation is entirely refilled, compacted, and paved. All excavations shall be barricaded in such a manner as to prevent persons from falling, walking, or otherwise entering any excavation in any street, roadway, parking lot, treatment plant, or any other area, public or private. 020324 EXCAVATIONS FOR BUILDINGS AND UNDERGROUND TANK The excavation shall conform to the dimensions and elevations indicated on the Plans for each building and underground tank and shall include trenching for adjacent piping and all work incidental thereto. In locations where soil of suitable bearing value is encountered at a different elevation from that indicated on the Plans, the Engineer may direct in writing that the excavation be carried to elevations above or below those indicated on the Plans. Unless so directed by the Engineer, excavation shall not be carried below the elevations indicated on the Plans. Where the excavation is made below the elevations indicated on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the excavation, if under slabs, shall be restored to the proper elevation in accordance with the procedure hereinafter specified for backfill; or if under footings, the heights of the walls or footings shall be increased, or space shall be refilled with Class C concrete at the expense of the Contractor, as may be directed by the Engineer. Excavation shall extend at least 24 inches in the clear from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services, and inspection. Undercutting will not be permitted. Where a structure would be located partially on fill and partially on undisturbed or natural material, the entire area shall be over excavated to a depth of 6 inches below the elevations indicated and recompacted to 95 percent maximum density. 020330 COMPACTED FILLS Fills, embankments, or backfills (except trench backfills specified elsewhere), herein designated as fills, shall be constructed at the locations and to the lines and grades indicated on the Plans. The completed fill shall correspond to the shape of the typical sections on the Plans or shall meet the requirements for the particular case. Material fcr fills shall be obtained from cut sections or borrow from a source as selected by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. Maximum particle size shall not exceed 4 -inches. The fill material shall be free of leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other vegetable matter. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, the areas to receive fill material shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches and recompacted to the density of the fill material density specified in the following. Excavated material shall be stockpiled and 1990 2-10 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 2 reused when possible. The borrow source has not been provided within the project site. The Contractor shall provide for imported fill material if required at no additional cost to the District. Fills and backfills and the upper 6 inches in cuts shall be compacted to the percentage of maximum density specified in the following tabulation: Location Percent Backfill adjacent to structures 95 Under structures 95 Under roadways, parking, storage areas, 90 and underground tank Other areas 90 All compacted fills shall be placed in successive layers of loose material not exceeding 6 inches in depth after compaction. Each layer shall be brought to optimum moisture content for maximum density before compaction by rolling. If any material is placed that does not have the correct moisture content, it shall be removed and replaced. Soft, spongy, or springy material causing areas that "pump" when heavy loads pass over them shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. Dry material that will not "ball" shall be removed and replaced. These two conditions shall be considered as sufficient evidence without further testing that the moisture content is not correct and the material shall be removed. Each layer shall be spread uniformly by the use of a road machine or other accepted device and rolled with an acceptable tamping roller, heavy pneumatic roller, or 3 -wheeled power roller until thoroughly compacted to not less than the specified density. Fill that is to be compacted and is inaccessible to rollers shall be compacted with pneumatic, vibrating, or other tamping equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to accomplish the specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other earthwork. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to control his operations by confirmation tests to verify and confirm that he has complied, and is complying at all times, with the requirements of these Specifications concerning compaction, control, and testing. The use of trucks, carryalls, scrapers, tractors, or other heavy hauling equipment shall not be considered as rolling in lieu of rollers, but the traffic of such hauling equipment shall be distributed over the fill in such a manner as to make use of the compaction afforded thereby as an addition to compaction by the use of rollers. 020331 BACKFILL AND BASE MATERIALS Sand, aggregate base course (ABC) material, gravel fill, drain rock, and native material, where required for fill, backfill, bedding, and/or backfill around pipe and trench backfill shall conform to the following specifications. 1990 2-11 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 020331.10 SAND The sand used for bedding under and around the pipe shall be clean, coarse, natural sand which shall be nonplastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 424 and 100 percent shall pass a 1/2 -inch screen and no more than 20 percent shall pass a No. 200 screen. 020331.20 BASE MATERIAL The material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and grading. The material shall be free from vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, alkali, adobe, or other deleterious matter, and shall conform to the following gradations when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C 136 and AASHTO T-11 or ASTM C 117 (Cal -TRANS, Class 2, 3/4 -inch maximum). Where indicated on the Plans for structures, compacted gravel fill shall be compacted aggregate base (ABC) material compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum density. Percent ABC By Weight Sieve Sizes Passing Sieve 1 -inch 100 3/4 -inch 87-100 No. 4 30-60 No. 30 5-35 No. 200 0-12 In addition to the above requirements, all material, when sampled and tested in accordance with standard test methods, shall meet the following requirements: PERCENTAGE OF WEAR: When tested in accordance with ASTM C 131, the percentage of wear shall not exceed 40 percent after 500 revolutions. PLASTICITY INDEX: When tested in accordance with AASHTO T-90 or ASTM D 424, the plasticity index shall not be more than 5. LIQUID LIMIT: When tested in accordance with AASHTO T-89 or ASTM D 423, the liquid limit shall not be more than 25 percent. Aggregate base (ABC) for structures shall consist of crushed or fragmented particles. The aggregate shall conform to the sieve analysis in this Specification except that the least dimension of the maximum particle size shall not exceed 2/3 of the compacted thickness of the specified lift being placed. 1990 2-12 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 A 020331.30 SELECT MATERIAL Select material as specified herein shall mean sound earthen material for which the sum of the plasticity under as determined by the methods of AASHTO T-90 or ASTM D 424 and the percent of material by weight passing the No. 200 sieve, tested in accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C-136, shall not exceed 23. 020331.40 NATIVE MATERIAL Native material as specified herein shall mean sound, earthen material passing the 1 -inch screen with not more than 30 percent passing the No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C-136. 020331.50 DRAIN ROCK The materials shall consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and grading. The material shall be free from vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter and shall conform to the following gradings when tested in accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C 136. Sieve Size Percent By Weight Square Opening) Passing Screen 2 -inch 100 1 -1/2 -inch 95-100 3/4 -inch 50-100 3/8 -inch 15- 55 No. 4 0-25 No. 8 0-5 No. 200 0-3 PO Coarse material shall be crushed or wasted and fine material shall be wasted to meet the grading requirements set forth above. A Coarse aggregate, retained on the No. 4 sieve, shall have a percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested by the Los Angeles Test, AASHTO T-96 or ASTM C 131. 020332 PREPARING GROUND SURFACES FOR FILL After clearing is completed, the entire area which will underlie fill sections or structures shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches and until the surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features which would prevent uniform compaction by the equipment used. The areas shall be recompacted to the density specified for COMPACTED FILLS before placing of fill material or concrete, as the case may be. Where cemented rock, cobbles, or boulders compose a large portion of the foundation material underlying structures, slabs, or paved areas, it may not be advisable to scarify the top 6 inches prior to compaction. If the Engineer deems it advisable not to scarify the existing natural ground, the Contractor shall moisten the native soil and compact it as specified below in the following for coarsely graded material. 1990 2-13 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 2 Foundations for fill having slopes in excess of one vertical to four horizontal shall be benched or terraced to adequately key the existing ground and the fill built thereon. The slopes of original hillsides and old fills shall be benched a minimum of 4 feet horizontally as the fill is placed. A new bench shall be started wherever the vertical cut of the next lower bench intersects the existing ground. Material thus cut out shall be recompacted along with the new embankment material by the Contractor at no additional cost to the District. 020334 BACKFILL AROUND STRUCTURES After completion of foundation footings and walls and other construction below the elevation of the final grades and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and excavation shall be cleaned of all trash and debris. Material for backfilling outside of, but adjacent to, structures, and not specified otherwise above, shall consist of native material passing a 1 -1/2 -inch screen or of imported sand, gravel, or other materials acceptable to the Engineer. All backfill material shall be free of trash, roots, lumber, organic matter, or other debris. The backfill material in confined areas shall be compacted with pneumatic, vibrating, or other acceptable tamping equipment to the density specified for COMPACTED FILLS in this Section. After inspection of foundations, walls, and pipes, backfill shall be placed symmetrically to prevent eccentric loading upon or against structures. All backfill, whether adjacent to structures, in trenches, or in other areas, shall be compacted to the density specified under COMPACTED FILLS. 020340 TRENCH EXCAVATION New pipe and electrical conduit shall be laid in an open trench. If the bottom of the excavation is found to consist of rock or any material that by reason of its hardness cannot be excavated to give a uniform bearing surface, said rock or other material shall be removed to a depth of not less than 3 inches below the bottom of the pipe and refilled to grade with ABC material or sand placed at a uniform density, with minimum possible compaction, all at the Contractor's expense. If the bottom of the excavation is found to consist of soft or unstable material which is incapable of properly supporting the pipe, such material shall be removed to a depth required and for the lengths required and the trench refilled to grade with native material, ABC material or sand, compacted to 90 percent of maximum density. Where indicated on the Plans, pipe shall be cradled in concrete. The minimum clear width of the trench for pipe 4 inches in diameter and over, measured at the top of the pipe, shall be not less than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 18 inches. The maximum clear width of the trench for pipe, measured at the top of the pipe, shall not exceed the outside diameter of the pipe plus 24. 1990 2-14 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 Excavation for manholes, valves, or other accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between their outer surfaces and the embankment or timber which may be used to hold the banks and protect them. Backfill with earth under manholes, vaults, tanks, or valves will not be permitted. Any unauthorized excess excavation below the elevation indicated for foundation of any structure shall be filled with sand, base material, or concrete, at the expense of the Contractor. Backfilling of manhole excavation shall conform to the backfilling required for trenches. If, because of soil conditions, safety requirements or other reasons, the trench width at top of pipe is increased beyond the width specified in the preceding paragraphs, laying conditions shall be upgraded or stronger pipe installed, designed in conformance with the Specifications for the increased trench width, without additional cost to the District. Before laying pipes or electrical that are to be in fill, the fill shall first be placed and compacted to not less than 2 feet above the top of pipe or conduit. After the placing and compacting of the fill, the trench for the pipe or conduit shall be excavated through the fill and fine graded as required hereinafter. 020342 FINE GRADING Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the bottom of the trench for pipes 16 inches in nominal diameter and under shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe, on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for portions of the pipe where it is necessary to excavate for bells and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. Where the trench excavation is made below the grade required to accommodate the bedding material, the trench bottom shall be restored to the proper grade by backfilling and compacting the backfill to 95 percent of maximum density, at the expense of the Contractor. Backfill material shall be select material as specified herein. Bell or coupling holes shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded. Such holes shall be of sufficient width to provide ample room for caulking or banding. Bell and coupling holes shall be excavated only as necessary to permit accurate work in the making of the joints and to insure that the pipe will rest upon the prepared bottom of the trench, and not be supported by any portion of the joint. Depressions for joints, other than bell -and -spigot, shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the joint manufacturer for the particular joint used. 020344 PIPE BEDDING After the pipe is laid, bedding material shall be placed under and around the pipe to a level even with the spring line of the pipe, compacted to 90 percent of maximum density. The section of trench from the spring line to 12 inches above the top of the pipe shall then be filled with bedding 1990 2-15 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 material and compacted to 90 percent of maximum density. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions in the placement and compaction of the bedding material to prevent displacement of the pipe. In the event there is movement or floating, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, re -excavate, re-lay, and backfill all pipe so affected. Except as otherwise specified, bedding material for pipe less than 16 -inch nominal size shall be sand, ABC, or select material passing the 1 -inch screen. After filling the trench to a level 12 inches above the top of the pipe, the Contractor has the option to water test the pipe or to backfill to the surface, at his own risk, before testing. If the pipe does not pass the hydrostatic test, he shall uncover the pipe, locate the leaks, repair and retest, repeating until the pipe section under test passes the hydrostatic test, all at the Contractor's expense. 020345 TRENCH BACKFILL The trench backfill from 12 inches above the top of the pipe to the natural surface level or the finished grade indicated on the Plans shall be placed and compacted as follows: Trench backfill for trench cuts in areas outside the traveled right-of-way shall consist of backfilling the trench from 12 inches above the top of the pipe to finished grade with native material compacted to 90 percent of maximum density. Where trench backfill also falls under the category of backfill adjacent to structures, the specifications in Section 020330 shall be applicable. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to be assured that the native material, when used as previously specified, is capable of being compacted to the degree specified. If the native material cannot be compacted to the density as previously specified, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove and dispose of this material whether it has been placed in the trench as backfill or not, and to utilize other backfill material from another source acceptable to the Engineer, at no extra cost to the District. Where existing underground pipes or conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter cross the trench above the new work, the backfill from the bottom of the trench to the spring line of the intersecting pipe or conduit shall be aggregate base course material compacted to 90 percent of maximum density. The aggregate base course material shall extend 2 feet on either side of the intersecting pipe or conduit to insure that the material will remain in place while other backfill is placed. Excess material shall be removed as directed by the Engineer. 020347 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT Replacement of street, driveway, alley entrance, and other type pavements shall be of the same material as the existing pavement, constructed in accordance with the applicable Plans and Specifications. 1990 2-16 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 2 The Contractor shall install temporary asphalt pavement or the first course of permanent pavement replacement immediately following backfilling and compaction of trenches that have been cut through existing pavement. Except as otherwise provided, this preliminary pavement shall be maintained in a safe and reasonably smooth condition until required permanent pavement is installed. Temporary paving removed shall be hauled from the job site and disposed of at the Contractor's expense. Where a longitudinal trench is partly in pavement, the pavement shall be replaced to the original pavement edge, on a straight line, parallel to the center line of the roadway. Where no part of a longitudinal trench is in the pavement, surfacing replacement will only be required where existing surfacing materials have been removed. When the trench cut is in aggregate surfaced areas, the replacement shall be of aggregate base course material compacted to 95 percent of its maximum density. Aggregate shall match existing aggregate. 020348 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPLACEMENT Asphalt pavement replacement shall be a minimum of 3 -inches thick or of the same thickness as the adjacent pavement, whichever is greater, and shall match as nearly as possible the adjacent pavement in texture, and elevation unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Existing asphalt pavements to be removed for trenches or other underground construction or repair shall be cut by a wheel cutter, clay spade, or other device capable of making a neat, reasonably straight and smooth cut without damaging adjacent pavement that is not to be removed. The cutting device operation shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The existing pavement shall be cut and trimmed after placement of required ABC and just prior to placement of asphalt concrete for pavement replacement, and the trimmed edges shall be painted with a light coating of asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt immediately prior to constructing the new abutting asphalt pavements. No extra payment will be provided for these items, and all costs incurred in performing this work shall be incidental to pipe laying or pavement replacement. Asphalt pavement replacement shall conform to the contour of the original pavement. A 10 -foot straightedge shall be laid parallel to the center line of the trench when the trench is running parallel to the street, and across the pavement replacement when the trench crosses the street at an angle. Any deviation in the cut pavement replacement and the old pavement greater than 1/4 -inch in 10 feet (10 -foot straightedge) shall be removed and corrected. 020400 SITE DRAINAGE This section pertains to the collection and disposal of storm water naturally draining across or falling on the project site. 1990 2-17 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 020410 EXISTING CHANNELS Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, no existing drainage channel shall be blocked or diverted in such a way that its point of discharge from the project site is diverted from its natural point of discharge. 021020 PLANTING OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS 021020.10 PRODUCTS 021020.11 FERTILIZER HUMUS: Humus shall be decomposed stabilized fortified, treated nitrolized) wood products with no more than one (1) percent nitrogen after treatment: fir mulch, pine mulch, or redwood mulch. FERTILIZER: Fertilizer shall be 0 percent nitrogen, 20 percent phosphorus, and 20 percent potassium. SLOW RELEASE FERTILIZER: Slow release fertilizer shall be in tablet form. CLEAN TOP SOIL: Clean top soil shall be taken from site. 021020.12 PREPARED BACKFILL Prepared backfill shall be composed of two parts of native soils to one part of a humus by volume and the fertilizer 0-20-20 to be added at a rate of one and one-half (1-1/2) pounds per cubic yard. 021020.13 FERTILIZER TABLETS Slow release fertilizer tablets shall be added accordingly to the container size of plants: 1 gallon 5 gallons 15 gallons 24 box 021020.15 WATER 1 tablet 2 tablets 4 tablets 6 tablets Water used in planting shall be kept free from oil, acids, alkali, salt, and other substances harmful to plant growth. 021020.20 PLANT MATERIALS All shipments or orders of plant material shall be inspected at the nursery or at the growing site by the authorized Federal and State authorities. All necessary inspection certificates shall accompany the invoice for each shipment or order of stock, as may be required by law for the necessary transportation, and such certificates shall be filed with the Engineer prior to acceptance of the materials. 1990 2-18 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 2 SIZE AND CONDITION OF PLANTS: Unless otherwise indicated, all plant material furnished shall be nursery grown, well branched, and well proportioned. All plants are subject to inspection and acceptance before planting by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish a letter to the Engineer certifying that all plants procured for installation are true in size and representative of the species and/or variety specified. Any plants found to be deficient in size or condition, or not as specified in regard to species and/or variety, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense with acceptable plants. 021020.21 NOMENCLATURE For inspection and identification, durable, legible labels stating, in weather -resistant ink, the correct plant name and size, as specified in the plant list, shall be securely attached to all plants, bundles, and containers of plant material delivered to the site. 021020.22 QUALITY AND SIZE Plants shall be in accordance with rules for grading included in the "American Standard for Nursery Stock," 1959 edition and "Standard Plant Names," 1942 edition. All plants shall have a normal habit of growth and shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from disease and insect infestations. Trees shall have a straight trunk throughout their height. 021020.23 CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS Container grown plants shall have been grown in pots, cans, tubs, or boxes for a minimum of 3 months and a maximum of 1 year. They shall have sufficient roots to earth to hold earth together intact after removal from containers, but shall not be root -bound. Plants shall be carefully removed from containers so as to prevent breaking or cracking of earth during the planting processes. 021021 PLANTS The species (scientific and common names), sizes, manner in which to be furnished, and the approximate number required, shall be as indicated on the Plans or specified. Plant quantities on the list are indicated only for the convenience of the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish and install all plant material necessary to complete the planting as indicated on the Plans. Surpluses or shortages on the plant number indicated or specified shall not be used for additional claims to the Owner. PROTECTION AFTER DELIVERY: Upon delivery to the site, all nursery stock shall be planted as soon as possible. Until planting, stock plants shall not be exposed to excessive sun or drying winds during the planting operations. Stock which is not satisfactory shall be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. 1990 2-19 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 021022 EXECUTION FOR PLANTING All seeding and planting shall be conducted in the fall, as late as possible in order to avoid fall germination, but prior to ground freeze. Soils must be moist to root depth prior to installing containerized plants. Any rock or other underground obstructions shall be removed, if possible, to the depth necessary to permit proper planting, according to the Plans and Specifications. If underground constructions, obstructions, or rock are encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other locations for the planting may be selected by the Contractor only upon acceptance of the Engineer. Prior to any work, the Contractor shall be knowledgeable of the locations of all existing underground installations, and their protection shall be his responsibility. All damage shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. 021023 SEEDING TREATMENT 021023.10 TREATMENT SCHEDULE Revegetation shall progress in the following order where possible. Site preparation (hand regrading, soil loosening) Apply seed Apply straw and tackifier where indicated 021023.20 SITE PREPARATION Prior to commencing site preparation operations, the Contractor shall request a review by the Engineer to verify limitations and treatments. No work shall be performed without direct supervision and approval of the Engineer. Existing vegetation shall be protected. Vegetation damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced by the Contractor as directed by the Project Engineer. All compacted soils on slopes shall be loosened with hand tools to a depth of two to four inches. The Contractor shall remove large unstable rocks, stumps and debris marked for removal. Final grade shall be a non-uniform, natural appearing slope. 021023.30 SEEDING All seed shall comply with Section 20-2.10 of Caltrans Standard Specifications and the Pure Live Seed (purity and germination) requirements listed below. Species and/or varieties may be substituted upon the approval of the Project Engineer or Plant Materials Specialist. Seed shall be broadcast with hand-held seeders and as uniformly as possible. Seed shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of approximately 1/4 to 1/2 inch by hand raking. 1990 2-20 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 Seed Mix #1 (Types 2 and 3 Revegetation) Min Botanical Name Common Name/Variety #lbs/acre PLS Agropyron trachycaulum Slender wheatgrass 15 80 San Luis" Bromus marginatus Mtn. Brome, "Bromar" 10 10 Dactvlis glomerata Orchardgrass, "Paiute" 7 76 Festuca ovina ssp. Hard fescue, "Durar" 10 80 duriusca1a Poa ampla Big bluegrass, "Sherman" 6 65 Linum lewisii Lewis flax, "Apar" 2 TOTAL 50 021023.40 MULCHING, TACKIFYING Wheat, oat or barley straw shall be applied at approximately 1.5 tons per acre, by hand or with a straw blower. Straw shall comply with Section 20- 2.06 of Caltrans Standard Specifications and pass inspection if not grown in California. All bales shall be free of noxious weeds and mold. Straw shall be anchored in place by manually "punching" the straw in by shovel. 021024 SHRUB AND TREE PLANTING 021024.10 GENERAL The Contractor shall specifically request the following reviews by the Engineer prior to progressing with the work: 1) plant approval and layout including finish grade), 2) substantial completion, and 3) final completion. The Contractor shall submit notice to the Engineer certifying the quantities and species of plant materials ordered, the nursery supplying the material available or proposed substitutions to be approved by the Project Engineer. 021024.20 SOURCE All woody plants shall be grown from seed collected in the Tahoe Basin or from sources with growing conditions similar to those at Tahoe. Plants shall be propagated in the Tahoe Basin or in an area with similar growing conditions. Plants grown outside the Basin require a minimum two week acclimation period on the site prior to planting. Plant health shall be maintained during this period. 1990 2-21 W3266B.10 326614.10 Div. 2 021024.30 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTING Excavation for planting shall include the stripping and stockpiling of all acceptable top soil encountered within the areas to be excavated for tree and shrub pits, and ground cover beds. The Contractor shall be responsible for fine grading of planting areas. 021024.40 SETTING PLANTS Unless otherwise specified, all plants shall be planted in pits and shall be set so that the finish grade level after settlement shall be the same as that at which plants were grown. They shall be planted upright and faced to give the best appearance and relationship to adjacent plants or structures. All trees shall be set plumb and rigidly braced in position until the soil has been tamped solidly around the ball. Plants shall be backfilled with planting soil which shall be thoroughly settled by watering and tamping to fill all voids. 021024.50 CONTAINER SIZE Container size for trees and shrubs shall be five gallon. Plants shall be well rooted in the containers and easily removed intact. 021024.60 PLANT HEALTH All trees shall have straight trunks of uniform taper, larger at the bottom. Trunks shall be free of damaged bark, with all minor cuts and abrasions showing healing tissue. Foliage, roots and stems of all plants shall be of vigorous health and normal habit of growth for its species. All plants shall be free of insect infestations and diseases. Top growth shall be proportionate to bottom growth. "Leggy" or floppy growth shall be pruned back during propagation or two weeks prior to installation. 021024.70 SPECIES TO BE PLANTED Species Bitterbrush Jeffrey Pine 021024.80 PLANTING Quantity 4 6 Before all planting operations commence, all plant materials shall be approved by the Project Engineer. Locations of all plants shall be approved prior to planting. No plants shall be laid out on a slope more than one hour prior to planting. Plants installed without this approval my be subject to transplanting or replacement, as directed by the Project Engineer. Thoroughly water all plants before planting. Excavated hole shall be planted immediately to avoid drying of soils. Holes shall be a minimum of two inches deeper than root length, measured from the bottom of the container to the plant crown. Make the hole slightly wider than the width of the container. Soils shall be loosened in the bottom and along the sides of the hole. One- half to one tablespoon of 17-7-12 Osmocote or equivalent shall be placed in the bottom of the planting hole and covered with soil. The plant shall then 1990 2-22 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 be gently removed from the container and compacted roots slightly loosened. Place the plant in the hole and backfill with the excavated moist soil, so that the top of the rootball is one to two inches below existing grade, creating a "planting pocket". Soil shall then be firmly tamped into place. 021025 GUYING AND STAKING Guying and staking shall be as indicated on the Plans. 021026 SUMMARY OF TREATMENTS Type 1 Revegetation: Interplant trees and shrubs using slow release fertilizer. Type 2 Revegetation: Hand loosen soils as needed, apply Seed Mix #1 at 50 lbs./AC, apply straw at 1.5 tons/AC, anchor with organic tackifiers. 021030 MAINTENANCE The Contractor shall maintain all landscaped areas on a continuous basis as they are completed during the course of work and until final acceptance of the Work. Maintenance shall include keeping the landscape areas free of debris and weeding and cultivating the planted areas at intervals acceptable to the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide adequate personnel to accomplish the required maintenance. Pruning of plants shall be done as required. The Contractor shall insure that all plant materials are in a sound, healthy, vigorous condition free from insects, bark abrasions, weak branches, or other objectionable disfigurements and shall immediately replace any plant which is unacceptable to the Engineer at any time up to and including final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. 1990 2-23. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 2 f i 1990 32666.10 Div. 2-A DIVISION 2 SITEWORK SECTION 2-A SOILS REPORT 2A-1. W3266B.10 i 9 EARTH SCIENCE CONSULTANTS ASSOCIATED 1242 Glendale Ave. -Sparks, Nevada 89431 702) 359-0750 11 nr 1?4iq JOHN CAROLLO ENGINEERS John Caroilo Engineers 2530 J Street, Suite 302 Sacramento, CA 95816 Attn: Jack Burnam II Re: Fallen Leaf lake Containment Tank Dear Jack: January 22, 1990 G-1908 On December 6, 1989, I made a soil examination of the proposed tark site for the referenced containment tank. A shallow test pit was dug at the site by the South Tahoe Public Utility District personnel and at the location they selected as being the probable tank site. The tank site is underlain by geologically Recent alluvium comprised silt, sand, gravel and cobbles derived from, reworked glacial deposits. Bedrock consisting of metasedimentary rock is anticipated to lie at a relatively shallow depth. A description of the soils exposed in the test pit is as follows: 0.0 - 1.5 Feet - Slightly compact, pale red -brown, slightly clayey gravelly silt 1.5 - 3.5 Feet - Compact, pale red -brawn silty sand and grave] 3.5 - 5.0 Feet - Compact, grey -brown saturated sand, gravel and cobbles Due to the coarse grained nature of the soils at this their compact consistency, liquefaction during earthquakes is to occur. These soils are granular, non -expansive, and any that does occur will take place during construction. Groundwater was encountered at a depth of 4.5 feet and the test pit was terminated at 5.0 feet due to the water and probable caving soils below this depth. site, and not likely settlement GEOLOGICAL ENGINEERING -MATERIALS TESTING -FOUNDATION ENGINEERING John Ca rol l l o Engineers Fallen Leaf Lake Containment lank Page 2 January 22, 1990 G-1908 The soils below a depth of 4.5 feet were clean and coarse grained with cobbles and some small boulders. Their coarse grained consistency will not allow for compaction and their angular to subangular shape precludes their use as backfill immediately adjacent to the walls of the containment tank. The uppermost 4.5 feet of soil are finer grained and contain sane fines; these soils could be used as backfill.. The tank should be designed to resist the hydrostatic uplift forces produced by the shallow groundwater as the clean nature of the soil below 4.5 feet indicates frequent groundwater at this depth. Excavation below the water table will require dewatering by puips to construct forms and place any concrete if required. Any base or subbase that is required as a leveling/support. pad for the containment take will need to be imported as will pipe bedding and pipe cover backfill. These imported materials should conform to the 1984 Standard Specifications of the California DOT for Class 2 Aggregate Base per Section 26. Sand bedding for pipe should conform to Section 19-3.025B per the same standards. Compaction of base aggregates and sand bedding should be to 90 percent per ASTM D1557-78 test method. A minimum depth of 24 inches should be used for frost depth penetration. Allowable design loads up to 2,500 pounds per square foot can be used on the granular soils. Passive -earth pressures of 300 pounds per square foot per foot of depth and active pressures of 35 pounds per foot of depth are recommended for soils above the water table. An at rest earth pressure of 52 pounds per square foot per foot of depth is recommenced above the water table. Below the water table an at rest earth pressure of 85 pounds per square foot per foot of depth should be used. Excavations made to a depth of not greater than five feet can be made with cut slopes of 1 to 1. Excavations deeper than five feet (i.e. below the water table) will require that the slopes be flattened to 1.75 to 1 (horizontal to vertical) and dewatering by pumps will. be required. If you require any addition geotechnical information give me a call. Very truly yours A1472( Tun Cordova, P.E. TC:ejp 0 41 030000 GENERAL 0 0 0 0 0 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE Except as otherwise specified, concrete shall be composed of portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable mixture in accordance with all requirements of these Specifications and suitable to the specific conditions of placement. The proportions of materials shall be such as to secure the lowest water - cement ratio which is consistent with good workability, a plastic, cohesive mixture, and one which is within the specified slump range. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate shall be such as not to produce harshness in placing nor honeycombing in the structures. 030001 WATERTIGHTNESS OF CONCRETE WORK It is the intent of this Specification to secure for every part of the Work concrete and grout of homogeneous structure, which when hardened will have the required strength, watertightness, and resistance to weathering. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will develop in the concrete surfaces. Construction, contraction, and expansion joints have been positioned in structures, and curing methods specified, for the purpose of reducing the number and size of these expected cracks, due to the normal expansion and contraction expected from the specified concrete mixes. Class A and Class B concrete shall be watertight. Cracks which develop in walls or slabs shall be repaired. Cracks which show any signs of leakage shall be repaired until all leakage is stopped. 030002 JOINTS AND BONDING As far as practicable the concrete work shall be constructed as a monolith. The locations of contraction, construction, and other joints are indicated on the Plans or specified herein. Where not specified or indicated otherwise, all slabs and walls shall have construction joints at intervals not greater than 30 feet. In order to preserve the strength and watertightness of the structures, no other joints shall be made except as the Engineer may authorize. At construction joints, the concrete in place shall be thoroughly cleaned of laitance, grease, oil, mud, dirt, curing compounds, mortar droppings, or other objectionable matter by means of a bush hammer or heavy sandblasting, after which the surfaces shall be washed just prior to the succeeding concrete placement. Immediately prior to resuming concrete placing operations, a bed of grout not less than 1/2 inch in thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness shall be thoroughly spread over the horizontal joint surfaces. Keyways in joints shall be provided as indicated on the Plans. Material for keyways shall be steel, plastic or lumber treated with form release coating, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. 1990 3A-1 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-A Construction joints shall be washed free of sawdust, chips, and other debris after forms are built and immediately before the concrete placement. Should formwork confine sawdust, chips, or other loose matter in such manner that it is impossible to remove them by flushing with water, a vacuum cleaner shall be used for their removal, after which the cleaned surfaces shall be flushed with water. A cleanout hole shall be provided at the base of each wall and column for inspection and cleaning. In any case where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding mortar or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, the surface of the set concrete shall first be coated with epoxy bonding agent Concressive No. 1001 LPL as manufactured by Adhesive Engineering; Sikadur Hi -Mod as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corporation; or equal. This material shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie holes or for normal finishing and patching of similar sized small defects. Expansion, contraction, and construction joints shall be constructed where and as indicated on the Plans. Waterstops, expansion joint material, synthetic rubber sealing compound, and other similar materials, shall be as specified elsewhere herein. The Contractor shall schedule the placing of concrete in such a manner as to complete any single placing operation to a construction, contraction, or expansion joint. Special care shall be taken to insure that concrete is well consolidated around and against waterstops and that waterstops are secured in the proper position. 030100 WORKMANSHIP AND METHODS Concrete work, including detailing of reinforcing, shall be in accordance with the best standard practices and as set forth in the ACI Building Code, Manuals, and Recommended Practices. All concrete materials shall be so delivered, stored, and handled as to prevent damage to the materials and the inclusion of foreign substances. Packaged materials shall be delivered and stored in original containers until ready for use. Material containers or materials showing evidence of water or other damage shall be rejected. 030101 MEASUREMENTS OF MATERIALS Materials shall be measured by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other methods are specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. The apparatus provided for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. Cement shall be weighed separately. The accuracy of all weighing devices shall be such that successive quantities of the individual item can be measured to within 1 percent of the desired amount of that item. Cement in unbroken standard packages (sack) need not be weighed, but bulk cement and fractional packages shall be weighed. The mixing water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The water measuring device shall be capable of control of water quantities to 1990 3A-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A an accuracy of 1 percent of the desired amount. All measuring or weighing devices shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer, and shall bear a valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction. 030102 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS AND CONSISTENCY The concrete shall be of such consistency and composition that it can be worked readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around the reinforcement without excessive vibration and without permitting the materials to segregate or free water to collect on the surface. The ratio of coarse aggregate to fine aggregate shall be not less than 1.0 nor more than 2.0 for all concrete with the exception of Class CE. To avoid unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency, the aggregate shall be obtained from a source which will insure uniform quality, moisture content, and grading during any single day's operation. Aggregate shall be delivered to the Work and handled in such a manner that variations in moisture content will not interfere with the steady production of concrete of the specified degree of uniformity and slump. See Table A of this Division for the concrete mix water to cement ratio, minimum cement content, and slump range. It is the Contractor's responsibility to control and adjust the concrete batch weights so as to secure the maximum yield, yet at all times the Contractor shall maintain the proportions of the concrete mix within the specified limits. If it is required, in the opinion of the Engineer, the mixture shall be modified within the limits set forth in these Specifications. 030103 CONCRETE MIXES Prior to placement of concrete the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance full details, including mix design calculations for the concrete mix he proposes to use for each class of concrete. The Contractor shall submit laboratory compression test date performed within the past six months provided by the concrete supplier to verify concrete strength and mix requirements. Each past -test shall provide data regarding concrete mix, admixtures, and 7 -day and 28 -day results. In the submittal, the Contractor must clearly identify which past mix will be used for each class of concrete to be used on this project. After acceptance, the mixes shall not at any time be changed without reacceptance by the Engineer, except that at all times the batching of water shall be adjusted to compensate for the free moisture content of the fine aggregate. The total water content of each of the type concretes shall not exceed those listed in Table A of this Division. Satisfactory means shall be provided at the batching plant for checking the moisture content of the fine aggregate. The details of concrete mixes submitted for review shall include information on the correction of the batching for varying moisture contents of the fine aggregate. 1990 3A-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A If there is a change in the aggregate source, or if there is a change in aggregate quality from the same source, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance a new set of design mixes covering each class of concrete, and a new trial batch and test program shall be undertaken as hereinbefore specified. Each new trial batch and test program shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 030104 TESTING OF CONCRETE During the progress of construction, the Contractor shall have tests made to determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with the standards of quality specified herein. These tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, and ASTM C 172. Test cylinders will be made and delivered to the laboratory by the Engineer and the testing expense will be borne by the Contractor. Not less than three cylinder specimens, 6 inch by 12 inch, will be tested for each 20 cubic yards of each grade ofconcrete with a minimum of three specimens for each grade placed. One cylinder will be broken at 7 days and two at 28 days. The Contractor shall test the slump of concrete using a slump cone in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 143. The Contractor shall provide the test equipment. Concrete that does not meet the Specification requirements as to slump shall not be used but shall be removed from the job. The Contractor shall test the slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to keep the slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make provisions for and furnish all concrete for the test specimens, and provide manual assistance to the Engineer in preparing said specimens. The Contractor shall be responsible for the care of and providing curing conditions for the test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31. 030105 ENFORCEMENT OF STRENGTH REQUIREMENT Concrete is expected to reach a higher compressive strength than that which is indicated in Table A as compressive strength. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the required strength and no individual strength test falls below the required strength by more than 500 psi. Where an individual strength test falls below the required strength by more than 500 psi, the Engineer shall have the right to ask for additional curing of the affected portion followed by cores taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and ACI 318, all at the Contractor's expense. If the additional curing does not bring the average of three cores taken in the affected area to at least the strength specified, the Engineer may require strengthening of the affected portions of the structures by means of additional concrete or steel or he may require replacement of these affected portions, all at the Contractor's expense. 1990 3A-4 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-A 030110 CLASSES OF CONCRETE Concrete used on this job shall be of four classes, herein referred to as Classes A, B, C, and CE which shall be as specified herein and which shall be used in the respective places called for in these Specifications. These classes of concrete shall have a minimum weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot. Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of pipe, when noted on the Plans. Class B concrete may be used where Class A concrete is required, if high -early -strength is desired, at the Contractor's option. Class CE shall be used for electrical conduit encasements. All other concrete, unless specified or noted otherwise, shall be Class A concrete. Class A B Type III cement) C CE Compressive Strength At 28 day psi) 3,750 3,750 2,500 2,500 See 030180. TABLE A CONCRETE WITH AIR ENTRAINMENT Max. Net* Water to Cement Ratio by Weight Min. Cement* Per Yard of Concrete pounds) 0.48 564 0.48 564 0.62 423 0.62 564 Consistency Range In Slump inches) 2 to 4** 2 to 4** 3 to 6 3 to 6 NOTE: Slump for slabs, decks, walks, and beams shall be not more than 3.5 inches." Any concrete that is pumped shall meet all the requirements of these Specifications. In no case shall concrete be placed which shows a slump outside the limits indicated in the table. Classes A, C, and CE concrete shall be made with Type II low alkali. Class B concrete shall be made with Type III low alkali cement. See Admixtures for allowable admixtures. 030120 AGGREGATE All concrete aggregates shall be sound, uniformly graded, and free of deleterious material in excess of the allowable amounts specified. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer certified copies in triplicate of commercial laboratory tests of all samples of concrete aggregates submitted. Tests on concrete aggregates shall indicate as a minimum all specified tests. All concrete aggregate tests shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1990 3A-5 W3266B.10 41 3266B.10 Div. 3-A Aggregate shall be sampled and graded in accordance with ASTM D 75 and C 136. Sieves for testing grading of aggregates shall have square openings. Sieve analyses of the fine and coarse aggregates being used shall be furnished the Engineer in triplicate at any time there is a significant change in the grading of the materials, and in any event, shall be furnished at least every three weeks. If such sieve analyses indicate a significant change in the materials, the Engineer may require that a new mix design be submitted for review and acceptance before further placing of concrete. If either fine or coarse aggregate is to be batched from more than one bin, analyses shall be furnished for each bin, and a composite analysis made up from these, using the proportions of materials to be used in the mix. The unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate shall be of a unit weight which will produce in place concrete with a weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot. 030121 FINE AGGREGATE Fine aggregate for concrete or mortar shall consist of clean, natural sand or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel. Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of the following percentages by weight of contaminating substances. In no case shall the total exceed 3 percent. Test Method Percent Removed by decantation ASTM C 117 3 dirt, silt, etc.) Shale or chert ASTM C 295 1 Clay lumps ASTM C 142 1 Fine aggregate shall not contain strong alkali nor organic matter which gives a color darker than the standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. Fine aggregate shall have a fineness modulus not less than 2.50 nor greater than 3.00 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 125. Except as otherwise specified, fine aggregate shall be graded from coarse to fine in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 33. Aggregate soundness shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88. Aggregate shall comply with the reactivity requirements contained in ASTM C-33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C-289. 030122 COARSE AGGREGATE Coarse aggregate shall consist of gravel or crushed stone made up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcarious coatings, organic matter, or other foreign substances. Thin or elongated pieces having a length greater than five times the average thickness shall not exceed 15 percent by weight. Deleterious substances shall not be present in excess of the following per- centages by weight, and in no case shall the total of all deleterious substances exceed 2 percent. 1990 3A-6 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-A 0 Test Method Percent Soft fragments or par- ASTM C 851 2 ticles Shale or chert ASTM C 295 1 Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 1/4 Clay lumps and friable ASTM C 142 1/4 particles Materials finer than ASTM C 117 1/2 * No. 200 sieve Except that when material finer than No. 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, the maximum amount shall be 1 percent. Aggregate when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88 for soundness shall have a loss not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate. Abrasion loss of coarse aggregate shall not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. Coarse aggregate reactivity shall not exceed the limits specified in the appendix of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289. Except as otherwise specified or authorized in writing by the Engineer, coarse aggregate shall be graded as specified in ASTM C 33, Size No. 57. Coarse aggregate for Class CE concrete for encasement of electrical conduits shall be graded as specified in ASTM C 33, Size No. 8; concrete utilizing this aggregate will be equal to Class C concrete in all other respects, and will be designated as Class CE. 030150 WATER Water for concrete, washing aggregate, and curing concrete shall be clean and free from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other substances. Water shall not contain more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion for conventional reinforced concrete. Water for prestressed or post -tensioned concrete shall not contain more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion. 030160 PORTLAND CEMENT Except as otherwise specified all portland cement shall conform to the specifications and test for portland cement ASTM C 150, Types II or III, low alkali. Low alkali portland cement shall contain not more than 0.6 percent total alkali. The word "alkali" shall be taken to mean the sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as sodium oxide. The determination for total alkali shall be made by the method set forth in ASTM C 114. Only one brand of portland cement shall be used for exposed concrete in any individual structure. 1990 3A-7 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A 030162 TESTING AND PACKAGING Certified copies in triplicate of mill tests representative of each shipment of cement shall be furnished to the Engineer for verification of compliance with these Specifications. Mill tests on cement shall include a report on alkali content. 030180 ADMIXTURES - GENERAL Admixtures of any type, except as otherwise specified, shall not be used unless written authorization has been obtained from the Engineer. Admixtures used shall be compatible with the concrete and other admixtures. Admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in excess of 0.5 percent by weight shall not be used. Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be added separately to the concrete mix. 030181 AIR ENTRAINING ADMIXTURE All concrete shall contain 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, entrained air of evenly dispersed air bubbles at the time of placement. The air entraining agent shall contain no chlorides and shall conform to ASTM C 260. The air entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. The Contractor shall test the percent of air entrained in the concrete. The Contractor shall provide the test equipment. Concrete that does not meet the Specification requirements as to air entrainment shall not be used, and shall be removed from the job. The Contractor shall test the percent of entrained air in the concrete at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to keep the entrained air within the specified range, and when requested to do so by the Engineer. The Engineer may at any time test the percent of entrained air in the concrete received on the job. Air entrainment in the concrete shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 173. 030200 FORMS AND ACCESSORIES Forms shall be so constructed that the finished concrete will conform to the shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Plans. It is intended that the surface of the concrete after stripping shall present a smooth, hard, and dense finish that will require a minimum amount of finishing. Sufficient number of forms shall be provided so that the work may be prosecuted rapidly and present a uniform appearance in form patterns and finish. Forms shall be clean and free from all dirt, debris, concrete, etc. and shall be coated with an acceptable form oil if required, prior to use or reuse. The design of all concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and the design and installation of these items shall comply with all local, State, and Federal regulations. Information on the Contractor's proposed forming system shall be submitted in such detail as the Engineer may require to assure himself that the intent of the Specifications can be complied with by the use of the proposed system. 1990 3A-8 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-A 0 0 Except as otherwise specified, or accepted in writing by the Engineer, only forming systems by manufacturers with a minimum of five years' experience shall be considered. Vertical forms shall remain in place a minimum of 24 hours after the concrete is placed. If, after 24 hours, the concrete is sufficiently hardened to resist surface or other damage, the vertical forms may be removed. Other forms supporting concrete and shoring shall remain in place as follows: Sides of footings 24 hours (minimum) Slabs, beams, and girders 10 days (minimum) and until concrete strength reaches 85 percent of the specified strength Shoring for slabs, beams, and 10 days (minimum) and until concrete girders strength reaches 85 percent of the specified strength Wall bracing Until concrete strength of the slab laterally supporting the wall reaches 85 percent of the specified strength Forms shall not be removed from concrete which has been placed with outside ambient air temperature below 50 degrees F until the concrete has attained 85 percent of specified strength as determined by test cylinders stored in the field under equivalent conditions as the concrete structure. No heavy loading on green concrete (85 percent of specified strength) will be permitted. Immediately after forms are removed, the surface of the concrete shall be carefully examined, and any irregularities in the surface shall be repaired and finished as specified hereinafter. 030201 FORM TIES Form ties for the forming system selected shall be the cone -snap tie or flat bar type as manufactured by a recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. Forms shall be tied together at not less than 2 foot centers vertically and horizontally. Wire ties or wood spreaders of any form shall not be used. Ties shall be of a type that will accurately tie, lock, and spread the forms. Forms and ties shall be designed to withstand concrete pressures without bulging, spreading, or lifting of the forms. The form tie shall be of such design that when the forms are removed no metals shall be within 3/4 inch of any surface. Holes in the forms for ties shall not allow leakage during placement of concrete. 030202 BUILT-UP PLYWOOD FORMS Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for a prefabricated forming system subject to the following minimum requirements: full sized (4 foot by 8 foot) plywood sheets must be used except where smaller pieces will cover an entire area. Plywood sheets shall be 5 -ply, 3/4 inch, made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and the finish surface shall be coated or overlaid with a surface which is impervious to water and the alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement. Studding shall be not less than 2 inch by 4 inch lumber spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center. Closer spacing may be required 1990 3A-9 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 3-A depending upon the strength requirements of the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on the faces of finished concrete work. Studs shall be installed perpendicular to the grain of the exterior plys of the plywood sheets. Wales shall be formed of double 2 inch by 4 inch lumber as a minimum. Studding and wales shall contain no loose knots and shall be free of warps, cups, and bows. The number of reuses of forms will depend upon the durability of the surface coating or overlay used, and the Contractor's ability to maintain the forms in a condition which will produce a flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on the concrete when stripped. Alternate combinations of plywood thickness and stud spacing may be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance. 030204 INCIDENTALS Where not shown otherwise on the Plans and Typical Details, all external angles of walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and openings shall have a 3/4 inch bevel formed by utilizing a true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer strip and external angles of walkways, walls, and slabs at expansion, contraction, and construction joints shall be a 1/2 inch bevel formed by utilizing a true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer strip. Reentrant angles may be left square. Level strips shall be installed at the top of all wall concrete placements to maintain a true line at all horizontal construction joints. Pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts, as indicated on the Plans or as required, shall be encased in the concrete. Dovetail anchors or ties shall be used in conjunction with the slots or inserts for the various materials as specified under their respective sections and as may be necessary for the required work. 030205 BRACING AND ALIGNMENT OF FORMS It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to limit deviations in line and grade to tolerances which will permit proper installation of all structurally embedded items or mechanical and electrical equipment and piping. All formwork shall be securely braced, supported, tied down, or otherwise held in place to prevent any movement of formwork. Adequate provisions shall be made for uplift pressure, lateral bulging of forms, and deflection of forms for slabs and beams. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the form work at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new lift to prevent spreading, vertical or horizontal displacement of forms; and to prevent grout "bleeding" on finished concrete surfaces. Pipe stubs, anchor bolts, and other embedded items shall be set in the forms where required. Concrete beams or slabs shall not be placed directly on masonry walls so that any of the weight of the concrete either before or after the concrete has set is on the masonry wall, unless the masonry wall is identified on the Plans as bearing wall." 1990 3A-10 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A No concrete shall be placed until all forms have been thoroughly checked by the Contractor for alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical and electrical inserts or other embedded items. All cracks, openings, or offsets at joints in the formwork which are 1/16 inch or larger shall be closed by tightening the forms or by filling with an acceptable crack filler. 030206 TOLERANCES It is the intent that the finished concrete conforms to the shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions indicated on the Plans. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to comply with the intent of these Specifications, but it is also recognized that there will be occasions when some deviation will occur or be required. It shall therefore be agreed that the maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed the tolerances listed below at the time of acceptance of the project. A. In general all tolerances shall comply with AC1 117-81, paragraphs 2.0 through 2.2 and paragraphs 4.0 through 4.5, except as modified in the following. All slabs shall be uniformly sloped to drain when a slope is indicated. Slabs which are indicated to be level shall have a maximum deviation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade. B. On circular tank walls, the Contractor may deviate from the finish line indicated on the Plans by the use of chord lengths not to exceed 2 feet. C. All inserts shall be set to the tolerances required for the proper installation and operation of the equipment or systems to which the insert pertains. The following shall be considered maximum tolerances. Maximum Tolerance, Item inches Sleeves and inserts Projected ends of anchor bolts Anchor bolt setting 030300 REINFORCEMENT plus 1/8 minus 1/8 plus 1/4 minus 0.0 plus 1/16 minus 1/16 All reinforcing steel shall be new material, of the quality specified, free from excessive rust or scale or any defects affecting its usefulness. 030310 REINFORCING BARS Reinforcing bars to be embedded in concrete or masonry shall be Grade 60 deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615 and shall include the supplementary requirements. No field bending of bars will be allowed. All reinforcement bars lacking grade identification marks shall on delivery be accompanied by a manufacturer's guarantee of grade which will identify variations. All bars shall be new stock free from rust scale, loose mill scale, excessive rust, dirt, oil, and other coatings which adversely affect bonding capacity when placed in the work. A thin coating of red rust resulting from short 1990 3A-11 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A exposure will not be considered objectionable, but any bars having rust scale, loose mill scale, or a thick rust coat shall be thoroughly cleaned, or shall be rejected and removed from the premises upon order of the Engineer. Bars shall be delivered bundled and tagged with identifying tags. Bars shall be cut and bent in accordance with the provisions of ACI 315 and ACI 318. All bars shall be bent cold. Bars shall be free from defects and kinks and from bends not indicated on the Plans. Reinforcing bars shall be welded where indicated on the Plans or acceptable to the Engineer. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel." Shop drawings on reinforcing steel detailed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and returned. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a copy of all reinforcing steel detail drawings. Changes to the Contract Documents made by the Contractor in reinforcing steel shop drawings shall be called out in the letter of submittal. Such changes will not be acceptable unless the Engineer has expressed consent to such changes in writing. 030311 PLACING BAR REINFORCEMENT Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and adequately secured in position. Bars at splices shall overlap as specified or indicated on the Plans. If the lap splice length is not specified or indicated on the Plans, bars shall be lap spliced in accordance with ACI 318. Lap splices for masonry, if not specified or indicated on the Plans and not specified in DIVISION 4, shall be in accordance with the Uniform Building Code. Bar supports shall be galvanized steel, shall conform to ACI 315, and shall be furnished in sufficient number to prevent sagging and to support loads during construction, but in no case shall the quantities and locations of the supports be less than indicated in ACI 315. Bar supports, where used in slabs which will be exposed to view, shall be equipped with plastic tips. Reinforcing for concrete placed on the ground shall be supported by standard manufactured chairs, with steel plates for resting on the ground. No use shall be made of brick, broken concrete masonry units, spalls, rocks, or similar material for supporting reinforcing steel. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, reinforcement shall be placed so as to provide the thickness of protective concrete covering as indicated on the Typical Details. If not indicated on the Plans or Typical Details protective covering shall be in accordance with ACI 318. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance samples of all chairs he proposes to use along with a letter stating where each type chair will be used. No concrete shall be placed until this prior acceptance has been obtained. 030312 TYING BAR REINFORCEMENT Bars shall be fastened securely in place with annealed steel wire ties. Bars shall be tied sufficiently often to prevent shifting. There shall be at least three ties in each bar length (does not apply to dowel laps or to bars 1990 3A-12 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A R e shorter than 4 feet, unless necessary for rigidity). Slab bars shall be tied at every intersection around the periphery of the slab. Wall bars and slab bar intersections other than around the periphery shall be tied at not less than every fourth intersection, but at not greater than the following maximum spacings: Slab Bars, Wall Bars, inches inches Bars No. 5 and smaller 60 48 Bars No. 6 through No. 9 96 60 Bars No. 10 and No. 11 120 96 The above tying requirements do not apply to reinforcement for masonry. For masonry, vertical bars shall be held in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 192 -bar diameters. Where bars are to be lapped spliced at joints in the concrete, all bars shall project from the concrete first placed, a length equal to the lap splice length indicated on the Plans. Where the lap splice length is not indicated on the Plans, then the lap splice length shall be as specified in ACI -318 and this Division. All concrete or other deleterious coating shall be removed from dowels and other projecting bars by wire brushing or sandblasting before the bars are embedded in a subsequent concrete placement. The Plans and Typical Details contain general notes concerning amount of reinforcement and placing, details of reinforcement at wall corners and intersections, and details of extra reinforcement around openings in concrete. 030313 PROTECTION OF EXPOSED REBAR Any rebar which is exposed due to cutting of concrete shall be removed to a depth of 1-1/2 inch into face of concrete and the resulting hole shall be grouted flush with concrete face. 030400 MIXING CONCRETE Mixing equipment shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer. Mixers may be of the stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type. Adequate equipment and facilities shall be provided for accurate measurement and control of all materials and for readily changing the proportions of the material. The mixing equipment shall be capable of combining the aggregates, cement, and water within the specified time into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the mixture without segregation. Concrete mixing plant and equipment shall be maintained in good working order and shall be operated at the loads, speeds, and timing recommended by the manufacturer or as specified. The cement and aggregate shall be proportioned by weight. 1990 3266B.10 Div. 3-A 3A-13 W3266B.10 030410 MACHINE MIXING The batch plant shall be capable of controlling the delivery of all material to within 1 percent by weight of the individual material. If bulk cement is used, it shall be weighed on a separate visible scale which will accurately register the scale load at any stage of the weighing operation from zero to full capacity. Cement shall not come in contact with aggregate or with water until the materials are in the mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing water. The procedure of mixing cement with sand or with sand and coarse aggregate for delivery to the jobsite for final mixing and addition of mixing water will not be permitted. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. The entire batch shall be discharged before recharging. The volume of the mixed material per batch shall not exceed the manufacturer's rated capacity of the mixer. Mixing shall be done in batch mixers of acceptable type. Each mixer shall be equipped with a device for accurately measuring and indicating the quantity of water entering the concrete, and the operating mechanism shall be such that leakage will not occur when the valves are closed. Each mixer shall be equipped with a device for automatically measuring, indicating, and controlling the time required for mixing. This device shall be interlocked to prevent the discharge of concrete from the mixer before the expiration of the mixing period. Transit -mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with ASTM C 94. The total elapsed time between the addition of water at the batch plant and discharging the completed mix shall not exceed 90 minutes nor shall the elapsed time at the jobsite exceed 30 minutes. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, the total elapsed time permitted may be reduced by the Engineer. Each truck mixer shall be equipped with a device for counting the number of revolutions of the drum which device shall be interlocked so as to prevent the discharge of concrete from the drum before the required number of turns. After the drum is once started, it shall be revolved continuously until it has completely discharged its batch. Water shall not be admitted to the mix until the drum has started revolving. The right is reserved to increase the required minimum number of revolutions or to decrease the designated maximum number of revolutions allowed, if necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing, and the Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation because of such increase or decrease. In the case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows. The concrete shall be mixed until there is uniform distribution of the materials, and the mixer shall be discharged completely before being recharged. Neither speed nor volume loading of the mixer shall exceed the manufacturer's recommendations. Mixing shall be continued for a minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum, and for batches larger than 1 cubic yard the minimum mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. 030500 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent the separation or loss of the materials. 1990 3A-14 W32668.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A 030520 PLACING AND CONSOLIDATION PA No concrete shall be placed without the prior authorization of the Engineer. 0 A 0 0 Concrete shall not be placed until all reinforcement is securely and properly fastened in its correct position and loose form ties at construction joints have been retightened, nor until all dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, bolts, and any other fixtures required to be embedded therein have been placed and adequately anchored, nor until the forms have been cleaned and oiled as specified. Placement of concrete in which initial set has occurred or of retempered concrete will not be permitted. No concrete shall be placed during rainstorms or high velocity winds. Concrete placed immediately before rain shall be protected to prevent the water from coming in contact with it or winds causing excessive drying. Sufficient protective covering shall be kept on hand at all times for protection purposes. 030521 PLACING CONCRETE The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review, a proposed sequence of placing concrete showing proposed beginning and ending of individual placements. After acceptance, this sequence shall be adhered to except when specific changes are requested by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer by written memorandum of his readiness (not just his intention) to place concrete in any portion of the work. This notification shall be such time in advance of the operation as the Engineer deems necessary for him to make final inspection of the preparations at the location of the proposed concrete placing. All forms, steel, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts shall be in place before the Contractor's notification of readiness is given to the Engineer. Concrete shall be deposited at or near its final position to avoid segregation caused by rehandling or flowing. Concrete shall not be deposited in large quantities in one place and worked along the forms with the vibrator or otherwise. No concrete shall be dropped freely into place from a greater height than 5 feet. Tremies shall be used for placing concrete where the drop is over 5 feet. Placement of concrete on slopes shall commence at the bottom of the slope. Concrete shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24 inches in depth and shall be brought up evenly in all parts of the forms. Concrete placement shall continue without avoidable interruption, in a continuous operation, until the end of the placement is reached. The placement of concrete in wall forms shall not proceed at a faster rate of rise than 6 feet per hour when the temperature is 70 degrees F or over, and at a lesser rate for lower temperatures. If it takes more than 20 minutes lapse prior to placement of new concrete over concrete previously placed, the depth of the layers being placed at one time shall be reduced, and/or placing equipment increased, until it is possible to return with the placing operation to previously placed concrete 1990 3A-15 W3266B.10 41 326613.10 Div. 3-A within 20 minutes. If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than 20 minutes have elapsed, then a layer of grout not less than 1/2 inch thick nor more than 1 inch in thickness shall be spread over the surface before placing the additional concrete. The placement of concrete for slabs, beams, or walkways cast monolithically with walls or columns shall not commence until the concrete in the walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink. The time allowed for shrinkage shall be not less than one hour. 030522 CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE Concrete shall be placed with the aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators. Vibration shall be supplemented by manual forking or spading adjacent to the forms on exposed faces in order to secure smooth dense surfaces. The concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes built into the work. The vibration shall be sufficiently intense to cause the concrete to flow and settle readily into place and to visibly affect the concrete over a radius of at least 18 inches. Sufficient vibrators shall be on hand at all times to vibrate the concrete as placed. In addition to the vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, the Contractor shall have on hand one spare vibrator in serviceable condition. No concrete shall be placed until it has been ascertained that all vibrating equipment, including spares, is in serviceable condition. Special care shall be taken to place the concrete solidly against the forms so as to leave no voids. Every precaution shall be taken to make all concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if for any reason the surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, such concrete shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. 030523 REQUIREMENTS DUE TO EXTREME WEATHER CONDITIONS For concrete placed when the ambient air temperature is above 90 degrees F, the forms and reinforcing steel shall be cooled to below 90 degrees F by water spraying. The temperature of the concrete mix at time of placement shall be kept below 90 degrees F by means possible which do not impair the quality of the concrete. The Contractor shall secure the Engineer's acceptance for type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new concrete in the process of curing during excessively cold weather. For concrete placed below an ambient air temperature of 40 degrees F, or 45 degrees F and falling, provision shall be made for heating the water. If materials have been exposed to freezing temperatures to the degree that any material is below 35 degrees F, the material shall be heated. Water, cement, or aggregate materials shall not be heated in excess of 160 degrees F. Concrete in the forms shall be protected by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other acceptable covering, and a means shall be provided for circulating warm moist air around the forms to maintain a temperature of 50 degrees F for at least five days. 1990 3A-16 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A For conditions which promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low humidity, high temperature, and wind, the Contractor shall take corrective measures to minimize the rapid water loss from the concrete. The Contractor shall submit the corrective measures he plans to use for review and acceptance by the Engineer prior to placing concrete. The Contractor shall provide and use a sufficient number of maximum and minimum self -recording thermometers to adequately indicate the temperature around the concrete. 030524 FOOTINGS AND SLABS ON GRADE Concrete to be placed on ground or compacted fill shall not be placed until the subgrade is in a moist condition acceptable to the Engineer. If necessary, the subgrade shall be well sprinkled with water not less than 6 nor more than 20 hours in advance of placing concrete. If it becomes dry prior to the actual placing of concrete, it shall be sprinkled again, without forming pools of water. No concrete shall be placed if the subgrade is muddy or soft. 030525 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE All defective work shall be removed and replaced or repaired. Any work which has not been constructed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications shall be considered defective. Correction of defective work shall be as specified herein. No defective work shall be patched, repaired, or covered without inspection by the Engineer. Repair shall have a strength equal or greater than the specified concrete for the area. The Contractor shall provide a mix design for the grout which is proposed for use to the Engineer for review and acceptance. All imperfections in the work shall be chipped out and keyed ready for repair. The dry pack method shall be used for holes having a depth nearly equal to or greater than the least surface dimension of the hole, for cone -bolt, and narrow slots cut for repair. Smooth holes shall be roughened with a rotohammer before repair. The mortar method of replacement shall be used for holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete replacement and shall be used for comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no deeper than the reinforcement nearest the surface. Concrete replacement shall be used when holes extend entirely through the concrete section or when holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfway through the section. All surfaces of the set concrete to be repaired shall first be coated with epoxy bonding agent, Adhesive Engineering Concressive No. 1001 LPL; Sika Chemical Corporation, Sikadur Hi -Mod; or equal. No repair shall be made until the Engineer has accepted the method of preparing the surface and proposed method of repair. The color of the repair concrete dry pack and grout shall match that of the adjoining concrete. The use of white cement may be required to match color. The Contractor shall prepare test panels for proposed repairs at the beginning of the project for review and approval by the Engineer. This panel will serve as a standard for repairs during the project. Curing of all repaired concrete shall be the same as specified for concrete. 1990 3A-17 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-A 030600 CURING CONCRETE - GENERAL All concrete shall be cured by the methods specified herein. All concrete shall be cured a minimum of seven days. All concrete that is to be painted shall be water or plastic membrane cured. No curing compound shall be used on any concrete surface that is to receive paint or upon which any material is to be bonded. All other concrete shall be cured by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the Contractor's option, except floors and slabs which are specified to be sealed with a concrete sealer. Floor slabs may be cured using a plastic film membrane curing. 030601 WATER CURING All surfaces of concrete being water cured shall be kept constantly and visibly moist day and night for a period of not less than seven days and nights. Each day the forms remain in place may count as one day of water curing. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has once been broken between the concrete surface and the forms. Ties shall not be loosened during the period when concrete is being cured by leaving the forms in place. The top of walls shall be flooded with water at least three times per day, and the concrete surface shall be kept moist at all times during the seven day curing period. 030602 SPRAYED MEMBRANE CURING Membrane curing compound shall be a clear type with fugitive dye conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1D. The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete surface after repairing and patching, and within one hour after the forms are removed. If more than one hour elapses after the removal of the forms, membrane compound shall not be used and water curing shall be applied for the full curing period. If the surface requires repairing or painting, the concrete shall be water cured. Curing compound shall not be removed from the concrete in less than seven days. Curing compound may be removed by the Contractor only upon written request by the Contractor and acceptance by the Engineer, stating what measures the Contractor shall take to adequately cure the structure. Care shall be taken to apply curing compound in the area of construction joints to see that curing compound is placed within the construction joint silhouette. The curing compound placed within the construction joint silhouette shall be removed by sandblasting prior to placing any new concrete. The Contractor has the option of water curing the construction joint. Any curing compound shall be removed through heavy sandblasting of the joint. Curing compound shall be applied by a mechanical, power operated spray and mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and compound. The compound shall be applied in at least two coats. Each coat shall be applied in a direction opposite to the preceding coat. The compound shall be applied in sufficient quantity so that the surface will have a uniform appearance and 1990 3A-18 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-A will effectively and completely conceal all natural color of the concrete at the time of the spraying. The Contractor shall continue to coat and recoat the surface until the specified coverage is achieved and until a coating film remains on the surface of the concrete. The thickness and coverage of the compound shall be such that the film can be scraped from the surface at any and all points after drying for at least 24 hours. The Contractor is cautioned that the method of applying curing compound specified herein may require more compound than normally suggested by the manufacturer of the compound and also more than is customary in the trade. The amounts specified herein shall be applied, regardless of manufacturer's recommendations or customary practice, if the Contractor elects to use curing compound in place of water curing. If the Contractor desires to use a curing compound other than the specified compound, the Contractor shall coat sample areas of concrete wall with the proposed compound and also a similar adjacent area with the specified compound in the specified manner for comparison. Complete data on the proposed compound shall also be submitted for review. If the proposed sample is not equal or better, in the opinion of the Engineer, in all features, the proposed substitution will not be allowed. Prior to final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall remove, by sandblasting or other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces that will be exposed to view, so that only the natural color of the finished concrete will be visible uniformly over the entire surface. 030603 PLASTIC MEMBRANE CURING Polyethelene film may be used to cure slabs, and shall be sealed at joints and edges with a small sand berm. The plastic membrane shall be installed as soon as the concrete is finished and can be walked on without damage. The concrete shall be kept moist under the plastic membrane. 030610 CONCRETE FINISHING 030610.01 FINISHING Concrete surfaces shall be finished as indicated on the Plans and Typical Details. Where not specified or indicated on the Plans, the surfaces shall be finished as follows: Concrete surfaces which are specified or indicated to be painted, and all concrete surfaces, interior or exterior, exposed to view shall have fins removed and joints ground smooth, and shall be "sacked" with cement mortar so that all pits and holes are filled. Surfaces in open channels, basins, and similar structures, which are normally below the water surface shall have fins removed, but need not have joints ground. However, surfaces in such locations which are above the normal water surface and exposed to view shall have fins removed and joints ground smooth, and shall be "sacked" with cement mortar so that all pits and holes are filled. Concrete surfaces in closed boxes or channels where there is normally no access or passageway shall have the fins removed. All form ties shall be removed from all surfaces, and holes shall be filled after roughening with a rotohammer. 1990 3A-19 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-A The following surfaces shall receive a smooth steel trowel finish: Floors and slabs. The final steel trowel finish shall be uniformly smooth and free of all irregularities. Building and machine room floors which are not to be covered with surfacing material shall be free from trowel marks. Trowel marks will be permitted in other locations. Concrete floor surfaces to which a surfacing material is to be applied shall be finished level and smooth with a tolerance of not over 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. Edges of all control joints shall be as indicated on the Plans and Typical Details. Edges shall include any line where placement is stopped. All wall and slab surfaces at edges shall be protected against concrete spatter and shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of each placement. 030700 CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT Cement mortar or grout for the repair of imperfect concrete work, filling of holes left by form bolts or ties, and the filling of voids around items through the concrete, and grout for spreading over construction joints and cold joints etc., shall consist of portland cement and sand mixed in the same proportions used for the concrete being repaired, with only sufficient water to give the required consistency. Essentially, this would consist of the concrete mix with the coarse aggregate removed and water quantity required. In no case shall the water -cement ratio be more than that specified for the concrete being repaired. In the case of mortar being used for patching or repairing exposed concrete surfaces which are not to be painted or which will not be submerged in water, sufficient white cement shall be used to make the color of the finished patch match that of the surrounding concrete. Bolt and tie holes shall be roughened with a rotohammer filled with dry -pack mortar, well tamped into the holes. For dry -pack mortar, only enough water shall be used so that the resulting mortar will crumble to the touch after being balled." Concrete surfaces shall be roughened with a rotohammer, cleaned, and thoroughly damp before grout or mortar is placed, or, where indicated on the Plans or specified, an epoxy bonding agent, such as Concressive No. 1001 LPL as manufactured by Adhesive Engineering Company, Sikadur Hi -Mod as manufactured by the Sika Chemical Corporation, or equal, shall be applied to the clean, roughened, dry surface before placing the mortar or grout. Grout for spreading over the surfaces of construction joints or cold joints shall consist of sand and cement with no more water used than allowed by the water -cement ratio specified for the concrete. Particular care shall be exercised in placing cement mortar or grout since it will be expected to furnish structural strength or an impermeable water seal or both. Cement mortar or grout that has not been placed within 30 minutes after mixing shall not be used. Grout for which the mix is not otherwise specified shall be mixed in the proportions by volume of one part cement to four parts of concrete sand. 1990 3A-20 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 3-A 030710 NONSHRINK GROUT Nonshrink grout shall be made with a hydraulic cement, which when mixed with water will harden rapidly to produce a permanent high strength material suitable for exterior use. Nonshrink grout shall be nonmetallic and shall not contain calcium chloride or other chemicals which accelerate the corrosion of embedded steel. The grout shall show no shrinkage prior to initial setting in accordance with ASTM C 827 and shall show no shrinkage in the hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C 157 and Corps of Engineers CRD C-621. Nonshrink grout shall be Five Star Grout manufactured by U.S. Grout Corporation, Masterflow 713 Grout manufactured by Master Builders, or equal. When mixed in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, the nonshrink grout shall be semi -fluid and suitable for placing by pouring into place when mixed to a flowable consistency. The compressive strength tested in accordance with ASTM C 109 shall be not less than 3,000 psi at 1 day and not less than 6,000 psi at 28 days. Setting time tested in accordance with ASTM C 191 shall be not less than 30 minutes. 1990 3A-21. W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 3-A i e w 31000 GENERAL 1 0 1, DIVISION 3 CONCRETE SECTION 3-B CONCRETE SEALING/WATERPROOFING This specification covers the requirements relating to waterproofing treatment of concrete structures, both above and below grade as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. No more than seven (7) working days can be allowed between taking a vault to be worked on out of service and putting the converted vault back in service. Manufacturer's written recommendations for the application of and compatibility with the proposed project shall be obtained for review by the Engineer before commencing work. 31100 MATERIALS All concrete sealing/waterproofing materials shall be of the cementitious crystalline type that chemically controls and permanently fixes non-soluable crystalline growth throughout the capillary voids of the concrete. The sealing/waterproofing material shall be as manufactured by Xypex Chemical Corporation, Richmond, B.C., Canada, or approved equal. 31200 STORAGE OF MATERIALS All materials shall be stored in original undamaged containers with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Materials shall be stored off the ground in a dry enclosed area. 31300 SURFACE PREPARATION 31301 GENERAL All surfaces to be sealed/waterproofed shall be examined for form tie holes and structural defects such as honeycombing, rock pockets, faulty construction joints, cracks, etc. These areas shall be repaired as herein specified. 31302 CONCRETE FINISH Concrete surfaces shall have an open capillary system to provide tooth and suction and shall be clean; free from scale, excess oils or grease, laitance, curing compound or any other foreign matter. Smooth surfaces or surfaces covered with excess oil, grease or other contaminants shall be washed, lightly sandblasted, waterblasted or acid -etched with muriatic acid as required to provide a clean absorbent surface. Horizontal surfaces on new construction shall not be trowelled or power trowelled, and shall be left with a rough float finish or (preferably) a broom finish. If power trowelling is required it shall be kept to a minimum. Vertical surfaces may have a sacked finish. Coating should not be attempted on horizontal concrete deck surfaces less than 20 hours old. 1990 3B-1 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 3-B 31303 SURFACE MOISTURE Coating shall be applied to "green" concrete as soon as possible after forms have been stripped, or to existing concrete which has been thoroughly saturated with clean water. Surfaces to be treated shall be moistened prior to application, as required to insure proper migration of crystalline chemicals into the capillary voids in the concrete. Free water shall be removed prior to treatment. 31400 MIXING MATERIAL Materials shall be mixed with clean water in quantities recommended by the manufacturer. Materials shall be mixed in quantities which can be applied within 20-30 minutes from the time of mixing. As mixture thickens it shall be stirred frequently, but no additional water shall be added. 31401 MIXING FOR BRUSH APPLICATION Quantities of clean water and material shall be measured and mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Water shall be measured and mixed into the powder with a paddle on a slow speed electric drill, (250 RPM) or other type of mixer which will insure adequate mixing. Mixing proportions shall be as follows: Coverage Proportions by volume) 1.5 lbs./sq. yd. 5 powder to 2 water 2.0 lbs./sq. yd. 3 powder to 1 water 31402 MIXING FOR SPRAY APPLICATION Mixing shall be as described above however proportions shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the proportions specified. 31404 MIXING FOR DRY -PAC Proportions shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Mixing shall be accomplished using a trowel for 10 to 15 seconds. Lumps should be present in the mixture. Mix only enough which can be applied in 15 minutes. 31500 APPLICATION Application of all materials shall be done by or under the direction of a manufacturer's representative, or a person who is thoroughly experienced in installation of cementitious waterproofing materials. Experience information shall be provided to the Engineer upon request. 31501 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Sealing/waterproofing material in slurry form shall be applied at the rate of 2.0 lbs./sq. yd. to all joint surfaces between pours. Care shall be taken to see that surfaces are properly moistened prior to application of slurry. 1990 3B-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-8 Where joint surfaces are not accessible prior to pouring new concrete, the slurry shall be applied to the joint surfaces prior to erection of formwork. Where it is impossible, because of formwork, to coat the joint surfaces with a slurry, material in dry powder form shall be poured at the rate of 2.0 lbs./sq. yd. onto the moistened joint surface before the next pour. The powder should be fog -sprayed lightly with clean water to prevent bunching of the powder during pouring of the concrete. 31600 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS 31601 FORM TIE HOLES, FAULTY CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, CRACKS, ETC. Chip defective areas in a "U" shaped slot 3/4 -inch to 1 -inch wide and a minimum of 1 -inch deep. Clean slot thoroughly. Wet well with water and remove all surface water. Apply a slurry coat of sealing/waterproofing material at the rate of 1.5 lbs./sq. yd. to the slot. Allow the slurry to reach an initial set, then fill cavity with dry-pac. Compress very tightly into cavity using pneumatic packer or hammer and block. Packing pneumatically is superior to hand packing. 31602 ROCK POCKETS, HONEYCOMBING OR OTHER DEFECTIVE CONCRETE Rout out defective areas to good concrete. Remove all loose material and saturate well with water. Remove surface water and apply one slurry coat at 1.5 lb/sq.yd. After the slurry has set, but while still "green", fill cavity to surface with "patch and plug" material supplied/recommended by manufacturer of sealing/waterproofing material for use with his product. 31700 SURFACE APPLICATION After all repairs and patching has been prepared and completed in accordance with the proceeding, the concrete surfaces to be treated shall have a sealing/waterproofing slurry applied at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the concrete to be treated. 31701 BRUSHING A semi -stiff short bristle brush or broom shall be used to work the slurry well into the surface of the concrete, filling all hairline cracks or surface pores. 31702 SECOND COAT Manufacturer's recommended second coat shall be applied while the first cost is still "green" but after is has reached initial set. Light pre -watering may be necessary when rapid drying conditions occur. 31800 CURING Curing shall begin as soon as sealing/waterproofing materials have set up sufficiently so as not to be damaged by a fine spray. Treated surfaces shall be fog -sprayed three times a day for a two day period, or may be covered with damp burlap for the prescribed period. Plastic sheeting may not be laid directly on the coating as air contact is required to cure correctly. If 1990 3B-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 3-B there is poor air circulation such as in small enclosed wet wells, fans or blown air may be required to aid the curing process. Manufacturer's representative should be consulted regarding the need for blown air to aid in curing. Treated surfaces shall be protected from damage due to wind, sun, rain, and temperatures below 36 degrees F for a period of not less than 48 hours after application. If plastic sheeting is to be used as protection, it must be raised to allow the coating to breath. Additives may be used to enhance curing pending manufacturer's recommendation and Engineer approval. Following initial two day cure time the coating shall be "capped" with "patch and plug" compound manufactured by same company as the sealing/waterproofing compound. The "capping" material shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for this application and contain only admixtures recommended by the manufacturer. The "capped" material shall then be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours. Upon approval by the manufacturer's representative the system can then be brought back in service. 1990 3B-4. W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 3-3 DIVISION 4 NOT USED) 1990 4-1. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 4 i i A DIVISION 5 METALS 050100 STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS 050110 GENERAL This part of the Specifications includes but is not limited to the following items: Aluminum and miscellaneous nonferrous metals Anchor bolts Bolts Cast Iron Frames and Covers Manhole Frames and Covers Metal fasteners and welding Miscellaneous aluminum Miscellaneous cast iron Miscellaneous other metal items Miscellaneous structural steel Pipe handrails, pipe sleeves, inserts, and gates Structural steel 050120 MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans or typical details, structural and miscellaneous metals shall conform to the standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), including, but not limited to, the following: Item Cast Iron Cast Iron Steel Galvanized sheet iron or steel ASTM Class, Grade, Standard Type or Alloy No. No. A 48 Class 40B A 446 A 525 A 526 Black steel, sheet or strip A 569 A 570 Coil (plate) A 635 Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, and miscellaneous items A 36 Coating G90 1990 5-1 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 5 Item Standard bolts, nuts, and washers ASTM Standard No. A 307 A 325 High strength bolts, nuts, and hardened flat washers A 325 A 490 Tubing, cold -formed Tubing, hot -formed Steel pipe Stainless steel A 500 A 501 A 53 Plate, sheet and strip A 167 Bars and shapes A 276 Aluminum Sheet aluminum -flashing Sheet aluminum -structural Structural aluminum Extruded aluminum B 209 B 209 B 308 B 209 B 221 Class, Grade, Type or Alloy No. Grade B Type 304 or 316 Type 304 or 316 Alloy 5005- H14, 0.032 inches min. thickness Alloy 6061-T6 Alloy 6061-T6 Alloy 6063-T42 Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by AISI. 050130 FABRICATION AND ERECTION Fabrication and erection of steel items shall conform to AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings wherever applicable, except as the same may be modified by applicable building codes and these Specifications. Where anchors, connections or other details of miscellaneous metalwork are not definitely indicated on the Plans,or specified in the Specifications, their material, size, form, attachment, and location shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified herein. The Contractor shall take all measurements necessary to properly fit his work in the field, and he shall be governed by and be responsible for these measurements and the proper working out of all details. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all metalwork in the field. Sharp or hazardous projections shall be rounded off and ground smooth. The Contractor shall paint steel and miscellaneous ferrous metal items in accordance with DIVISION 9 of these Specifications. Where aluminum comes in contact with dissimilar metals, except stainless steel, it shall be bolted with stainless steel bolts and separated or isolated from the dissimilar metals, with neoprene gaskets, sleeves, and 1990 5-2 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 5 0 0 0 A 0 washers. Those parts of aluminum which will be cast into concrete or which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or wood shall be coated as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. The threads of stainless steel bolts shall be coated, prior to installing the nut, with Never-Seez manufactured by Never Seez Compound Corp., WLR No. 111 manufactured by Oil Research Inc., or equal. 050500 METAL FASTENING Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or specified, metal fastening shall be as follows. 050510 BOLTING A. Bolts, except high strength bolts, shall be provided with flat washers and self-locking nuts, or lock washers and nuts. 1. Bolt heads and nuts shall be hex -type. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be of domestic manufacture. B. Bolts, including anchor bolts, nuts, washers and similar fasteners specified to be galvanized, shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. C. After installation, bolts, including anchor bolts and concrete anchors, shall project a minimum of two threads but not more than 1/2 -inch beyond the nut. D. Unless otherwise specified, bolts, including anchor bolts and concrete anchors, shall be tightened to the snug -tight condition. The snug -tight condition shall be defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. 050512 ASSEMBLY BOLTS Bolts, nuts, and washers for wood baffles, collectors, and other field assembled construction shall be as follows: A. Type 316 stainless steel in wet and moist locations, including: 1. For water containing structures, a. Below and at water level. b. Above water level, 1) Below top of walls of water containing structures. 2) Under the roof of enclosed water containing structures. 1990 5-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 5 2. Dry side of walls of water containing structures. 3. Pump bases. B. Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel for aluminum assemblies. C. Hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 307 steel for galvanized assemblies and for applications other than those specified hereinbefore. 050520 FASTENERS FOR USE IN CONCRETE Fasteners for use in concrete shall be as specified hereinafter. "Slug -in," lead cinch, and similar systems relying on the deformation of lead alloy or similar materials in order to develop holding power shall not be used. 050521 ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts shall be cast in place when concrete is placed, wherever feasible. Anchor bolts embedded in concrete shall be accurately located and with bolts perpendicular to the surface from which they project. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be as follows: A. Type 316 stainless steel in wet and moist locations, including: 1. For water containing structures, a. Below and at water level. b. Above water level, 1) Below top of walls of water containing structures. 2) Under the roof of enclosed water containing structures. c. Dry side of walls of water containing structures. d. Pump bases. B. Type 316 stainless steel for fastening aluminum to concrete or steel. C. Stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 307 steel, or hot -dip galvanized ASTM A 36 steel, at the option of Contractor, for applications other than those specified hereinbefore. Anchor bolts shall not touch reinforcing steel. Where anchor bolts are within 1/4 -inch of reinforcing steel, anchor bolts shall be insulated with not less than four wraps of 10 -mil PVC tape in the area adjacent to the reinforcing steel. In anchoring machinery bases subject to heavy vibration, two nuts shall be used, one serving as a locknut. Bolts, when indicated on the Plans for future use, shall be first coated thoroughly with nonoxidizing wax, followed by turning nuts down to the full depth of thread. Exposed thread shall then be neatly wrapped with a waterproof polyvinyl tape. 1990 5-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 5 0 0 Anchor bolts shall be embedded not less than 10 diameters and shall have a standard hex bolt head or a 90 degree hook not less than 4 diameters in length. Where indicated on the Plans, anchor bolts shall be set in metal sleeves having an inside diameter approximately 2 inches greater than the bolt diameter and not less than 12 bolt diameters in length. Sleeves shall be filled with grout when the machine or other equipment is grouted in place. 050522 CONCRETE ANCHORS Concrete anchors shall mean drilled in place anchors with integral threaded studs. Concrete anchors shall not be used in lieu of anchor bolts. Concrete anchors shall be manufactured by ITT -Phillips Red Head, "Wedge Anchors"; Wej-It" Corporation, "Wej-It" concrete anchors; or equal. The material of each concrete anchor, including its integral threaded stud, wedge washer, and nut, shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Concrete anchors shall have the following minimum embedment lengths: Diameter Embedment Length Inches Inches 1/4 1-3/4 3/8 1-7/8 1/2 2-1/4 5/8 2-3/4 3/4 3-1/4 Anchor bolts may be cast in the concrete in lieu of using concrete anchors. Concrete anchors shall be accurately located and set perpendicular to the surfaces from which they project. 050800 WELDING Welding of structural metals shall be done by welders who have a current American Welding Society (AWS) certificate for the type of welding to be done by the welder. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 1 working day before starting shop or field welding. The Engineer may check the materials, the equipment, and the qualifications of the welders. Welders doing unsatisfactory work shall be removed from the Work, or may be required to requalify. The Engineer may use gamma ray, magnetic particle, dye penetrant, trepanning, or any other aid to visual inspection which he may deem necessary on any part or all welds to examine the welds. The cost of retests on defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor. Cost in connection with qualifying welders shall also be borne by the Contractor. Welds shall be full penetration welds unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 1990 5-5 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 5 050830 WELDING STAINLESS STEEL The general requirements of AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel, shall apply to the welding of stainless steel. Welding of stainless steel shall be done with electrodes and techniques recommended in "Welded Austenitic Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel - Techniques and Properties" distributed by the Nickel Development Institute, Toronto, Canada, and in accordance with AWS D 10.4 Recommended Practice for Welding Austenitic Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing. 050850 WELDING STEEL Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D 1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. Welding of ASTM A 36 structural steel, ASTM A 500 and A 501 structural tubing, and ASTM A 53 pipe shall be with electrodes conforming to AWS A 5.1 Specification for Carbon Steel Covered Arc Welding Electrodes, using E70XX electrodes; AWS A 5.17 Specifications for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding, using F7X-EXXX electrodes; or AWS A 5.20 Specifications for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding, using E7XT-X electrodes. 051000 STRUCTURAL METAL Structural or foundry items shall be carefully fabricated to true dimensions without warp or twist. Welded closures shall be neatly made; and where weld material interferes with fit or is unsightly in appearance, it shall be ground off smooth. Structural items shall be installed accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in correct alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting the structure or equipment for which intended. Cocking out of alignment, redrilling, reshaping, or forcing to fit fabricated items will not be permitted. Contractor shall place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and shall make surfaces which bear against structural items smooth and true to level to preclude the necessity of springing, redrilling, or reshaping. Structural items needing a special alignment to preserve straight, level, even, smooth lines shall be rigidly supported and braced and kept braced until concrete, grout, or dry pack mortar has hardened for a period of not less than 48 hours. The Contractor shall submit certified copies of mill tests or reports from a recognized commercial laboratory including chemical, tensile, and bending properties of each shipment of structural metal or part thereof having common properties. Tests and analyses shall be made in accordance with the applicable ASTM Standards. 051400 STRUCTURAL STEEL Structural steel shall be delivered free from mill scale, rust, or pitting. Items not galvanized or protected by a shop coat of paint shall be protected from the weather until erection and painting. Contractor shall provide 1990 5-6 W3266B.10 72668.10 Div. 5 supplementary parts required for a complete structural steel erection even where such supplementary parts and work are not specified in detail in the Specifications or indicated on the Plans. 056000 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 056100 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM Structural and other metal items fabricated from aluminum, not covered separately herein shall be fabricated in accordance with the best practices of the trade and shall be field assembled by riveting or bolting with no welding or flame cutting permitted. 056200 MISCELLANEOUS CAST IRON Castings shall be tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts. The quality shall be such that a blow from a hammer will produce an indentation on a rectangular edge of the casting without flaking the metal. Before leaving the foundry, castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall receive a 16 -mil dry film thickness (DFT) coating of coal -tar epoxy unless otherwise specified in the Specifications or indicated on the Plans. 056210 MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be gray iron castings, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 30-B. Frames and covers shall have horizontal and vertical bearing surfaces machined to fit neatly, and the cover shall bear firmly in the frame without rocking and shall be easily removable. Frames and covers shall be heavy duty traffic type and shall have a combined set weight of not less than 265 pounds. Frames and covers shall be delivered to the site unpainted. Unless otherwise indicated bn the Plans, frames shall have a clear inside opening of 24 inches diameter and shall be of the bottom flange type. Frame height shall be approximately 4-1/2 inches and bottom flange outside diameter shall be approximately 32 inches. Covers shall have a skid resistant grid pattern design and shall be stamped with the name of the utility service provided by the manhole, such as ELECTRICAL", "SEWER", "TELEPHONE", or "WATER". Covers shall be solid type without ventilation holes. Manhole covers shall be set flush with paving. If no paving exists, the cast iron manhole cover shall be set 6 inches above the surrounding grade. 056220 PREFORMED ROOFING Preformed roofing panel systems shall have been pretested and certified by the manufacturer to provide specified resistance to air and water infiltration and structural deflection and failure when installed as indicated and when tested in accordance with AAMA 501, "METHODS OF TEST FOR METAL CURTAIN WALLS." The supplied panels shall comply with the following performance requirements based on pretesting of installed panels. 1990 5-7 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 5 Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283 Water Penetration: ASTM E 331 The Contractor shall submit for approval: 1. Shop drawings showing the layout of panels on roof and details of special and typical conditions. 2. Samples of each exposed finish material and ice and water shield. 3. Certification by manufacturer that products have been pretested and comply with performance requirements indicated. Color - The preformed roofing panels shall be brown. Steel for painting/coating shall be hot -dip zinc coated steel sheet, ASTM A446, Grade A, G90 zinc coating, surface treated for maximum coating performance. Preformed roofing panels shall be as manufactured by E.C.I. Building Components, Inc., T.R.I. Series Roofing Panel # TR102, 18 inches wide. Panels shall be continuous without end splices, joints or overlaps. Fasteners shall be manufacturer's standard, with heads gasketed where exposed on exterior. 1990 5-8. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 5 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 060000 GENERAL The carpentry work, materials, and accessories shall be as indicated on the Plans and as described in these Specifications. Carpentry work, where not indicated or specified in detail, shall be in accordance with normal good practice and applicable requirements of the Uniform Building Code and local codes. Notching, coping, and mitering of meeting members shall be done in such a manner that the meeting members shall have full bearing and without overcutting or undercutting. Unless otherwise specified, lumber shall be seasoned or kiln -dried and shall contain not more than the moisture hereinafter specified. Where nailing is not specified, Table 25-P of the Uniform Building Code shall be followed. Box nails shall not be used. Bolts and other fastenings shall be as indicated on the Plans, or if not so indicated, shall be in accordance with the Uniform Building Code. All nails and fastenings which are exposed to the weather or on the exterior of buildings shall be hot -dip galvanized or Series 300 stainless steel. The Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements, locations and elevations, fitting of all work, and accommodation of other trades. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall compare all drawings and report any discrepancies to the Engineer for clarification or adjustment. Materials shall be covered to protect from damage and moisture. Lumber shall be stacked to permit good air drying with separators at each layer and between soil and the first layer. 060100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Rough carpentry shall essentially refer to carpentry work and materials that are not normally exposed to view and shall include all necessary metal items and connectors related to installation and erection as specified herein and shown on the Plans. Lumber grades shall be in accordance with the following reference standards: A. Douglas Fir and Hemlock: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB), Standard Grading and Dressing Rule No. 16; Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) Grading Rules; National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber, PS20-70; Uniform Building Code Standards 25-1, 25-3, and 25-4. B. Redwood: Standard Specification for grades of California Redwood Lumber; Redwood Inspection Service. C. Plywood: U.S. Product Standard "PS 1" for Softwood Plywood; Uniform Building Code Standard 25-9. 1990 6-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 6 D. Preservative Pressure Treatment: Federal Specification TT -W -572I(2); Uniform Building Code Standard 25-12. 060120 MATERIALS 060121 WOOD Lumber shall be seasoned or kiln -dried and shall contain not more than 19 percent moisture. All lumber shall be S4S unless noted otherwise. Lumber shall be free of bow, warp, or twist. Pieces with serious defects will be discarded regardless of grading. Each piece of lumber shall be stamped with grade, species, and size. Each panel of soft plywood shall be identified with the appropriate DFPA grade -trademark of the American Plywood Association, and shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of U.S. Product Standard PS -1 for Softwood Plywood -Construction and Industrial and Uniform Building Code Standard 25-9. Lumber 2 inches, 3 inches, and 4 inches thick shall be graded in accordance with the National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber, PS 20-70 or Uniform Building Code Standard 25-1, and shall be identified by grade name and species only without reference to paragraph numbers. Lumber 6 inches and larger shall be graded under provisions of WWPA or Uniform Building Code 25-4, and shall be identified by grade, name species, and size. Equivalent members graded by WCLIB or Uniform Building Code Standard 25-3 will be accepted unless specifically excluded. Unless otherwise specified, all beams, joists, and rafters shall have the following minimum values for design: Modules of Elasticity = E = 1,300,000 psi Fiber Stress in Bending = Fb = 1,200 psi The following minimum lumber requirements apply for all framing and sheathing: Classification Studs Roof Joists Floor Joists and Planking Size 2x3, 2x4 2x6, 2x8 2x6 thru 2x14 2x6 thru 2x14 Species and Minimum Grade DF -L No. 2 or Construction DF -L No. 2 DP -L No. 2 DF -L No. 2 1990 6-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 6 Classification Headers, Beams, and Stringers Posts and Timbers Boards Framing Lumber Blocking and Bridging Miscellaneous Species and Size Minimum Grade 6x6 or 8x14 DF -L No. 1 (WWPA Section 70-11) DF -L No. 1 DF -L No. 1 DF -L Construction DF -L No. 1 DF -L Construction DF -L No. 2 4x4 or 4x14 6x6 and large 1" thick all sizes 2x4, 2x6 all sizes DF -L = Douglas Fir -Larch (North) Grouping Species shall be as specified or any species combination allowed by the grading rules. Silas, cants, nailers for fascia and gravel stops at the edges of the roof or at roof expansion joints shall be preservative pressure -treated Construction Grade Douglas Fir. Lumber shall be full 2 inches thick when used with roof insulation but widths may be nominal. All wood members in contact with concrete or masonry shall be pressure treated with wood preservative. Plywood with edges or surfaces permanently exposed to the weather shall be exterior type with exterior glue, Grade A -C. Plywood roof sheathing shall be APA 1/2 -inch C -D, Grade 24-0 with exterior glue. Plywood sheathing exposed at overhangs shall be exterior type plywood with exterior glue, Grade A -C or better. Miscellaneous plywood shall be exterior type Douglas Fir plywood of the thickness indicated on the Plans, Grade A -C, or as indicated on the Plans. Plywood shall be Group 1. 060122 FASTENERS Nails shall conform to Federal Specification FF -N -105B and shall be common wire nails or spikes. Bolts, nuts, and stubs shall conform to requirements of Federal Specifications FF -B -584E, FF -S-1362, and FF -B -575C. Lag bolts shall conform to Federal Specification FF -B -561C and be galvanized. Wood screws shall conform to Federal Specification FF -S -111D. All nails, screws, bolts, and plates exposed to weather shall be hot -dip galvanized or Series 300 stainless steel. 1990 32668.10 Div. 6 6-3 W3266B.10 Power -driven pins to be installed in concrete or steel shall be heat-treated steel alloy. Pins that are not sufficiently corrosion -resistant for the conditions to which they are to be exposed shall be protected in an acceptable manner. Pins shall have capped or threaded heads capable of transmitting the loads that shanks are required to support. Pins connected to steel shall have longitudinal serrations around the circumference of the shank. 060123 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE Clamps, expansion bolts, expansion screws, joist hangers, anchors, and plates shall be standard make of proper size and strength to adequately fasten, support, and maintain members in place. All exposed hardware shall be galvanized. 060124 WOOD PRESERVATIVE Wood preservative shall be one of the following materials subject to the approval of the Engineer: Tanalith (Wolman salts), ammoniacal copper arsenite Chemonite), chromated zinc arsenate (Boliden salt), and chromated copper arsenate (Green salt or Erdalith) or 5 percent pentachlorophenol in mineral spirits conforming to Recommended Practice of American Wood Preserver's Association (AWPA) P8 and P9, and Federal Specification TT -W -572B, as amended. The quantity retained per cubic foot shall be not less than that specified in AWPA C2 for the service conditions. The method of application shall be in conformance with AWPA Cl and C2. The solution shall be nonstaining, nonblooming, and shall not form crystals or leave a flame -supporting residue, and shall completely dry within 5 days. Materials detrimental to other finishes shall not be used. 060125 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT Fire retardant treatment shall be in accordance with American Wood Preservers Institute (AWPA) Standards 01 for all timber products preservative treatment, C20 for structural lumber and C27 for plywood. Wood shall be marked with UL Classified Fire rating system. Note that all wood in new generator building shall be rated such that the completed building has a 1 and 1/2 hour fire rating. 060130 WORKMANSHIP The Work shall be performed in accordance with the standard practices of the trade, the Uniform Building Code, and the following. Lumber shall be accurately cut, fitted, and framed. Walls shall be plumb and true to line. Nailing blocks and backing necessary for the attachment of ground, trim, fixtures, and miscellaneous items shall be placed and required cutting, furring, and backing for plumbing and heating pipes, fixtures, and electrical work, shall be performed. Plates on top of masonry walls shall be level and in the same plane. Plates shall be anchored to masonry or concrete with bolts of the size and spacing shown on the Plans, and there shall be an anchor bolt within 6 inches of the end of each member. Cement grouting shall be used, if necessary, to insure full bedding and leveling of the plates. 1990 6-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 6 All stud walls and partitions where required by governing codes or with air space greater than 7 feet, shall have a continuous row of blocking or fire stopping which shall form a complete and effective separation for the entire width of the wall or partition. Fire stop blocking or blocking for plumbing fixtures, casework, electrical equipment, and other fixtures shall be located so that there will be no concealed air spaces greater than 7 feet in horizontal or vertical dimension. Fire stops blocking shall be not less than 2 inches nominal thickness and of the same width as studs. Strips of full-thickness rock wool shall be installed around pipes and installed to fill all other openings in fire stops. Walls and partitions shall be framed with studs of sizes indicated, on not greater than 16 -inch centers. Double studs shall be provided at openings and triple studs shall be provided at corners. Double plates shall be provided at ceilings and at heads of openings. Plates shall be arranged to form continuous horizontal ties. Single plates shall be spliced and ends staggered on double plates. Where not indicated on the Plans, lintels up to 48 inches wide shall be two pieces of 2 -inch by 6 -inch, and openings for 48 inches to 72 inches wide shall be two pieces of 2 -inch by 8 -inch on edge. Openings for large pipes and ducts and for receiving recessed work in partitions shall be framed without cutting structural members. Two layers of 15 -pound waterproof building paper shall be provided under sills and members in contact with concrete or masonry. Sills shall be secured as indicated on the Plans. If not indicated, sills shall be anchored with 1/2 -inch diameter by 12 -inch long bolts with standard hooks at 4 -foot centers. Cutting of wood beams or joists and plates in bearing walls for passage of pipes will not be acceptable. Cutting of wood beams or joists not indicated on the Plans shall be limited to cuts or bored holes not deeper than 1/5 the beam depth from the top and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Pieces of lumber complying with these Specifications and used for joists shall be so fabricated so that no knot or other defect occurs within 12 inches of the bearing notch. All sleepers for mechanical equipment and curb openings shall be coordinated with appropriate trades or suppliers for locations and sizes. Nail holes shall be subdrilled where required to avoid splitting. All split pieces of material shall be removed and replaced. Screws and lag bolts shall have holes subdrilled and shall be screwed into place. Hammered wood screws and lag screws will be rejected and cause replacement of members involved. Bolts shall have drilled holes 1/32 inch larger than bolt shank unless noted otherwise. All final bolting shall be done after the structural members have been properly aligned. Square plates or malleable iron washers shall be provided under heads and nuts of all bolts, lag bolts, and screws bearing on wood. Bolts shall be aligned where exposed. 1990 6-5 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 6 Power nailing will be permitted where nails are as specified provided wood members are not marred or damaged. 060200 FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK Finish carpentry specifications shall apply to interior and exterior woodwork and carpentry that is normally exposed to view and which normally requires careful workmanship for detail, matching of members, surface appearance, and finish for painting or staining. Finish carpentry shall apply to both interior and exterior work. The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and millwork complete with fasteners and appurtenances required to complete a finished product ready to receive paint, stain, and other finishes as shown on the Plans and specified herein. Lumber grades and workmanship for finish carpentry and millwork shall be in accordance with the following: A. Douglas Fir shall conform to West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB), Standard Grading and Dressing Rule No. 16; Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) Grading Rules; National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber, PS 20-70; and Uniform Building Code Standards 25-1, 25-3, and 25-4. B. Plywood shall conform to the American Plywood Association (APA) Standards and U.S. Product Standard PS 1-74. C. Hardwood plywood shall conform to the requirements of Hardwood and Decorative Plywood PS -51-71. D. Uniform Building Code. E. Finish carpentry and millwork shall be of custom grade meeting applicable Architectural Woodwork Institute and Woodwork Institute of California Standards. 060201 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be in accordance with the General Conditions and shall include the following: A. Shop Drawings of fabricated and milled items. B. Finish material samples shall be submitted for grade, color, and shape, and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. C. Finish hardware color shall be as specified or selected by the Engineer. 060202 STORAGE Finish wood, plywood, and millwork shall be stored and protected from damage and weather in areas not subject to extreme temperature or humidity. 1990 6-6 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 6 060220 MATERIALS 060221 WOOD Wood shall be kiln dried with moisture content not to exceed 12 percent. Exposed framing shall be "A" Appearance Framing grade Douglas Fir. Douglas Fir plywood shall have Grade A veneer on exposed faces and shall be 40 Group 1 Exterior. Douglas Fir or White Pine trim shall be "B" or better grade straight grain S4S. Douglas Fir clothes poles shall clear with close, straight grain, 1 -3/8 -inch 00 diameter. A 1990 6-7. W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 6 0 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 070000 GENERAL Specification requirements referred to for various materials are minimum requirements. Materials furnished shall be suitable for use under the year- round local climatic conditions of the site at which they are installed. 070300 BUILDING INSULATION Building shall be insulated as indicated on the Plans or specified in the following Specifications. 070500 MEMBRANE ROOFING 070514 CARE OF WORK No work shall be done on or above the finished roofs unless it is unavoidable to work on the roof after it has been finished. Any and all damages to the roof shall be repaired. The roof shall be entirely waterproof and without damage at the time of acceptance of the completed project. 070516 ROOF GUARANTEE/BOND The Contractor shall supply the roofing manufacturer's 10 -year system guarantee/bond covering both roofing and flashing. The guarantee/bond shall obligate the roofing manufacturer to spend up to $50.00 per square foot of roof installed to repair leaks over the 10 -year period from date of issuance. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility: A. To see that the roofing manufacturer is notified that a guarantee or bond is required. B. To see that roofing and flashing details meet the requirements of the guarantee/bond program. C. To make payment of guarantee/bond fee as required to insure installation inspection by the roofing manufacturer. D. To submit, to the Engineer, letters from the roofing manufacturer stating that: 1. Prior to roof installation, it's representatives have examined the roof plans, details, and specifications and have found them acceptable, thereby qualifying the proposed roof assembly for the purchase of a guarantee/bond as described above. 2. Roofing system (including flashings) has been applied according to manufacturer's specifications and is covered by the above described system's guarantee/bond. 1990 32665.10 Div. 7 7-1 W3266B.10 Any and all changes in the method and materials for roofing and flashing construction and installation which are necessary to secure the specified 10 -year guarantee/bond shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. However, all changes shall be subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer. The Contractor shall make the necessary submittals to the Engineer indicating such change. 070820 METAL FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shall be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry, and free from all defects that might affect the application. All cutting, fitting, drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to accommodate the work of other trades shall be performed under this section. All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of this sheet metal installation, though not specifically shown or specified, shall also be provided under this section. Nails, screws, and bolts shall be of the types best suited for the intended purpose and shall be of a composition that will not support galvanic action in the installation. Where sheet metal abuts into adjacent materials, the juncture shall be executed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All flashing, gutters, downspouts, and other exposed sheet metalwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet flashing. 070821 MATERIALS STEEL SHEET: Shall be galvanized conforming with ASTM A 525. Gauges shall be as indicated on the Plans. 070822 FLASHING GENERAL: Flashings shall be installed at all intersections of roofs with vertical surfaces, at all projections through roofs, and elsewhere as indicated on the Plans or required to provide watertight protection. Flashing at intersections of roofs with vertical surfaces shall be as indicated on the Plans. Exposed edges of all flashings shall be folded back 1/2 -inch to provide stiffness. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, counterflashing shall be provided over all base flashings. All pipes, stacks, ducts, vents, conduit, and other necessary openings, through roofs shall be flashed and counterflashed as indicated on the Plans, or as specified, or shall be suitably flashed and cour.terflashed with galvanized steel sheet. Flashing for plumbing piping is covered elsewhere herein. Flashing and counterflashing details shall be subject to the approval of the roofing manufacturer whose guarantee/bond shall cover flashing along with roofing. BASE FLASHINGS: Base flashings, except as otherwise indicated, shall be of roofing felt as specified elsewhere herein. Where base flashing is indicated as metal, it shall be galvanized steel sheet. COUNTERFLASHINGS: Counterflashings shall turn down over base flashings not less than 4 inches. The counterflashing shall be formed to provide spring action against the base flashing. 1990 7-2 W3266B.10 32665.10 Div. 7 REGLETS: Reglets for flashing to concrete and masonry shall be provided as detailed and as necessary to provide watertight connections. Reglets shall be a manufactured product of stainless steel of approved design to conform to details shown on the Plans, and shall be complete with preformed corners, fittings, and other special shapes as may be required to be weathertight. Reglets and flashing shall be similar to reglets and flashing as manufactured 10 by the Cheney Flashing Company. 070830 PLUMBING FLASHING Vents, roof drains, and pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with not lighter than 4 -pound sheet lead flashings. Flashings shall extend not less than 6 inches up the pipes, where they shall be counterflashed with standard cast iron or malleable iron recessed roof couplings. Flashing for vents may be carried up to the top of the vent and turned down into the pipe. Flashing shields shall extend not less than 8 inches from the vent and pipe in all directions. 1990 7-3. W3266B.10 72666.10 Div. 7 DIVISION 8 DOORS, WINDOWS, AND HARDWARE 080000 GENERAL These Specifications cover the furnishing and installing of doors, windows, hardware, and glazing for doors and windows. Doors, door frames, windows, and window frames shall be fabricated and installed in a workmanlike manner. Doors, windows, and hardware shall be adjusted so that operation will be smooth, free, and easy, and with no binding in the hardware, or between doors and frames, or windows and frames. Doors and windows shall be set plumb, square, and level at their proper elevation and in their proper plane. Hardware shall be adjusted to operate smoothly, freely, and properly. Doors, windows, and frames shall be protected during shipment and storage to prevent warping, bending, or corrosion. Doors and frames shall be prepared and reinforced for hinges, locksets, strikes, closers, and other items as required. Doorknobs shall be 40 inches above the floor to the center line of the knob. Preparations in pressed steel frames for hinges, strikes, flush bolts, and other items shall be protected with dust boxes. Door sizes, leaf types, door frames, and window type and size shall be as indicated on the Plans. Aluminum shall be insulated as specified under DIVISION 5, METALS. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. 080200 HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND STEEL FRAMES 080201 GENERAL Steel doors, indicated on the Plans, and their pressed steel frames shall be hollow steel doors as manufactured by Overly Manufacturing Company, Los Angeles, California, or equal, and as detailed on the Plans and specified herein. 080210 MATERIALS Doors, transom panels, and frames exposed in whole or in part to the weather, doors located in unheated spaces, or fire rated doors shall be generally specified herein and fabricated entirely from galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 525, with 1.25 -ounce coating. Internal stiffeners and anchors may be of plain sheet steel. Exterior doors shall have perimeter weatherproofing seal. 080211 DOORS Hollow metal doors shall be 1 -3/4 -inch thick flush type, constructed of two steel sheets of not less than 16 -gauge formed and welded for flush pan assembly, with internal 20 -gauge formed and welded for flush pan assembly, with internal 20 -gauge vertical reinforcing channels spaced not over 8 inches on centers the full height of the door. Reinforcing channels shall be 1990 8-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 6 uniformly spot welded to mated parts. Continuous 18 -gauge stiffener channels shall be welded to faceplates at top and bottom of all doors. Filler channels shall be provided at the top of exterior doors and also at the bottom of doors with thresholds to provide flush closure. All interior void spaces shall be completely filled with not less than 3 -pound density rock wool. There shall be no visible joints on the face of the doors. 080212 FIRE DOORS Doors indicated on the Plans as Fire Doors shall be UL labeled Class D for 1 -1/2 -hour fire rating, shall be constructed according to the requirements of the Underwriter's Laboratory for such doors, and shall bear the UL label. 080213 DOOR REINFORCEMENT Concealed sheet or bar steel reinforcing shall be provided for mortise type hardware. Reinforcing shall not be less than the following: 9 -gauge for butts, 12 -gauge for locksets, and 14 -gauge for surface applied hardware. Reinforcing shall be drilled and tapped to template requirements. Concealed reinforcing shall be provided for closers. 080215 FRAMES FOR METAL Frames for hollow metal doors shall be pressed steel, shall be constructed of not less than 14 -gauge steel, and shall be of the shate indicated on the Plans and as required to fit the various wall construction. Frames shall be of welded unit construction, assembled and welded in the shop. Welding shall be to a hairline joint with all exposed beads ground smooth. Concealed reinforcing of the frames for mortise hardware shall be not less than the following: 3/16 -inch for butts, 12 -gauge for lock strike, 14 -gauge for surface applied items; and 18 -gauge plaster guards over mortised hardware reinforcement. Frames shall be mortised drilled and tapped to template requirements. Lock reinforcing units shall be supplied by finish hardware supplier. Frames in concrete shall be held in place by grout poured in keyways provided at all heads and jambs. Frame corners shall be welded full length of joint, including integral stop. Anchors welded into frame shall be provided for concealed attachment to wall construction at 30 -inch maximum spacing. Contractor shall provide 14 -gauge floor anchors for two bolts to structure and mortartight covers behind cutouts in frames to be grouted. Frames to be anchored from face side shall have access to anchor bolts concealed by separate stop secured by countersunk oval Phillips, or equal, head screws at 18 -inch maximum spacing. Loose stops shall be 18 -gauge. After shop assembly, doors and frames shall be cleaned thoroughly, ground smooth, and all seams along the edges of the door shall be filled flush with mineral filler. All doors and frames shall be bonderized and given one shop coat of rust inhibitive primer. Painting of doors shall be as specified in DIVISION 9. 1990 8-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 8 080700 HARDWARE 080710 GENERAL The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials required to furnish and install complete finish hardware and specialties as indicated and specified. 080720 INSTALLATION Installation shall be coordinated with other work requiring builder's hardware or attaching to it. The Contractor shall submit necessary copies of schedules, templates, etc. in ample time to avoid fabrication and construction delays. Each item of hardware shall be identified according to approved list and schedule, and shall be made according to template. Hardware shall be delivered in unopened packages bearing manufacturer's labels. Items of hardware required for completion of work, but not specifically mentioned herein, shall be provided by the Contractor, and shall be suitable for the required service and comparable to those specified. The Contractor shall provide any auxiliary or interconnecting devices necessary to the proper function of items specified. Necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size and type to secure hardware in position shall be provided by the Contractor and shall match hardware in material and finish. Phillips head type shall be used for all exposed screws. The Contractor shall provide expansion bolts, sex bolts, toggle bolts, or other approved anchorages as applicable to each setting condition. Finish of hardware shall be US 32, polished stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Fasteners shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, 32D finish. 080730 CATALOG NUMBERS The Contractor shall require the hardware manufacturer to furnish the proper fastenings whether listed within the hardware sets or not. Finish of fastenings shall equal the finish of hardware sets. The catalog numbers referred to herein are taken from manufacturers listed. They are used only to establish the quality and type of hardware to be used. Hardware equal in quality and utility, will be accepted provided it conforms in operations, weight, size, workmanship, and finish to the products hereinafter described. 080740 SUBMITTALS A complete hardware list and schedule shall be submitted as specified elsewhere. Groups listed shall be identified with identical numbers used on the drawings. The Contractor shall require the hardware supplier to furnish the proper templates to the door and frame manufacturer along with a complete hardware schedule for preparation of hardware as furnished in the hardware schedule. 1990 8-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 080750 GUARANTEE All hardware shall be guaranteed for two years from date of acceptance of the work against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions. 080760 FINISH HARDWARE Hardware to be furnished shall be the products of the following named manufacturers, or equal. A. THRESHOLD: Unless otherwise indicated thresholds shall be extruded aluminum, 3 -3/4 -inch by 7/8 -inch, with a 215-R1 finish. Thresholds shall be Brookline 2053, Pemko 203A, or equal. B. HINGES: Unless otherwise noted hinges shall be 4 -1/2 -inch by 4 -1/2 -inch stainless steel (US32D) with a stainless steel pin and bushing. Hinges shall be McKinney T4B3386, Stanley FBB199, or equal, and shall be sized to allow door to clear trim and swing 180 degrees. Two pair per door shall be provided. C. FLOOR STOPS: Floor stops shall be Glynn -Johnson FB 13, FB 14, or FB 18, Sargent and Greenleaf SG 3494, SG 3818, or SG 3819, or equal. Door stops with latch shall be Corbin 359, Sargent 3377 with hooks, or equal. D. FLUSH BOLTS: Flush bolts shall be installed at top and bottom of inactive leaf of double doors not equipped with existing devices. Mortise in flush bolt on metal doors, surface mount on wood doors, all with US 26D finish. Mortise flush bolts shall be Ives 258 and surface bolts shall be 253 B26D. E. KICK PLATE: Kick plates shall be 8 inches high by door width, stainless steel, US 32 finish, and not less than 0.050 inch thick. Kick plates shall be provided on all doors for the new generator building. F. WEATHERSTRIPPING: Weatherstripping shall be as manufactured by Pemko, 305AR, and 350A, and furnished with sheet metal screws, equivalent Zero Weatherstripping Company, or equal. Machine screws will be furnished when strip is to be applied to channel iron frames. G. LATCH SETS: All door locks shall be grand master -keyed to one key. Locks shall be master -keyed into two groups as requested by the Engineer. The two groups may be generally described as follows: Group Name Function 1 Grand master Opens all doors. 2 Operator's key Opens all doors except: supervisor's office, storage room, and bathrooms. The hardware supplier shall prepare and submit a lock schedule which complies with the above directions. Four grand master keys shall be furnished. 1990 8-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 D1v. B All keys shall be stamped for ready identification and a list shall be provided giving the key code and numbers of the doors which may be opened by each key. All keys shall be die marked, marked "Do not duplicate." 080761 WORKMANSHIP Each item shall be fitted, adjusted, and secured neatly and firmly in place in perfect working order. Any work not satisfactory to the Engineer shall be properly corrected. The Contractor shall do all fitting, dismantling, and re -hanging of finish hardware required for finish painting work. Strippable coating, removable tape, or other means shall be used to protect and prevent staining of hardware during construction. Protective measures shall be removed prior to final cleaning for Owner's acceptance of project. Latch and bolts shall be installed to automatically engage in keepers, whether activated by closers or by manual push. In no case shall additional manual pressure be required to engage latch or bolt in keepers. 080780 HARDWARE GROUPS The hardware items for the doors in the project shall be as tabulated below. The doors listed shall have the hardware items listed, with proper fastenings as required. Threshold Hinges Floor Stop Latch Set Weatherstripping Flush Bolts Kick Plate Pump Station Doors 1 each Brookline 2053 6 pair Stanley FBB 199 Glynn -Johnson FB14 - 2 sets Latch and Padlock - 2 sets Pemko 305AR Each door Corbin 2318 (each door) 1990 8-5. W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 8 0 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 090000 GENERAL The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to do all the work specified or required by these Specifications or the Plans. All materials specified by name, brand, or manufacturer, or selected for use under these Specifications, shall be delivered unopened at the jobsite in their original containers bearing the manufacturer's label. No material other than that specified or approved shall be delivered, stored, or kept at the jobsite. 40 090100 PAINTING - GENERAL A. No lead paints shall be used. B. All paint for concrete and metal surfaces shall be especially adapted for use around wastewater treatment plants and shall be applied in conformance with the manufacturer's published specifications. C. All paint for final coats shall be fume resistant, compounded with pigments suitable for exposure to sewage gases, especially to hydrogen sulfide and to carbon dioxide. Pigments shall be materials which do not tend to darken, discolor, or fade due to the action of sewage gases. If a paint manufacturer proposes use of paint which is not designated "fume resistant" in its literature, it shall furnish full information concerning the pigments used in this paint. D. Coatings used in conjunction with potable water supply systems shall have FDA approval for use with potable water and shall not impart a taste or odor to the water. E. Complete data on each type and kind of paint and primer shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Review shall be received from the Engineer before the paint is delivered to the jobsite. This procedure shall be followed whether or not the paint that the contractor proposes to use is named in the Specifications. Review data shall show where and for what uses each paint product is proposed to be used with cross reference made to paragraphs of the Specifications or Finishing Schedule. Data submitted on each proposed type and kind of paint shall include data to show that the paint meets the requirements of these Specifications. F. Paints not listed in the Specifications and which are submitted for review shall be submitted with a certified ingredients analysis. Data shall include sufficient information for making a complete comparison between specified and proposed paint. G. Colors shall be as specified or as selected by the Engineer. Colors will not necessarily be standard colors with all suppliers, and colors shall be mixed by the manufacturer to secure desired color when not standard. The Contractor shall prepare and submit color chip samples for all items which require color selection by the Engineer. If requested for special 1990 9-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 9 architectural finishes, the Contractor shall also submit 6 -inch by 6 -inch samples similar to the intended coated surfaces and coated with the selected color. No color selection will be made until all samples of all paints have been submitted. After all samples of all paints have been submitted, the Engineer will prepare a color scheme using the submitted colors. H. All paint shall comply with all requirements of the Air Pollution Regulatory Acts concerning the application and formulation of paints and coatings for an area in which the paints are applied. Specifically, paints shall be reformulated as required to meet the local, State, and Federal requirements. I. At the end of the project, the Contractor shall turn over to the Engineer a gallon can of each type and color of paint, primer, thinner, or other coating used in the field painting. If the manufacturer packages the material concerned in gallon cans, then it shall be delivered in unopened labeled cans as it comes from the factory. If the manufacturer does not package the material in gallon cans, and in the case of special colors, the materials shall be delivered in new gallon containers, properly closed with typed labels indicating brand, type, color, etc. The manu- facturer's literature describing the materials and giving directions for their use shall be furnished in three bound copies. A typewritten inventory list shall be furnished at the time of delivery. 090101 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS The manufacturers' published instructions for use as a guide in specifying and applying the manufacturers' proposed paint shall be submitted to the Engineer. Paint shall not be delivered to the job before review of the manufacturer's instructions is given by the Engineer. A manufacturer's paint will not be considered for review unless that manufacturer's published instructions meet the following requirements: A. The instructions must have been written and published by the manufacturer for the purpose and with the intent of giving complete instruction for the use and application of the proposed paint in the locality and for the conditions for which the paint is specified or shown to be applied under this Contract. B. All limitations, precautions, and requirements that may adversely affect the paint; that may cause unsatisfactory results after the painting application; or that may cause the paint not to serve the purpose for which it was intended, that is, to protect the covered material from corrosion, shall be clearly and completely stated in the instructions. These limitations and requirements shall, if they exist, include, but not be limited to the following list: 1. Methods of application. 2. Number of coats. 3. Thickness of each coat. 1990 9-2 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 9 4. Total thickness. 5. Drying time of each coat, including primer. 6. Primer required to be used. 7. Primers not permitted. 8. Use of a primer. 9. Thinner and use of thinner. 10. Temperature and relative humidity limitations during application and after application. 41 11. Time allowed between coats. 12. Protection from sun. 13. Physical properties of paint including solids content and ingredient analysis. 14. Surface preparation. 15. Touch up requirement and limitations. Concrete surfaces specified by the paint manufacturer to be acid etched shall be etched in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The surface shall then be thoroughly scrubbed with clean water, rinsed, and allowed to dry. The surface shall be tested with a moisture meter to determine when dry before coating. 090102 SPECIFIED PRODUCTS LIST Brand Name Amchem Amchem Products Fremont, California Manufacturer Amercoat Borden Amercoat Division Ameron Corporation Brea, California Borden Chemical Company 50 West Broad Street Columbus, Ohio 43215 Carboline Carboline Company St. Louis, Missouri 63144 Glidden Glidden Coatings and Resins Division of SCM Corporation Cleveland, Ohio 44115 1990 9-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 9 Brand Name Manufacturer Inertol and Ramuc Koppers Company, Inc. Koppers Building Pittsburg, Pennsylvania 15219 Koppers Koppers Company, Inc. Koppers Building Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15219 Valspar NO -OX -ID Porter Sherwin-Williams Tnemec 090103 PREPARATION OF SURFACES The Valspar Corporation 1004 West Tenth Street Azusa, CA 91702 Dearborn Chemical Company 807 Mateo Street Los Angeles, California 90021 Porter Coatings Division of Porter Paint Company Louisville, Kentucky 40201 The Sherwin-Williams Company 101 Prospect Avenue, N.W. Cleveland, Ohio 44115 Tnemec Company, Inc. 123 West 23rd Avenue North Kansas City, Missouri 64116 Paint surface preparation shall be as specified in the following or as recommended by the paint manufacturer's published application instructions, whichever imposes the most stringent requirements. All surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry except that in some cases the paint manufacturer's directions may require wetting the surface before painting. Except as otherwise provided, all preparation of metal surfaces shall be in accordance with Specifications SP -1 through SP -10 of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). Where Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications are referred to in this specification, the corresponding Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard shall be used to define the minimum final surface conditions to be supplied. Grease and oil shall be removed by wiping with mineral spirits or naphtha per Specification SP -1. Rust, scale, welding slag, and spatter shall be removed and the surface prepared by hand tool cleaning, power tool cleaning or blast cleaning in accordance with the appropriate Specifications SP -2 through SP -10. Unless otherwise specified, all iron or steel surfaces which are to be painted as submerged or high temperature metal shall be sandblasted on the site in accordance with Specification SP -10, near white blast cleaning or better. Sandblasting shall provide a roughened surface profile of not less than 1990 9-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 9 2.0 mils in depth when measured with an Elcometer 123. Sandblasting shall be with abrasive Ottawa flint silica 30 to 50 mesh, Clemtex No. 2 silica 20 to 40 mesh, silica sand 20 to 40 mesh. All metal surfaces which are to be painted as unsubmerged metal shall be commercial blast cleaned per Specification SP -10 except as otherwise specified, in locations where sandblasting would damage previously coated surfaces and installed equipment, and in locations where dry sandblasting is prohibited. The above locations in which SP -10 sandblasting is not possible, metal surfaces shall be given a SP -3 power tool cleaning. This sandblasting shall be done not more than 12 hours ahead of the painting, subject to humidity and weather conditions between the time of sandblasting and painting operations. If any rusting or discoloration of sandblasted surfaces occurs before painting, such rusting or discoloration shall be removed by additional sandblasting. Sandblasted surfaces shall not be left overnight before painting. No surface which is to be sandblasted shall be given a coat of primer or paint in the shop or in the field before sandblasting. Abrasives and sandblasting shall comply with all air pollution requirements. Surfaces to be painted at erection welds, surfaces exposed by damage to the coating, as during erections, shall be cleaned as above before painting. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, machined surfaces which are intended for sliding contact, surfaces which are to be assembled against gaskets, surfaces or shafting on which sprockets are to fit, or which are intended to fit into bearings, machined surfaces of bronze trim on slide gates and similar surfaces shall be masked off to protect them from the sandblasting of adjacent surfaces. Cadmium -plated items shall not be sandblasted except that cadmium -plated, zinc -plated, or sherardized fasteners used in assembly of equipment to be sandblasted shall be sandblasted in the same manner as the unprotected metal. All installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent painted equipment shall be protected from sandblasting. Protection shall prevent any sand or dust from entering the mechanical drive units or equipment where damage could be caused. There will be some surfaces which cannot be sandblasted, or which cannot be sandblasted and painted, after the items of which they are a part have been assembled in final position. These surfaces shall be sandblasted, or sandblasted and painted, before the items are put into final position. In some cases while the painting could be done after the items concerned were in place, the limitation on time between sandblasting and painting may make it necessary to paint the surfaces before installation of the items concerned. Sand from sandblasting shall be thoroughly removed, using a vacuum cleaner if necessary. No surface which has been sandblasted shall be painted until inspected by the Engineer. All concrete to be painted or coated shall be prepared as specified in DIVISION 3, CONCRETE. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be free of dust, mortar droppings and spatter, fins, loose concrete particles, form release materials, oil, grease, and other deleterious materials. If required by the coating manufacturer, such surfaces shall be etched as specified above or brush-off blast cleaned. 1990 9-5 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 9 Wood surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with mineral spirits, scrapers, sandpaper or wire brushes. Sandpaper any roughness after first prime coat. Wood shall be cleaned and dusted before painting. Shelves, drawers, benches, and associated woodwork shall be sanded before painting and lightly sanded between coats. All knots and sappy places shall be coated with liquid shellac of not over two pound cut after the priming coat has been applied and dried. Nail holes, cracks, open joints and other defects in all interior woodwork shall be filled with putty colored to match the finish coats after the priming coat has been applied and is dry. All painted surfaces shall be dusted between coats and high gloss finishes shall be lightly sanded and dusted between coats unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer. Surfaces which are to be painted with other than bituminous paint and which have had a bituminous coating (such as coal -tar varnished pipe), shall be sealed with not less than two coats of Koppers Inertol Tar Stop, Sherwin- Williams Metalatex B-42 W100, Glidden Stain Killer or equal, in sufficient quantity to permanently prevent bleeding of the bituminous coating. Galvanized surfaces which are to be painted shall first be whip sand blasted and if recommended by the coating manufacturer, treated with Koppers No. 40 Metal Conditioner, Amercoat No. 59, Galvaprep No. 5 as manufactured by Amchem Products, or equal. Pretreatment for galvanized metal shall be applied not more than 48 hours prior to coating. All fiberglass to be painted shall be lightly sandblasted or sanded to roughen surfaces just prior to painting. Plastic surfaces shall be solvent -washed to dull the surface, using a vinyl thinner approved by the finish coating manufacturer. Aluminum, copper, and other metal surfaces shall be lightly sanded or receive surface preparation as specified in the following or as recommended by the paint manufacturer. 090104 APPLICATION OF PAINT The applicator of the paint shall have had past experience in applying the type or types of coatings and under similar conditions that he will be required to meet in this Contract. The Contractor shall verify the paint applicator's qualifications and past performance before subcontracting the work to him. No painting shall be done under dusty conditions, during or immediately after a rain, during rainy weather, when the ambient and/or surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F and rising, or when the temperature exceeds that recommended for application by the paint manufacturer. Relative humidity shall be between 30 and 85 percent and the dew point shall not be within 5 degrees of the surface temperature. Paint may be applied by brush, roller, trowel, or spray, unless the manufacturer's recommendations or these Specifications call for some particular type of application. Where spray application is used, each coat of 1990 9-6 W3266B.10 32668.10 D1v. 9 paint shall be applied to a thickness equivalent to a brush coat application at a coverage not greater than that specified by the manufacturer for a brush coat application. All spray painting shall be by the airless method except where specifically allowed by the Engineer for architectural painting. All air spray units shall have operable line filters for removal of all oil and moisture. The Contractor shall demonstrate the efficiency of the line filters before applying any paint. Spray painting shall be conducted under controlled conditions and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from spray painting. All work shall be done leaving the finished surfaces free from drops, ridges, waves, holidays, laps, or brush marks. Drop cloths and other coverings shall be so placed at all times as to protect floors, other surfaces, and equipment from spatter and droppings. Hardware, plates, lighting fixtures, nameplates, and similar articles which are not to be painted shall be masked off or removed completely. After completion of painting, any spatter or droppings shall be removed. Primer and intermediate coats of paint shall be unscarred and completely integral at the time of application of each succeeding coat. Each coat shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the Engineer before the next succeeding coat is applied, and defective work of any kind shall be deemed sufficient cause for stripping, removal, and repreparing if required by the Engineer followed by recoating the entire surface involved. Except as otherwise provided in these Specifications, or approved in writing by the Engineer, prime coats, undercoats, and finish coats on any one item shall be of the same manufacturer. If the incorrect prime coat is applied for any reason, it shall be sandblasted off and replaced with the specified primer. When multiple coats of the same material are specified, the prime coat and undercoats applied shall be tinted with aluminum powder, lamp black, or other suitable pigment to distinguish it from the following coat and finish coat. Sufficient time shall be allowed between coats to insure proper drying unless these Specifications or manufacturer's recommendations specifically state otherwise. Excessive time or exposure between coats shall not occur in cases where such excessive time or exposure will impair the bond between coats. To prevent impairment of bond between coats, space heaters shall be provided to dry the coat or keep the coating dry, if recommended by the paint manufacturer or required by the Engineer. Epoxies shall be recoated within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer. Should the time limits be exceeding, the coatings shall be sandblasted prior to the application of additional coats. The number of coats specified is the minimum to be applied. Suction spots between coats shall be touched up, and additional coats shall be provided if required to produce a finished surface of solid, even color, free from defects. The total thickness of the coating shall be as specified. Additional coats of paint shall be added if necessary to bring the total thickness up to not less than that specified. No holidays shall be left. Particular care shall be used to assure that the specified coverage is secured on the edges and corners of all surfaces. Additional brush coats shall be 1990 9-7 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 9 applied if necessary to cover the edges and corners. The Contractor shall control and check the dry film thickness of all coatings. The Contractor shall control and check the dry film thickness on metal surfaces with a correctly calibrated thickness meter and shall check for holidays with a low - voltage holiday detector. The Engineer may use the Contractor's detector for additional checking. However, the Engineer will use an Elcometer to check the dry film thickness of the coatings, and his findings utilizing this meter will be final as to the dry film thickness of the applied coatings. Damaged paint or scratched painted surfaces shall be sanded smooth before repainting. Sanding and repainting shall be done to such a degree and in such a manner that all evidence of the scratches or damages are obscured. 090110 FACTORY -PAINTED EQUIPMENT Except as otherwise noted on the Finishing Schedule or specified, the following items shall receive final finish coats at the factory and shall be protected against damage during transit, storage, and erection. Damaged areas must be refinished as the original. Factory -painted items shall be of a color specified, selected, or approved by the Engineer. Pump Station Control Panels Electric Distribution Centers Emergency Generator Gauges and meters Galvanized pipe trays and cable trays (supports or hangers for these shall also be painted) Instrument and control panels Instruments Light fixture not specified to be field painted Meter panels Motor Control Centers Transfer Switch Transformers Transmitters All other factory finished equipment shall be field painted as specified hereinafter and as shown on the Painting Schedule. 090120 ITEMS NOT PAINTED The following items shall not be painted, unless specifically called for: Aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic, rubber, stainless steel, chrome, everdur, or lead Buried or encased piping or conduit Exterior concrete Grease fittings Handrails Nameplates Serial numbers Steel encased in concrete or masonry Warning or operating instruction labels 1990 9-8 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 9 090130 PAINTING METAL SURFACES Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Finishing Schedule, all 00 metal shall be painted. Metal surfaces shall be primed and painted as specified in the following paragraphs. Steel and miscellaneous iron items which are to be built into masonry or concrete shall, unless otherwise noted, have no field painting. Steel and miscellaneous iron items which have had a shop primer and which will be concealed above the ceilings shall be field primed. This includes but is not limited to the unexposed underside of steel roof decks and structural steel items such as beams, channels, and angles. Touching up of these items shall be done after erection but before installation of the ceiling system. No further painting of these items will be required. 01 090131 SHOP PRIMING OF METALS Certain items have been listed to receive complete finish at the factory. Surfaces specified to be field sandblasted and galvanized surfaces, shall not be shop coated. All other ferrous surfaces, except stainless steel and surfaces specified or shown to receive epoxy or grease type coatings, shall receive a shop coat of primer compatible with the finish coats specified. Primers shall be as specified for field priming. Surface preparation shall be as specified hereinbefore. Shop primer shall be compatible with field primer and finish coats. Shop primer shall be applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 4.0 mils. 10 Pumps, electric motors, drives, and similar equipment containing bearings, seals, or gears shall not be sandblasted by the Contractor. If possible, the outer casings and housings shall be sandblasted at the point of manufacture prior to final assembly. The factory shall then apply the prime coat as specified in the Finish Schedule. If the Contractor provides evidence, satisfactory to the Engineer, that the factory can not perform the sandblasting or apply the prime coat as specified, one of the following procedures shall be selected by the Contractor: Alternative 1. This alternative shall apply if the factory can not perform the sandblasting specified: Surface Preparation: Factory Prime Coat: Field Intermediate and Finish Coats: SP -3 Carboline Carbosmastic 15, Tnemec Series 135, or Porter Magna -Mastic 7900, 5 mils. Use the complete system specified in the Finish Schedule. Alternative 2. This alternative shall apply if the factory can neither sandblast nor coat as specified: 1990 32668.10 Div. 9 Surface Preparation: Factory Prime Coat: SP -3, at the factory. Manufacturer's choice but must be compatible with the field primers listed below. 9-9 W3266B.10 Field Preparation: Field Primer: Field Intermediate and Finish Coats: SP -2 Carboline Carbomastic 15, Tnemec Series 135, or Porter Magna -Mastic 7900, 5 mils. Use the complete system specified in the Finish Schedule. Alternative 3. This alternative shall apply if the factory can sandblast before final assembly of the equipment but can not apply the coatings specified. In this case, the factory shall prepare the metal surface to SP -6 specifications and then the factory and the Contractor shall follow the remainder of the procedure outlined for Alternative 2. All shop primed metal surfaces shall be field primed as follows before the finish coats are applied. All abraded, scratched, or otherwise damaged areas in the shop applied prime coat shall be repaired. Repair shall consist of sanding smooth or commercial sandblasted to SP -6 and then spot priming. The entire surface shall then be given a second prime coat compatible with the shop prime coat and the finish coats. Where the entire shop priming is failing, weathered excessively, or where recommended by the paint manufacturer's representative, the entire shop prime coat shall be removed with SP -10 near -white sandblast surface preparation before repriming. Paint manufacturer's representative shall recommend changes in metal primers where specified primers and finish coats are not compatible. Changes shall be submitted for approval. Where the shop primer is not compatible with field primer and/or finish coats, the shop primer shall be removed by sandblasting to not less than SP -10 near -white sandblast. All shop primer shall be removed from all metal to be installed as submerged metal by sandblasting to near white SP -10. 090132 FIELD PRIMING OF METALS Galvanized, sherardized, aluminum, copper, or bronze surfaces to be painted shall be solvent cleaned and receive a surface preparation as specified hereinbefore, then either wash coated and primed or primed with a special primer in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer of the finish coats. Unless specifically specified otherwise by the paint manufacturer, the primer for aluminum shall be a zinc chromate type primer, Sherwin-Williams B50 -Y1, Glidden 471, or equal. Metal surfaces specified to receive an epoxy -polyurethane paint system shall be field primed as specified in 090144. 090135 MISCELLANEOUS UNSUBMERGED METALS Interior and exterior miscellaneous unsubmerged metals exposed to view that are not specified to be painted otherwise or left unpainted shall be painted with a long oil alkyd gloss enamel. 1990 9-10 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 9 These items shall include but not be limited to the following: Pipe hangers, supports, and saddles; conduits, cable tray hangers and supports. Motors, internal combustion engines, and motor and engine accessory equipment. Drive gear, speed reducer housings; belt, chain, and coupling housings inside and out); and gear drive miscellaneous equipment. Floor -mounted valve and gate operators and stands, and other valve operators and operator supports. Structural steel (where not specified under architectural coatings), crane and hoist rails, and exterior of tanks and other containment vessels (not otherwise specified). Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and all accessories. Exterior of conveyor and elevator housing including bucket elevators, screw conveyors, pneumatic transfer system, etc Sludge collector mechanisms, thickener mechanisms, and similar drive mechanisms; access bridges, support beams, and similar structures above the top of basin walls. Ladders, ladder guards, ferrous handrails, light standards, light fixtures, manhole covers, and hatchways. Other miscellaneous metals listed or not listed on the Painting Schedule. The coating shall consist of not less than two coats of the finish coat over one coat of field primer to a minimum dry film thickness for the system of 6 mils. Finish coats shall have not less than 32 percent pigment by weight and 42 percent solids by volume. Where special colors are required by safety requirements, OSHA, or specified in these Specifications, and are not available in the specified paint systems, the specified coating systems shall be top coated with an interior -exterior alkyd enamel as specified under COATING METAL PIPE to a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Finish systems shall be as follows or equal: GLIDDEN: Two or more coats of Glid-Guard Alkyd Tank and Structural Enamel No. 5221 over one coat of primer. KOPPERS: Two or more coats of Koppers Rustarmor 500 over one coat of primer. PORTER: Two or more coats of Porter IA -24. MOBIL: Two or more coats of M and F Enamel Series 20 over one coat of primer. SHERWIN-WILLIAMS: Two or more coats of Metalastic II Enamel Series 53 over one coat of primer. TNEMEC: Two or more coats of Enduratone Series 23 over one coat of primer. 1990 9-11 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 9 090143 SUBMERGED METAL Any steel or iron surfaces which are below the tops of the walls of channels or structures which will contain water shall be considered as submerged surfaces, even though they may be above the expected water level. In some cases it will be necessary to apply the paint coatings to these surfaces before installation to attain an acceptable coating and to prevent coating of other surfaces. All support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, etc. that are bolted to the concrete shall be painted on all sides. Cast iron gate thimbles need not be painted on the sides embedded in the concrete. Coal tar epoxy shall extend one inch into the area embedded in concrete. All submerged iron and steel surfaces not specified or indicated on the Finishing Schedule to be otherwise coated shall receive a coating of coal tar epoxy. 090143.02 COAL -TAR EPDXY COATING Where called for in the Finishing Schedule, indicated on Plans or specified, metal surfaces shall be coated with two or more coats of coal tar epoxy to a total dry film thickness of not less than 20 mils. Application of coal -tar epoxy shall be only at the jobsite unless specific approval is granted for offsite application. Offsite application will not be allowed unless by an applicator with proven, documented, acceptable experience in the application of coal tar epoxy systems. Only unopened containers shall be used to mix the coal tar epoxy paint. All mixing shall be done by power mixers. The time during pouring or stirring will not be allowed as mixing time. The minimum mixing time as recommended by the manufacturer shall be met by using a power mixer. Only unit quantities shall be mixed. Coal tar epoxy shall not be applied when the ambient and/or surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F ambient. The Contractor is hereby cautioned that the edges and corners of metal members are difficult places upon which to build the required thickness of paint. The required thickness must be applied to all surfaces, including the corners and edges, by applying as many spray coats as necessary or by additional brush coats on the corners and edges, if necessary, in order to build up the required thickness. Coal - tar epoxy shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall provide fans, heating devices, or other means as recommended by the paint manufacturer to prevent the formation of condensate or dew on the surface of the coating between coats and within the time period following application of the last coat. Each coat with the full thickness on all parts shall be applied prior to curing or setting of previous coat. The Contractor shall check the film thickness after application and before the coating has cured to determine that sufficient coating thickness has been applied before the paint is allowed to set overnight. If additional coating is necessary to obtain the required 1990 9-12 W3266B.10 326613.10 Div. 9 0 total coating thickness, it shall be applied the same day. Intent is that all coats be applied in one day. Checking and control of thickness at this stage shall be the Contractor's obligation and responsibility. Second and succeeding coats shall be applied over the previous coat as soon as its application does not cause sagging. In no case shall second and subsequent coats be delayed any longer than allowed by the following table or be applied after the previous coat has set or oxidized. Average Temperature, 50- 60 degrees 60 to 70 70 to 80 80 to 120 Degrees F Maximum Time Between Coats, Hours 36 24 12 4 A As remedial work, if the surface coating has been applied for more than the time limits listed in the table above and/or it is cured or set, and if it is found that bituminous coal tar epoxy coating has not been applied to the specified thickness, the areas that are too thin shall be sandblasted to remove the surface film from the coating. These sandblasted areas shall then be washed and cleaned with a solvent as recommended by the manufacturer, and shall be recoated within the time limits specified for coating over fresh coating. Washing or cleaning the surface of the paint with solvents or other solutions will not be a satisfactory substitute for the specified sandblasting where a painted surface is older than the time limits indicated above. In the event the Contractor shall recoat an over age coating surface without the sandblasting and solvent treatment specified above, the entire coating system, 41 down to the substrate, shall be removed by sandblasting or other means and a complete new coating system applied. Or s s Coal tar epoxy shall meet and conform with Government Specification Mil P-23236, with further qualification that the coal -tar epoxy manufacturer and product must be listed on the 1976 U.S. Navy Qualified Products List. Coal tar epoxy shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Coal tar epoxy shall be Porter Tarset Standard, Koppers 300M, Ameron 78, or equal. 090144 PAINTING ARCHITECTURAL METAL Doors, ventilators, louvers, grilles, exposed sheet metal, exposed flashing, and other architectural metals, structural or nonstructural, that is an integral part of the structure or building shall be painted as specified or as indicated on the Painting Schedule. All metal shall be primed as specified. The painting systems for interior and exterior architectural metals shall be as follows. 090144.01 FLAT FINISH Flat finish for interior and exterior architectural metal shall consist of two or more coats of exterior acrylic latex paint over one or more coats of primer applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 4.5 mils. Acrylic latex finish coats shall contain not less than 32 percent solids by volume. Coating systems shall be as follows or equal. 1990 32668.10 Div. 9 9-13 W3266B.10 GLIDDEN: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Glidden 3525 Exterior Latex applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. MOBIL: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of exterior latex paint Series 79 applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. PORTER: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of exterior latex Porter Series 16 applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. SHERWIN-WILLIAMS: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Sherwin- Williams Hi -Level Exterior Latex Paint Series B-42 applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 090144.02 SEMI -GLOSS FINISH Semi -gloss finish for interior and exterior architectural metal shall consist of two or more exterior acrylic latex finish coats over one or more coats of primer to a dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. Acrylic latex finish coats shall contain not less than 32 percent solids by volume and not less than 23 percent pigment by weight. Finish systems shall be the following or equal. GLIDDEN: Finish coats shall be Glidden Spred Latex Enamel 3900 applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. MOBIL: Finish coats shall be Mobil Series 44 Water Acrylic Enamel. SHERWIN-WILLIAMS: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Sherwin- Williams Series B-42 Metalatex Semi -gloss Enamel to a dry film thickness of not less than 3 mils. 090144.03 GLOSS FINISH Gloss finish for interior and exterior architectural metal shall consist of two or more coats of alkyd enamel applied over one or more coats of primer to a dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. Finish coats shall be not less than 35 percent solids by volume and 29 percent pigment by weight. Coating systems shall be as follows or equal. GLIDDEN: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel No. 14204 to a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. MOBIL: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Mobil Series 42 Gloss Water Acrylic Enamel. PORTER: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Porter I.A.-24 applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. SHERWIN-WILLIAMS: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Ken Lustral Enamel Series F65 applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. TNEMEC: Finish coats shall be two or more coats of Tnemec-gloss Series 2 to a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 1990 32668.10 Div. 9 9-14 W3266B.10 090145 UNDERGROUND METALS All exposed underground metals shall be coated. Pipe coatings are covered 10 under the individual pipe sections in DIVISION 15, PIPE AND PIPING SYSTEMS. 0 0 0 A Underground valves and valve boxes shall be coated with not less than two coats of asphalt varnish in accordance with AWWA C 500. Underground pipe flanges (excluding pipe), corrugated metal pipe couplings, flexible pipe couplings and miscellaneous underground metals not specified otherwise to receive a protective coating, shall be coated with not less than 20 mils of T.C. Mastic manufactured by the Tapecoat Company; Bitumastic No. 50 manufactured by the Koppers Company, Inc.; or equal. 090146.02 COATING METAL PIPE Color coded metal pipe shall be coated with a high gloss alkyd or a vinyl paint system as indicated on the Paint Schedule and specified below. Colors for color coating of pipe shall be as specified above. Where alkyd coating system is not indicated on the Painting Schedule, metal pipe shall be coated with the alkyd system. Metal pipe shall be power tool cleaned SP -3 or commer- cial blast cleaned SP -6. ALKYD SYSTEM: The alkyd system shall consist of two or more finish coats applied over a primer to a total dry film thickness of not less than 5 mils. Paint shall consist of not less than 35 percent solids by volume and 25 percent pigment by weight. Finish systems shall be the following or equal. Glidden: Apply one coat of Glidden No. 590 Glid-Guard Alkyd Tank and Structural Primer to black iron or steel or one coat of 5229 Glid-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer after metal pretreatment to galvanized surfaces followed by two or more coats of Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel. Koppers: Apply one coat of Koppers 622 Rust Penetrating Primer to black iron or steel or one coat of 622 Rust Penetrating Primer to galvanized surfaces after pretreatment followed by two or more coats of Rustarmor 500 Enamel. Mobil: Apply one coat of Mobil 13-R-53 Primer to black iron or one coat of Mobil 13-R-53 to galvanized iron after pretreatment. Sherwin-Williams: Apply one coat of Sherwin-Williams Kromik Metal Primer E41 N 1 to black iron or steel or one coat of Galvanized Iron Primer B50 A 1 after pretreatment to galvanized surfaces followed by two or more coats of Kem Lustral Enamel Series F65. VINYL SYSTEM: The vinyl system shall consist of one coat of vinyl wash primer followed by two coats of vinyl chloride -vinyl acetate copolymer applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 4 mils. Finish systems shall be the following or equal. Glidden: Apply one prime coat Glidden 5521 Vinyl -Cote Primer. Apply intermediate coat of Glidden 5522 Vinyl -Cote Hi -Build. Finish coat shall be Glidden 5523 Vinyl -Cote Enamel. 1990 9-15 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 9 Koppers: Apply one coat of Koppers 40 Passivator vinyl wash primer followed by two or more coats of Rigortex 3305 (intermediate coat and finish coat) . Mobil: Apply one coat of Mobil 13 Y 8 Val -Chem vinyl wash primer followed by two coats of Val -Chem Vinyl Enamel Series 80. Tnemec: Apply one coat of 32-1210 Vinoline W -P vinyl wash primer, followed by one coat of 34-1220 Vinoline Orange Intermediate, and finish coated with one or more coats of Vinoline Series 35. 090149 DISSIMILAR METALS Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with dissimilar metals, except Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, aluminum surfaces shall be kept from direct contact with said metal by use of neoprene gaskets or washers, polyethylene self-adhesive tape (two wraps of 20 -mil tape), or washers. Galvanizing or paint will not be considered as adequate protection. Aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with wood, concrete, or masonry construction shall be given a heavy coat of an alkali -resistant bituminous paint or two coats of a zinc chromate primer before installation. The bituminous paint shall be Koppers Bitumastic Black Solution, Porter Tarmastic No. 100, Tnemec 449 Heavy -Duty Black, or equal. The paint shall be applied as it is received from the manufacturer without the addition of any thinner, and the surface shall be cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. Not less than two coats shall be applied. Zinc chromate shall be allowed to air dry 24 hours before the aluminum is placed in contact with the concrete. Paint shall be Sherwin-Williams zinc chromate primer B50 Y1, Glidden No. 5533 zinc chromate primer, Mobil 13-Y-5, Carboline Modified Alkyd GP -10 or equal. All exposed surfaces shall be cleaned of any coating before installation. Coatings shall be continuous and holiday free. All stainless steel bolt and screw surfaces in contact with aluminum shall be coated with Never-Seez by Never Seez Compound Corp., WLR No. 111 by Oil Research Inc., or equal. 090150 PAINTING WOOD SURFACES Wood surfaces shall be painted where specified or indicated on the Painting Schedule. In general, all exposed wood shall be painted unless specified otherwise. All wood trim shall be sanded lightly and dusted between coats to remove all spatter, runs, brush marks, and other imperfections before application of each succeeding coat of paint. All exterior wood primers shall be mildew -resistant. Color of wood surfaces shall be formulated to match existing wood frame structures in the vicinity of the new generator building. The District shall approve all colors prior to application. 1990 9-16 W3266B.10 32669.10 Div. 9 090152 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR SEMI -GLOSS FINISH Where called for on the Painting Schedule or specified, wood shall be painted with one coat of primer and two coats of finish paint. The alkyd paint system shall be applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 5 mils. The painting systems shall be the following or equal. Volume of solids of the finish paint shall be not less than 42 percent. GLIDDEN: One coat of Glidden No. 555 followed by two coats of Glidden No. 4600 Series. SHERWIN-WILLIAMS: One coat of Sherwin-Williams B-49 W2 followed by two coats of Sherwin-Williams B-82 Series. 41 090154 NATURAL AND TRANSPARENT STAIN WOOD FINISH 0 0 0 Where called for on the Finishing Schedule or specified, wood shall be finished natural. Wood doors, wood door and window frames, wood door and window trim, wood base, sills, and similar wood items occurring adjacent to wood wall paneling shall be natural finish and match the paneling in color, texture, and appearance. The paneling manufacturer's standard trim and stain kits shall be used where possible. All wood pieces used at doors and windows adjacent to paneling shall be milled and finished in such a way as to match the adjacent paneling as near as possible. The finish shall consist of the following: A. Fill holes and imperfections with wood paste filler and sand smooth. B. If staining is required, apply the panel manufacturer's transparent stain where stain is required to match paneling or apply stain as selected by the Engineer if staining is required on the Painting Schedule. Stain shall be Cabot, Glidden, Sherwin-Williams, or equal where matching of paneling is not required. Stain exposed to the exterior shall be exterior type stain. Stain shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform appearance. C. Apply sealer if recommended by finish manufacturer. Sealer shall be as recommended by the finish manufacturer. D. Lightly sand and dust. E. Apply one coat of Glidden 37, Sherwin-Williams A67F1, or equal for interior. Apply one coat of Glidden 40, Sherwin-Williams A67V4, or equal for exterior. F. Lightly sand and dust. G. Same as under preceding paragraph C. 1990 32668.10 Div. 9 9-17 W3266B.10 090182 NONSKID FLOOR OR WALKWAY Where indicated on the Plans or specified, floor and walkways shall be skid - proofed as follows. An additional coat of paint shall be applied to the surface. While the surface is still wet, the area to be made nonskid shall have blown onto it clean, sharp, dry silica sand of a size all passing a 20 -mesh screen, but all retained on a 40 -mesh screen. The surface of the paint and sand shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours, after which time the excess sand shall be broomed off and the area given a final coating of the same paint applied to such thickness as to completely cover the sand grains but not to fill the valleys between. The area outside that which is to be skid -proofed shall be protected from sand by masking tape during the operations. 090199 FINISHING SCHEDULE Painting shall be as specified in this section of the Specifications and as indicated on the Plans and specified herein. In general, all steel, iron, and wood surfaces shall be painted unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise. Concrete surfaces shall be painted only where indicated or specified. Aluminum surfaces shall not be painted unless specifically indicated or specified. The Finishing Schedule sets forth a listing of the type of items and type of paint system which they shall receive. This Schedule shall compliment the lists of items to be painted listed hereinbefore. This listing is not necessarily complete, and items of a like nature as shown on the Finishing Schedule shall be painted the same as if they were included in the Finishing Schedule. In case of question as to whether an item is to be painted, or as to type of paint system to use, the Engineer shall be consulted to render a judgment. FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Schedule of metal surfaces to receive paint. 1. Coal tar epoxy (090143 and 090143.02). a. In general, all ferrous metals exposed to wastewater and/or atmosphere above wastewater shall be coated; including but not limited to the following items: 1) In bolted steel spill containment tank, pump sumps, and other flow structures, coat bell rings, bulkheads, and all miscellaneous ferrous metals. 2) All ferrous metals in contact with wastewater. 3) Refer to 090143. 1990 9-18 W3266B.10 32669.10 Div. 9 2. Coal tar mastic (090145). a. Underground flexible couplings (except where alternates are 0 allowed). b. CMP couplings. c. Buried valves and valve boxes. 40 3. Alkyd gloss enamel (090146 and 090146.2). A a. Piping, supports, and piping insulation (all PVC pipe exposed shall be coated as specified under 090170). b. Valves, valve operators, stands, and all piping appurtenances. B. Schedule of wood surfaces to receive paint. 1. Painted wood (090150 and 090152). a. All wood on interior and exterior of all buildings shall have semigloss finish with the exception of finishes required to match existing exteriors. 1990 9-19. W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 9 0 100100 GENERAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 DIVISION 10 BUILDING SPECIALTIES SECTION 10-A SAFETY EQUIPMENT This Section of the Specifications includes safety equipment to be installed at the new emergency generator building. The Contractor shall furnish and install, as called for in these Specifications or as required for proper operation of equipment, all items specified in this Section, including bolts, caulking materials, hangers, supports, and such incidental materials and equipment as are required to make the items complete and ready for use. The equipment furnished by the Contractor shall meet with the acceptance of the pertinent agency or organization controlling quality and safety of such equipment. Pertinent agencies or organizations shall be recognized nationally or shall be public agencies of the State of California and shall include OSHA, Cal -OSHA, UL, NFPA, ASME, and others as applicable. 100130 FIRST AID KIT The Contractor shall supply one (1) 24 -unit first aid kit that meets OSHA, NFPA, and Federal Specification GG -K -391A requirements. The kit shall be Mine Safety Appliances Company Catalog No. 2478, Van Waters and Rogers No. 56613-048, or equal. 100140 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Three (3) fire extinguishers shall be furnished and installed in the new emergency generator building. The extinguishers shall be Halon extinguishers, 17 -pound capacity, and contain Halon 1211. Each shall be U.L. rated Class ABC extinguishers. An area at least 3 feet square around each fire extinguisher shall be painted OSHA red. Extinguishers shall be installed in accordance with NEPA Phamphlet No. 10. 1990 10A-1. W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 10-A i SECTION 10-B IDENTIFICATION DEVICES 100200 GENERAL Submittals shall include manufacturer's catalog data, color samples, template drawings, installation details, and selected color. All installations shall be vandal -resistant where possible. Graphics shall be of highest quality and shall have smooth, uniform colored finishes. Manufactured items shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Installation shall be level, plumb, true to plane, and securely attached to structures. 100220 PLASTIC SIGNS Plastic room signs shall be acrylic plastic with white vinyl letters. Projecting signs shall be double with internal frame and concealed attachment. Colors shall be as selected by the Engineer. Lettering shall be "Helvetica Medium" style. Manufacturer's recommended adhesive foam, adhesive, and other attachment devices shall be provided as required. Installation shall be without exposed screws. 100230 SIGN SCHEDULES Plastic and metal signs shall be provided in accordance with the following schedules. Exact locations of all signs shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. 100238 PLASTIC SIGN SCHEDULE Legend Location FIRE EXTINGUISHER At each extinguisher (in OSHA red). 1990 10B-1. w3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 10-B i DIVISION 11 PROCESS EQUIPMENT NOT USED) 1990 11-1. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 11 0 DIVISION 12 PUMPS SECTION 12-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PUMPS 120100 GENERAL The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test all pumps and drives as indicated on the Plans, or as specified herein. It is the intent of these Specifications to obtain pumps and drives of highest quality construction only, for heavy-duty continuous service or for intermittent service, whichever imposes the most severe service on the pump. Equipment of lesser quality will not be accepted. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the quality of the equipment that will be accepted. Pumps are not intended to necessarily be standard units. Pumps will be installed at an elevation of approximately 6,500 feet above sea level and shall be suitable for use at such altitude. In addition to this section of the Specifications the pump shall conform to the applicable requirements of other Contract Documents including the following Divisions of the Specifications: DIVISION 1 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 9 - FINISHES DIVISION 14 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DIVISION 15 - PIPING DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION Each pump shall be furnished as a complete, ready -to -install unit by a single supplier, including but not limited to pump, motor, mountings, and/or drive shaft assembly. All pumps for the same service shall be of one make and manufacturer and identical in all respects and characteristics. Unless otherwise noted, controls shall be supplied with the pump. Pumps that have mechanical defects or do not meet the requirements for head - capacity, horsepower, efficiency, and vibration will be rejected, and shall be replaced without additional cost to the Owner for furnishing, removal, reinstallation, and retesting. Mechanical defects shall include excessive vibration, improper balancing of any rotating parts, improper tolerances, binding, excessive bearing or motor heating, defective materials, including materials that do not conform to the Specifications, improper fitting of parts, and any other defect which will in time damage the pump or unreasonably impair its efficiency or operation. Pump friction losses, including entrance, column, shaft, and discharge losses shall be added to the total dynamic heads that are specified under each pump in order to get the head that the impeller must pump against. Pump head - capacity curves shall indicate that these losses have been included. 1990 12A-1 W3266B.10 326613.10 Div. 12-A 120110 CONSTRUCTION Any bronze used in the manufacture of any pump shall not contain more than 2 percent aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc. Impellers, cases, seals, shafts, bearings, and any other item which does not comply with these Specifications as to its metallurgy, material, or hardness shall be replaced without additional cost to the Owner. Except for submerged or special service pumps, or as approved by the Engineer, pumps or adjacent piping within 3 inches of its pump flange shall be tapped at the suction and discharge for pressure gauges. Where packing gland drains are required or where water flushing or sealing of packing glands or mechanical seals is specified or shown, the Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary piping and valves. Except for submerged or special service pumps, or as approved by the Engineer, all pumps shall be provided with drip pans piped to drains. 120120 INSTALLATION Before installation, the Contractor shall furnish five sets of installation instructions and five sets of lubrication instructions for each type of pump. These instructions shall include detailed instructions for adjustment and recommendations for the proper type of lubricant. Pumps shall be installed and adjusted as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in such manner that connecting piping will not impose any strain whatever on any pump. Pumps shall be set upon level, fully grouted foundations, so that connecting flanges, screwed connections, or flexible connections will meet without strain or distortion. Pump foundation pads shall be doweled and keyed to the floor slab upon which it rests. The pump leveling nuts shall be blocked out during grouting of foundations, the grout allowed to set for no less than three days, the leveling nuts loosened and following by grouting of the blockouts, with nonshrink grout. Any other proposed method of installation shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval prior to installation. Pumps shall be level when installed. 120130 MOTORS Motors shall be as specified in each Section of this DIVISION 12, and as specified in Section 14. The rated horsepower and full -load amps shall not be exceeded at any point on the pump curve within the specified operating range of the pumps. 120140 TESTS In addition to the tests required by DIVISION 14, each pump and driver, unless otherwise specified, shall be field tested for compliance with these Specifications as to head -capacity and horsepower. Where specified, each pump shall be factory tested at the place of manufacture. Factory tests shall include head -capacity, efficiency, and brake horsepower. Four copies of certified test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before the pump is delivered to the jobsite. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all manpower, facilities, power, and equipment required for making tests. Field and factory tests shall be 1990 12A-2 w3266B.10 32665.10 Div. 12-A 0 0 A 0 0 conducted in accordance with the latest requirements of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Pumps with variable speed drives shall be tested at maximum speed, and at the average and minimum speeds listed under the specification for the pumps. A copy of actual test data shall be furnished to the Engineer. In case factory testing of pumps provided is not specified, certified test curves for pumps of the same type as provided shall be submitted with the shop drawings. 120145 VIBRATION Tests for acceptable vibration shall be made, at no additional cost to the Owner, in the field on each pump system, which in the opinion of the Engineer, seem to have excessive vibration. All field tests shall be running tests with the pump pumping the product for which it is intended and each pump system shall be tested separately with no other pumps running. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. Amplitude as used in this Specification, shall mean total peak -to -peak displacement. The required test for acceptable vibration will be the measurement of this peak -to -peak displacement and will be performed with an IRD Vibration Meter, Model 306; Bently-Nevada TK -8; or equal. No pump, complete with drive system, in place at the jobsite, shall exceed acceptable field vibration limits given in the latest revisions of the Hydraulic Institute Standards, no limits (if any) stated under the individual pump specification. All pumps shall be free of static unbalance; shall be free of dynamic unbalance up to the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; shall be free of torsional vibration from 10 percent below the minimum speed to 10 percent above the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; and shall be free of apparent unbalance caused by defective bearings, by close fittings parts which may rub on the rotating parts intermittently, or by loose discs or rotor parts, unbalanced loads, or by oil whip. 120147 WARNING SIGNS Warning signs shall be furnished and installed as specified in Section 14-A. 120148 EQUIPMENT GUARDS Equipment guards shall be furnished and installed as specified in Section 14-A. 120149 PAINTING Requirements for painting of equipment shall be as specified in DIVISION 9. 120150 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall submit for review to the Engineer, sufficient literature, detailed specifications, and drawings to show dimensions, make, style, speed, size, type, horsepower, head -capacity, efficiency, materials used, design features, internal construction, weights, and any other information required by the Engineer for review of all pumping equipment. For pumps, certified 1990 12A-3 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 12-A test curves shall be submitted showing this specified data. No pumping equipment will be accepted, and installation will not be allowed, until such review has been completed. Shop drawings submitted for review also shall include electrical diagrams, schematic control diagrams, and a detailed description of how the control system is to function. Submittal information for control panels to be furnished with equipment shall be in accordance with the head "Control Panels" below. Additional requirements for information to be included with shop drawings are specified with the particular piece of equipment. As specified in DIVISION 1, SPECIAL CONDITIONS, copies of each approved shop drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer, prior to completion of the Contract, for each piece of equipment or each system. This shall include all drawings, lists, schedules, etc., larger in size than 11 -inch by 17 -inch, for all pumping equipment. 120160 OPERATING MANUALS The Contractor shall furnish three (3) sets of acceptable bound operating, installation, and maintenance instructions covering each component and each assembly furnished under this Contract. Manuals of instruction shall be furnished prior to equipment delivery. The operating, installation, and maintenance instructions shall include as a minimum the following data for each item furnished hereunder. A. Lubrication Schedule, if required. B. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures and schedules. C. Recommended spare parts. D. Parts lists by generic title, material of construction, and identification number (actual manufacturer's number, not supplier's). E. Disassembly and reassembly instructions. F. Recommended troubleshooting and start-up procedures. G. Electric schematics. H. List of special tools and description of use, as specified previously. In addition, the instructions shall include prints of the installation drawings. 1990 12A-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 12-A A 120161 CONTROL PANELS Where specified for an individual system or piece of equipment, a control panel shall be furnished with the equipment. Control panels shall conform to the requirements of DIVISION 16 and as specified herein. Control panels shall be furnished with all components within the panel rigidly mounted, all wiring within the panel brought to terminal blocks, and all control air lines within the panel bulkheaded. Pressure gauges, pressure reducing valves, and three-way ball valves shall be mounted on the front of the panel. Pressure gauges shall be 4 -1/2 -inch diameter, panel -mounted units with ranges as specified or as indicated on the Plans. The panels shall be ANSI 61, light gray. All lights, instruments, valves, and other equipment mounted on the control panels shall have an identifying label on them. These labels shall be black phenolic or lamicoid plastic with white letters and shall be fastened to the control panel with round head stainless steel screws. Prior to fabrication of the control panels, the Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the control panels, including the proposed layout of all equipment to be installed in the control panels, to the Engineer for review. 1990 12A-5. w3266B.10 01 32668.10 Div. 12-A r i DIVISION 12 PUMPS SECTION 12-B SUBMERSIBLE GRINDER PUMPS 120201 GENERAL Provisions of Section 12-A, General Requirements for Pumps are applicable to the equipment specified herein. Some equipment will require modification from the standard to meet the Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish and install, ready for use, six (6) self priming centrifugal, submersible grinder pumps, as indicated on the Plans and specified herein. The pump shall be complete with all parts and accessories as outlined herein and DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL, and with all other items not specified but which are required to make the system functional and suited for the service intended. Installation shall include guide rails and automatic disconnect/reconnect couplings and check valves recommended for use with the supplied pump by the pump manufacturer. The pumps, motors and controls shall be furnished to the Contractor by one manufacturer or supplier who shall be responsible to the Contractor for furnishing, testing, supervising installation, and warranting the system. The manufacturer or supplier furnishing the pumping system will be referred to hereinafter as the primary supplier. The primary supplier shall be the authorized distributor of the pump manufacturer. A one-year warranty is required for this equipment as outlined elsewhere in these Specifications. The responsibility of the primary supplier shall extend to the selection and furnishing of the pump, motor, and accessories. The primary supplier shall be responsible for providing a system which has no critical vibrations at all speeds and loads between the maximum rated and minimum capacity of the pump. It shall be the primary supplier's responsibility to eliminate critical vibrations which may occur from the pump impeller to and through the motor shaft as the equipment is rotated from maximum to minimum speed and from minimum to maximum speed. It shall be the responsibility of the primary supplier to insure that the supplied pump and engine will operate under the conditions shown on the Plans and specified herein. 120210 PUMPS 120211 GENERAL The pumps shall be heavy duty horizontal suction, vertical discharge, self priming centrifugal, solids handling grinder type with 2 -inch NPT female discharge connection. The pump shall be Peabody -Barnes Model SGV504, or equal. The pumps are to be used for the pumping of raw domestic sewage and will be installed at an elevation of approximately 6,500 feet above sea level. The pump shall be designed and adapted and fully guaranteed for this use. 1990 12B-1 3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 12-B 120215 PUMP CONSTRUCTION Pump volute, motor housing and seal plate shall be of gray cast iron ASTM A-48), Class 30, with smooth surfaces devoid of blowholes and other irregularities. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of stainless steel Series 300. The impeller shall be 12 vane bronze vortex, dynamically and hydraulically balanced, single stage, single suction, one piece, submersible, enclosed non - clogging type. The shredding ring and cutter shall be hardened 440C Stainless Steel with a hardness of Rockwell C-55. All hardware shall be corrosion resistant stainless steel (Series 300). Shaft shall be 416 stainless steel. Seal shall be double mechanical type in oil filled chamber. Material for stationary faces shall be ceramic and rotating faces shall be carbon. Supplied pumps shall include carrying handle, overcurrent and over -temperature protection. The pumps shall be three phase , 460 volt, submersible grinder pumps. Overload protection shall be provided by overload heater elements in the control panel. All normal wearing parts as well as full replacement pumps shall be readily available from a factory warehouse. Pumps requiring specialty parts shall not be used on this Project. 120216 PUMP CHARACTERISTICS The pumps shall perform according to the following schedule. Pump Schedule Characteristic Number of Pumps Design flow, gpm Submersible Grinder Pumps 6 ES -1 73 ES -2 75 ES -3 85 Design total dynamic head, feet ES -1 98 ES -2 92 ES -3 79 Minimum shutoff head, feet 150 (all pumps) Motor speed, maximum rpm 3,600 (nom.) Motor horsepower, minimum 5 Discharge diameter, inches 2 (NPT) 1990 12B-2 3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 12-B 120220 MOTOR Motor shall be 460 volt, three (3) phase in a NEMA B enclosure, completely oil filled, squirrel cage induction. Insulation shall be Class B. Motor shall be as manufactured by Peabody Barnes, or equal. The motor shall be furnished by the primary supplier and shall conform to the applicable requirements of the general motor specification contained in Section 14. In addition to these requirements the engine shall conform to the following requirements. The motor design shall be coordinated with the requirements of the pump and shall have the following physical and electrical characteristics. Enclosure Type NEMA B: completely oil filled, squirrel cage induction Horsepower 5 Synchronous Speed 3,600 RPM, maximum Service Factor 1.15 Full Load efficiency 86.5 percent, minimum The motor nameplate shall tabulate all of the above data. The motor shall have a continuous duty power rating suitable for the horsepower requirements of the pump after derating to environmental factors. Motor shall be cooled by a system capable of maintaining safe engine operating temperatures (as set forth by manufacturer) under the expected operating loads, and subject to the expected maximum ambient temperatures in the pump station enclosure. Motor shall be supplied with 25 foot power leads including pressure grommet for sealing and strain relief. 120225 INSTALLATION Pump and motor shall be assembled at the factory and adjusted as specified and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in such manner that connecting piping will not impose any strain whatsoever on any pump. Pump shall be set upon level foundations, so that connecting flanges, screwed connections, or flexible connections will meet without strain or distortion. Pumps shall be level when installed. 120226 GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM The pumps shall be supplied with a guide rail and breakaway discharge elbow. The discharge elbow shall be permanently installed in the wet well along with the discharge piping. The pumps shall be guided onto the discharge elbow by the guide rails. The guide rails shall be supported at the top by an upper bracket and at the bottom by a stainless steel base. The guide rails shall not bear the weight of the pump. The area between the sump bottom and the pump shall be free and clear of any additional support legs or guide pipes. 1990 123-3 3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 12-B 120227 ACCESSORIES 1. Lifting Cable and Fittings - Each pump shall be supplied with 316 stainless steel wire rope capable of lifting the pump and motor. The cable shall be of sufficient length to reach the top of the wet well. All necessary fittings shall be provided, including a stainless steel eyebolt installed near the top of the wet well. All fittings shall be stainless steel. 120230 PAINTING The pumps and motors shall be painted as specified in Division 9. 120240 FLOAT SWITCHES AND CONTROLS Requirements for float switches and controls shall be as specified herein, and as shown on the Plans. All control components shall be as specified in Division 16. All controls shall be activated by float switches. All controls and annunciator lights shall be housed in NEMA 4X panels mounted as indicated on the Plans. Control panels at each station shall contain the following controls/annunciators: 1. No start/Pump shutdown annunciator 2. Push button start/stop controls 3. High water 4. Manual low level shut-off 5. Low water alarm 6. Automatic lead and lag pump alternation 7. Manual override to allow pumps in each station to operate at the same time. (Pumps cannot operate in parallel otherwise.) 8. External plug (contained in NEMA 4 enclosure) and controls to allow each station to be operated by a individual emergency generator. Float switches shall be installed in each pump station to serve the following functions: 1. Low water alarm/redundant pump off. 2. Low level pump shut-off. 3. Lead pump on. 4. High water alarm. 1990 12B-4 3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 12-B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 120250 TESTS The pump and driver shall be assembled at the factory and tested both at the factory and in the field for compliance with these Specifications as to head -capacity and horsepower. Factory tests shall include head -capacity, efficiency, and brake horsepower. Four copies of certified test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before the pump is delivered to the jobsite. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall furnish all manpower, facilities, power, and equipment required for making tests. Field and factory tests shall be conducted in accordance with the latest requirements of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 120255 VIBRATION Tests for acceptable vibration shall be made, at no additional cost to the Owner, in the field on each pump system. All field tests shall be running tests with the pump pumping the product for which it is intended, and each pump system shall be tested separately with no other pumps running. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. Amplitude as used in this Specification, shall mean total peak -to -peak displacement. The required test for acceptable vibration will be the measurement of this peak -to -peak displacement and shall be performed with an IRD Vibration Meter, Model 306; Bently-Nevada TK -8; or equal. No pump, complete with drive system, in place at the jobsite, shall exceed acceptable field vibration limits given in the latest revisions of the Hydraulic Institute Standards, or limits (if any) stated under the individual pump specification. All pumps shall be free of static unbalance; shall be free of dynamic unbalance up to the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; shall be free of torsional vibration from 10 percent below the minimum speed to 10 percent above the maximum speed of the pump and drive system; and fitting parts which may rub on the rotating parts intermittently, or by loose discs or rotor parts, unbalanced loads, or by oil whip. 120260 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall submit for review to the Engineer, sufficient literature, detailed specifications, and drawings to show dimensions, make, style, speed, size, type, horsepower, head -capacity, efficiency, materials used, design features, internal construction, weights, and any other information required by the Engineer for review of all pumping equipment. For pumps, certified equipment will be accepted, and installation will not be allowed, until such review has been completed. Shop drawings submitted for review also shall include electrical diagrams, schematic control diagrams, and a detailed description of how the control system is to function. 1990 123-5. 3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 12-8 DIVISION 13 NOT USED) 1990 13-1. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 13 i 6 0 DIVISION 14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 14-A GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 140100 GENERAL Specifications contained in this section shall apply to all items of mechanical equipment the same as if these provisions were contained in the individual section of the Specifications for the equipment or any other Division herein. Provisions specified in other parts of the Specifications apply to this Division. Applicable provisions are included in: DIVISION 1 - SPECIAL PROVISIONS DIVISION 5 - METALS DIVISION 9 - FINISHES DIVISION 15 - PIPE AND PIPING SYSTEMS DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION All items of equipment shall be the product of a manufacturer experienced in the design, construction, and operation of equipment for the purpose required, and who shall have established a record of successful operation of such equipment manufactured or produced by them. When two or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, they shall be products of the same manufacturer. Equipment shall be made up of parts which are designed to act as a unit; and the manufacturer shall guarantee that when the component parts are assembled into the final unit, these parts will fit and operate satisfactorily. The equipment manufacturer's responsibility shall extend to the selection and mounting of gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries required for proper operation. If necessary, modifications shall be made in manufacturer's standard product to make it conform to the specific requirements of the Plans and Specifications and to requirements contained in regulations issued by public agencies. All equipment shall include all production line improvements made to the delivery or contract date. All mechanical items shall be rated heavy-duty by the manufacturer. Elevation of this project above sea level is approximately 6,500 feet. All mechanical equipment shall conform thereto. 1990 14A-1 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 14 Structural steel shall conform to AS M A 36. Iron castings shall be tough close -grained gray iron castings in ac ordance with ASTM A 48. Parts of equipment shall be amply p occur during operation and for any adi fabrication, transportation, handl otherwise specified, shall be desig AFBMA B-10 rating is not less than 40, oportioned for all stresses which may itional stresses which may occur during ng, and erection. Bearings, unless ed such that at maximum loadings the 00 hours. The furnishing and installation of e• ipment shall include testing, painting, checking levels and alignment, fur ishing and placing of lubricants of whatever type, and furnishing of factory -trained service mechanics or engineers where specified. All equii•ment when finally installed shall be complete and ready for operation wit out binding or overloading of critical components or motors. The Contracto shall furnish at no extra cost to the Owner all appurtenances, piping, valves, fittings, wiring, supports, hangers, and other devices as are required to place the equipment in first-class operating condition and in a neat and orkmanlike manner. Fasteners for aluminum shall be stainless steel. Steel, other than stainless steel, shall be isolated from aluminum with stainless steel, neoprene, or other approved material. Bronze, which will be in contact wi manufacture of any equipment, shalt aluminum nor more than 6 percent of zin th water or any liquid, used in the not contain more than 2 percent of c. Manufacturers or suppliers of equipment furnished under this Contract shall guarantee said equipment for one year following the date of acceptance of the completed Contract by the Owner. 140105 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall submit shop drat furnished under this Contract. The specified in DIVISION 1. Prior to s shall review the information for compl be reviewed by the Engineer, and only approval of the information. Addit specified in DIVISION 1. Shop drawing; shall consist of a cover and specifications page and number to summary, outline drawings, cut-aw specification lists, and all informa proposed equipment meets the Spec reproducible transparencies of shop dr the specified number of copies. S ings on all mechanical equipment to be umber of copies submitted shall be as ibmitting the drawings, the Contractor teness. Only complete information will after the Contractor has signified his onal provisions on shop drawings are sheet, which indicates drawing number, hich referenced, intended use and data ay drawings, parts lists, material ion required to substantiate that the ifications. In some special cases wings shall be furnished in addition to hop drawings submittals will not be considered complete if cut -away or assembly drawings with part and material specification lists are not included. Shop drawings for motors shall incluse published dimension sheets and shall include a motor data sheet which shows all the motor characteristics, including horsepower, voltage, code etter, design letter, service factor, 1990 14 -2 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 14 enclosure, and insulation. All characteristics of the motor shall be shown on the data sheet which shall have been reviewed and found acceptable by the Engineer prior to delivery of the motor. The Contractor shall provide calculations and details on all parts individually and severally to show that the equipment offered satisfies the performance, strength, vibration, and other requirements of these Specifications. 140106 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS The Contractor shall furnish copies of operation and maintenance manuals for each system or item as specified in DIVISION 1. These manuals shall be broken down into sections and indexed. The sections shall include Mechanical Equipment, Automatic and Special Valves, Control Systems, Electrical, and others as necessary. Under each section there shall be a description of the operation and maintenance, lubrication schedules, and installation instructions of each item. All sections shall be labeled and each item shall be sublabeled. There shall be included in the front of each booklet an index laminated with plastic on both sides for rough use. Each booklet shall be bound in hard cover and the booklets shall be delivered prior to installation of any operating equipment. No acceptance of any equipment will be made until the complete manuals have been submitted, evaluated, and found acceptable. One Contractor's copy of the complete manual shall be at the jobsite available for use by field personnel and the Engineer during installation, start-up, and testing of the equipment. 140110 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Installation of equipment shall not begin until the instructions covering that part of the equipment, as specified hereinbefore, have been supplied to the Engineer. Equipment shall be installed complete and ready to operate. In the installation of equipment none but mechanics skilled in the various trades shall be employed. Welding shall be by electric arc and shall be done by qualified welders in accordance with applicable welding codes. Metal work to be embedded in concrete shall be accurately placed and held in correct position while the concrete is being placed. The surface of all metal work to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately before concrete is placed. Anchor bolts shall be cast in place when the concrete is poured. Anchors shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer to develop the full strength of the bolt. No use shall be made of flush shells or concrete anchors. Anchor bolts for heavy equipment, unless otherwise detailed, shall be encased in metal tubing as indicated on the Plans. Pump and other similar foundations shall be left 1 inch below the grade of machine base unless otherwise noted on the Plans. After the proper setting of machine for alignment and grade, the recess below the base, together with recess between the anchor bolt and the metal tube, shall be grouted and carefully finished with nonshrink grout as specified in DIVISION 3. 1990 14A-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 14 Moving parts of equipment and machinery shall be carefully installed, tested for operation, and adjusted so that all parts move freely and function to secure satisfactory operation. Piping required for proper operation of equipment shall be furnished and installed. Piping layouts may require modification from that indicated on the Plans depending on equipment furnished. All costs for piping or piping modifications required to suit the particular equipment furnished shall be borne by the Contractor. 140111 ALIGNMENT OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT In every case where a drive motor is connected to a driven piece of equipment by a flexible coupling, the coupling halves shall be disconnected and the alignment between the motor and the equipment checked and corrected after the complete unit has been leveled on its foundation, and again after grout has set and foundation bolts have been tightened. In general, checking and correcting the alignment shall follow the procedures set up in the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Instructions for Installation, and Operation and Maintenance of Centrifugal Pumps. Equipment shall be properly leveled and brought into angular and parallel alignment. Equipment bases shall not be grouted nor foundation bolts finally tightened until all piping connections are complete and in satisfactory alignment with no strain transmitted to the equipment. After the seven-day test has been run successfully, the Contractor shall dowel the motor and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 140115 MORTAR AND GROUT Special nonshrink mortar or grout shall be used in the placement of all heavy equipment and equipment bases. Nonshrink mortar shall be as specified in DIVISION 3. Machinery shall first be perfectly aligned and leveled by means of steel wedges and shims near anchor bolts. Anchor bolts shall be tightened against the shims on wedges before placing grout. Before placement of grout, equipment shall again be checked for level and alignment. Grout shall then be thoroughly packed into place, filling all voids under the base of equipment. Grout around all machinery bases shall be neatly pointed. All sandblast, grease, and debris shall be removed before any grouting is done. 140118 PAINTING Equipment shall be painted in accordance with the requirements of DIVISION 9. 1990 14-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 14 140120 MOTORS Motors shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA Standards and shall be as specified herein unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specifications. Not all motors are intended to be standard design motors; some motors may require special features in order to meet specified requirements. Motors, unless otherwise specified, shall be constant -speed, squirrel -cage, induction type with roller or ball bearings in accordance with NEMA Standards and as specified in DIVISION 16; and shall be 460 -volt, 3-phase, 60 -hertz for the mechanical equipment. Two -speed motors shall be dual winding. Motors 1 horsepower and larger shall be insulated for wet area application. The winding shall be given a minimum of three (3) dips and bakes of insulating varnish and shall receive a sealer coat of epoxy or silicone. The nameplate shall read "Special Class B or F Epoxy or Silicone Insulated." The individual Sections will generally indicate enclosure required for each application. The following shall govern in case enclosure is not specified. Electric motors which are mounted inside and protected from the weather: horizontal motors shall be of splashproof construction with stainless steel rodent screens. Vertical motors shall be WP -1 enclosure with stainless steel rodent screens. Electric motors which are exposed to the weather or severe moisture conditions; horizontal and vertical motors shall be totally enclosed constructed. Totally enclosed motors shall have drain holes at the lowest point in the case for condensate drainage. The service factor for motors shall be as specified in the various Sections. If not specified, it shall be at least 1.15. The maximum applied load shall not exceed the nameplate horsepower. The amperage at maximum applied load shall not exceed the full -load nameplate amperage value. All motors shall be rated at 40 degrees C ambient with not more than 55 degrees C rise and shall have a minimum of Class B insulation as specified before for full horsepower motors. Fractional horsepower motors shall have Class B insulation. Single-phase motors, unless otherwise specified, shall be rated 40 degrees C ambient. Motors shall conform to the latest ANSI, NEMA, and IEEE Standards for motors of the specified class and rating. Unless specified otherwise for a particular piece of equipment, motor bearings shall be of the anti -friction type with an AFBMA B-10 life rating of not less than 25,000 hours for integral horsepower motors and 10,000 hours for fractional horsepower motors; motor bearings shall be grease or oil lubricated with convenient provisions for inspection and servicing. All motors except for hoisting equipment, heat pumps, unit heaters, submersible grinder pumps, and slop and lube oil transfer pumps shall be 1990 14A-5 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 14 special high efficiency type. The minimum full load motor efficiency and power factor for high efficiency type motors shall be as listed hereinafter. Full load efficiency and power factor shall be shown on the nameplate. 1 Full Load Full Load Rating, Rating, Percent Percent ha rpm Eff. PF hE rpm Eff. PF 1,800 84.0 79 30 3,600 91.0 91 1,200 78.5 75 1,800 93.0 86 1,200 92.4 85 1-1/2 3,600 81.5 91 40 3,600 91.7 90 1,800 84.0 79 1,800 93.0 87 1,200 82.5 75 1,200 93.0 85 2 3 5 3,600 84.0 89 50 3,600 91.7 91 1,800 84.0 79 1,800 94.1 87 1,200 84.0 68 1,200 93.0 86 3,600 82.5 89 1,800 88.5 85 1,200 86.5 74 3,600 86.5 86 1,800 88.5 86 1,200 87.5 85 60 3,600 92.4 90 1,800 94.1 87 1,200 93.6 86 75 3,600 93.0 92 1,800 94.1 87 1,200 94.1 86 7-1/2 3,600 86.5 88 100 3,600 93.6 90 1,800 90.2 85 1,800 94.5 90 1,200 88.5 85 1,200 94.1 86 10 3,600 87.5 90 1,800 90.2 86 1,200 86.5 85 15 3,600 89.5 88 1,800 91.7 85 1,299 90.2 85 125 3,600 93.6 90 1,800 95.0 90 1,200 94.5 90 150 3,600 94.1 90 1,800 95.0 90 1,200 94.5 90 20 3,600 90.2 90 200 3,600 94.1 93 1,800 91.7 86 1,800 95.0 90 1,200 91.0 85 1,200 94.5 87 25 3,600 91.0 90 250 3,600 94.1 93 1,800 93.0 87 1,800 94.5 87 1,200 92.4 85 Motor sizes noted in the individual equipment specifications and the plans are estimates only, and it is the respons.bility of the equipment manufacturers and of the Contractor to furnish motor8, electrical circuits, and equipment of ample horsepower capacity to operate the equipment without exceeding the rated 1990 14A-6 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 14 nameplate full -load current at rated nameplate voltage, or overheating at maximum load capacity under the most severe operating service of the equipment. Where not shown on the Plans or in these Specifications, the manufacturer of each piece of motorized equipment shall inform the Engineer and the Contractor in writing as to the size and type of electrical controls required to properly operate the equipment. Location of conduit boxes of motors shall be shown on the manufacturer's drawings. Motors larger than 1 horsepower shall not be aluminum construction. 140130 MECHANICAL POWER TRANSMISSION EQUIPMENT All mechanical power transmission equipment including V -belts, sheaves, chains, sprockets, mechanical variable -speed drives, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes shall be rated for 24 -hour -a -day service and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5. The 1.5 service factor shall be related to the nameplated horsepower and torque of the prime source of power and not the equipment actual loading. Should the manufacturer recommend a service factor larger than 1.5 percent, the manufacturer's recommendation shall take precedence. Speed reducers shall have a thermal horsepower rating of not less than the horsepower rating of the driving motor. 140140 ELECTRICAL WORK Unless specified otherwise in the following parts on mechanical equipment, all electrical work, materials, and equipment shall conform to the provisions under DIVISION 16, ELECTRICAL. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide complete electrical systems sized to suit the equipment furnished and installed. 140150 LUBRICATION FITTINGS All lubrication fittings shall be brought to the outside of all equipment so that they are readily accessible from the outside without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housing, or guards. Fittings shall be accessible from safe, permanent walk or walk areas without ladders or scaffolds. Fittings for underwater bearings shall be brought above the water surface with stainless steel tubing and mounted on edge of structure above. Fittings shall be Lincoln "Bullneck" Hydraulic Surface Check Fittings, Lincoln Engineering Company, St. Louis, Missouri, or equivalent. Lubrication fittings shall be mounted together wherever possible. They shall not be individual fittings field -mounted together, but use shall be made of factory -mounted multiple fitting assemblies located in convenient areas. Connection from multiple fitting assemblies to point of use shall be minimum 3/16 -inch stainless steel tubing, securely mounted parallel with equipment lines and protected where exposed to damage. 140160 MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT GUARDS Approved guards for all machinery drives, pulleys, or rotating shafting shall be detailed and furnished by the Contractor. Such guards shall be neatly and substantially constructed, adequately supported from adjacent framing, and shall be provided in all cases. While all such guards are not indicated in 1990 14A-7 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 14 detail on the Plans, the Contractor is assumed to be familiar with the requirements of Cal -OSHA, and any applicable local regulations regarding machinery guards or safety devices. All guards shall be sized so that pulleys 15 percent over size may be installed. The width of the guard shall be such as to allow one additional belt to be added in the future. The frame shall be covered with expanded aluminum for heat dissipation. The Contractor shall assume the responsibility for detailing these items and submitting shop drawings to the Engineer for approval. Guards shall be constructed of 6061-T6 aluminum unless otherwise indicated. All guards shall be isolated so no dissimilar metals come in contact. 140170 TESTING Before testing, all equipment and mechanisms shall be filled by the Contractor with the proper oil and grease as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Contractor shall furnish all personnel, chemicals, and other necessary items as are required for the initial testing of equipment. Each piece of equipment shall be operated by the Contractor for at least 8 hours after installation, unless the Engineer is satisfied that shorter test periods are adequate. This does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility in the event of failure, binding, overloading, overheating, or other malfunction of the equipment after initial testing is performed. Final test operation shall be as specified in DIVISION 1. 140180 SPECIAL TOOLS All special tools that are required to assemble, disassemble, repair, and maintain any item of mechanical equipment shall be furnished with the equipment. Special tools shall include any type of tool that has been specifically made for use on an item of equipment for assembly, disassembly, repair, and maintenance. When special tools are provided, they shall be marked or tagged, and a list of such tools shall be included with the maintenance and operation instructions describing use of each marked tool. 140190 WARNING SIGNS Permanent warning signs shall be mounted at all mechanical equipment which may be started automatically or from remote locations. Signs shall be made in accordance with Procelain Enamel Institute Specification S-103, and shall be suitable for exterior use. Mounting details shall be in accordance with manu- facturer's recommendations; location shall be in a visible place near the equipment and subject to acceptance by the Engineer. Warning signs shall be 7 inches high by 10 inches wide, colored yellow and black, on not less than 10 -gauge vitreous enameling stock. Copy shall read: CAUTION THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY BY REMOTE CONTROL 1990 14A-8. W3326A.10 3326A.10 Div. 14 140200 GENERAL 0 0 0 DIVISION 14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 14-B STANDBY GENERATOR Provisions of Section 14-A are applicable to the equipment specified herein. Electrical work shall be as specified in DIVISION 16. Some equipment will require modification from the manufacturer's standard to meet these Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish and install, ready for use, one propane fired engine -driven generator with radiator, batteries, battery charger, critical exhaust silencer, and support systems as specified herein and as required to provide a complete functioning unit. The standby generator shall be rated at a minimum of 30 kW delivered at 0.8 power factor, 480-V, 3-phase, 3 -wire, 60 -Hertz, 40 -degree C ambient temperature, 6,500 -foot elevation, without exceeding NEMA MGI temperature rise limits. The system shall be as manufactured by Kohler; Onan-Cummins; or equal. The generator system shall be a package consisting of: A. A spark ignition, propane -fueled, engine -driven electric plant to provide standby electric power. B. Engine mounted control system. C. Mounted accessories. D. Exhaust and fuel systems. E. Mounting skid and vibration isolators. F. All other equipment as required to provide a complete and operable system. A11 materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified herein, shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, and of the highest grade. The engine, generator, and all major items of auxiliary equipment shall be manufactured in the U.S. by manufacturers currently engaged in the production of such equipment. The unit shall be factory -assembled and tested by the engine manufacturer and shipped to the jobsite by his authorized dealer having a parts and service facility in the area. The performance of the electric plant shall be certified by manufacturer as to the plant's full power rating, stability, and voltage and frequency regulation, and jobsite tested at full load. 1990 143-1 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 14-B The standby generator and control shall be furnished to the Contractor by one factory authorized supplier who shall be responsible to the Contractor for furnishing, testing, supervising installation of, and guaranteeing the system. The factory authorized supplier who supplies the standby generator package will be referred to as the primary supplier. Service and parts shall be available from an authorized distributor within a 150 -mile radius of the site. The responsibility of the primary supplier shall extend to the selection and furnishing of the generator, engine, starting battery system, exhaust systems, controls and consoles, and complete testing and startup supervision. Materials of construction and factory -applied finishes resistant to the effects of atmospheric corrosion and operating temperature shall be used for all parts of the generator set and accessory equipment. Finishes damaged during transportation or installation shall be touched up in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The generator set shall be designed to minimize the possibility of accidents that could injure operating or maintenance personnel. The primary supplier shall, prior to shipment, ensure that all electrical connections are tight, that circuits are isolated, that on -set piping connections are well made, and that standard safety equipment is included and functions according to design. All exposed rotating type components shall have heavy-duty guard covers designed to prevent accidental contact. The guard covers shall be substantially constructed, fastened securely in place, and be easily removable for maintenance purposes. The quality of workmanship shall be in accordance with good heavy-duty industrial and commercial practices. Each part or component having the same part number shall be completely interchangeable, without rework, with like parts or components. Fabrication shall not be started until approval has been granted. The entire installation shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and within the regulations of the Fire Prevention Bureau of the fire department having jurisdiction. The installation shall comply with the requirements of Cal -OSHA and all applicable State or local codes. This shall not be construed, however, as relieving the Contractor from complying with the specifications that may be in excess of the regulations and not contrary to same. 140210 PROPANE ENGINE 140211 GENERAL The engine shall be a four-cycle, 4 or 6 cylinders, spark ignition engine which operates with propane fuel. It shall have a maximum speed of 1,800 rpm and a minimum displacement of 140 cubic inches. The engine shall be fully water jacket -cooled and have main bearings between each crank throw. It shall meet specifications when operating propane. The engine shall be equipped with fuel, lube oil, intake air filters, and lube oil cooler. The air filters 1990 14B-2 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 14-B shall be of the replaceable dry element type. The engine shall be mounted on a rigid structural steel subbase. All rotating parts shall be fitted with guards as specified in Section 14-A. 140212 COOLING AND HEATING SYSTEMS The engine shall be furnished with a radiator cooling system having sufficient capacity for cooling the engine with a 0.5 inch W.G. external air flow restriction when delivering 10 percent over the maximum rated horsepower of the engine with an ambient temperature of 115 degrees F. The radiator fan shall be engine -driven and the radiator shall be mounted on the skid. The cooling system shall be complete with pusher fan, fan driving belts, fan guard, fan shroud, gear -driven water pump, thermostats, and quick warm-up bypass line. The radiator housing shall be provided with a flange suitable for connection to a duct, unless a weatherproof housing is specified. The radiator shall be a heavy-duty model with removable cores and welded steel tanks bolted into place. The radiator drain shall be equipped with a manual shut-off valve and a drain pipe. Engine cooling system shall be filled with solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol and chemical water conditioner shall be added as recommended by the manufacturer. A thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostat shall be furnished to maintain engine jacket water to 90 degrees F in an ambient temperature of 0 degrees F. 140213 GOVERNOR The engine governor shall be a Woodward Series EGB actuator with a 2301A load sharing and speed control. The governor shall regulate speed within plus or minus 0.25 percent at any constant load from no load to full load. 140214 FUEL SYSTEM The fuel system shall include a propane storage tank. The engine shall be equipped with a propane carborator capable of utilizing the vapored propane directly from the storage tank to fuel engine operation. Fuel shall be drawn from the top of the storage tank not the bottom. A vaporizer to transform propane from the liquid state to the vapor state shall not be required. Wire braided flexible hose connections at least 18 inches long, mounted horizontally, shall be used where the fuel piping connects to the engine. 140214.1 ABOVEGROUND PROPANE STORAGE TANK The propane fuel storage system shall consist of two (2) 500 -gallon nominal capacity, cylindrical welded steel (ASTM A-53, Grade B) steel with elliptical or hemispherical ends and steel cradle supports. The tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the ASME Pressure Vessel Code to withstand an internal working pressure of at least 20% above the 115 degree F vapor pressure of commercial grade propane fuel. The pressure vessel shall include a corrosion allowance of 0.125 inches. The vessel shall be designed with a length to diameter ratio of approximately 2 or greater. The propane fill connection shall be designed to prevent filling the tank above the 85 percent level. 1990 14B-3 W3266B.10 11 32668.10 Div. 16-8 The saddle supports shall conform to the Uniform Building Code requirements for seismic Zone 3. They shall be constructed in accordance with all applicable standards for storage of propane fuel. The tanks shall be provided with emergency relief vents designed to meet the NFPA requirements for venting small storage tanks. The relief valve setting shall be as recommended by the tank manufacturer. The tanks shall be provided with a UL listed shut-off valve and pressure regulator on the fuel outlet. A second pressure regulator, manual shut-off valve and automatic 12 volt NEMA 7, Class 1 solenoid shut-off valve will be required on the propane line where it enters the new emergency generator building. A level guage shall be mounted on the top of each storage tank to monitor fuel level. The level guage shall be direct reading, suitable for propane service, U.L. listed and calibrated to read percent of capacity. The propane fuel system shall be installed such that each tank can be isolated while the other serves the engine generator. 140215 EXHAUST SYSTEM The Contractor shall furnish a complete exhaust system following the general scheme indicated on the Plans. The maximum backpressure allowable in the exhaust piping shall be 0.74 psi, measured at the manifold exhaust header. The manifold exhaust header shall be provided with a lugged, tapped connection for the attachment of a test manometer to check backpressure after installation of the system. The exhaust system shall consist primarily of the following items: A. EXHAUST PIPING: The exhaust piping shall be fabricated from standard black steel pipe conforming to ASTM 106 and shall be sloped to allow condensate to drain. Outside exhaust piping shall be coated with not less then 6 mils of inorganic zinc after sand blasting. B. VIBRATION AND EXPANSION JOINTS: The exhaust piping vibration and expansion joints shall be a minimum of 18 inches in length, rated for a minimum of 1 inch lateral movement, and 1/2 inch axial movement, manufactured with a convoluted portion of 0.038 -inch thick Type 321 stainless steel and with flanges of ASTM A 181 steel with 125 -pound drilling. Rated movement is defined as plus or minus travel from neutral or free position. Non -convoluted portions of expansion joint shall be ASTM A 240 Type 304 Schedule 10 pipe. Vibration and expansion joints shall be designed for infinite cycle life, 1,200 degrees F exhaust, insulation over the expansion joint, and continuous duty service. C. The exhaust silencer shall be the heavy duty industrial type with ported tubes and snubbing chambers and a super critical rating. The silencer shall be for horizontal mounting and fabricated of welded steel. End connections shall be steel flanges with 150 -pound drilling. Shells and connections shall be sufficiently heavy and reinforced to 1990 143-4 W3266B.10 92668.10 Div. 14-13 support all operating loads including connecting piping without excessive vibration, stress or deflection. The silencer shall have a threaded, plugged condensate drain. The silencer shall effectively attenuate pluses produced by the engine and shall attain the following minimum sound attenuation characteristics at full load: Mid Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000 Alteration (db) 39 42 42 40 38 38 38 38 The silencer manufacturer shall fit mounting brackets suitable to support it on the beams as indicated on the Plans. Silencer shall be Kittel; Maxim; Nelson; or equal. The silencer and all indoor exhaust piping shall be insulated. The insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust fitting. Exhaust pipe insulation shall contain no asbestos and shall be 3 -inch thick Thermobestos as manufactured by Johns -Manville; Owens-Corning Kaylo as manufactured by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation; or equal. Insulation shall be applied in two layers with all joints staggered. Insulation shall be applied by securing each length of insulation with not less than three ties on No. 16 aluminum wire drawn into the insulation to present a smooth surface. Insulation shall be covered with 0.016 -inch thick Series 5005 aluminum cladding. Cladding shall be adequately lapped, sealed, and shall be attached to the pipe with Series 300 stainless steel bands spaced at not greater than 2 feet on centers and at all ends. Alternate methods of attachment will be considered. Method of attachment of cladding shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 140216 STARTING, BATTERIES AND CHARGING SYSTEM The engine shall be equipped with a 12 -volt electric starter complete with a magnetic contactor. Sufficient batteries shall be provided for instrumentation and not less than 1-1/2 minutes of total cranking time without recharging at a temperature of 32 degrees F. The batteries shall be low maintenance high output lead acid type. The batteries shall be mounted in an acid resistant battery rack which conforms to Uniform Building Code with housing to protect against shorts. A set of battery cables shall be furnished for the engine to connect battery system to starting motor. An independent, automatic, two -rate battery charger with 12 -volt output shall be provided for the engine. A temperature compensated control shall cut the charger back to low rate when the battery is approximately 90 percent charged. The charger shall go on high rate automatically after the completion of each engine cranking cycle or run. The low rate shall provide a completion of charge and maintenance at a low current which will not boil out the battery electrolyte. High charge rate shall be 20 -amp minimum. Charger shall be provided with an ammeter, voltmeter, on-off switch, high rate reset button, 1990 143-5 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 14-6 fuse, and a high rate indication light. Battery charger shall be as recommended by the generator manufacturer for use with manufacturer's equipment. 140217 SKID The engine manufacturer shall mount the engine, generators, integrally mounted controls, and radiator on a common heavy-duty fabricated steel skid. The fabricated steel skid shall consist of a rigid welded frame of wide flange members on each side and end. The skid shall be mounted on spring isolators having telescopic top and bottom housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces. Isolators shall be made of shatterproof ductile iron in conformance with ASTM A 536 Grade CS -45-12. Manufacturer of isolators shall furnish calculations to insure proper operation and vibration protection coupled with seismic loading of Zone 3 in accordance with the Uniform Building Code. Vibration isolators shall be California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD; Mason Industries; or equal. Skid shall be bolted to the concrete slab according to manufacturer's anchor bolt layout. Installation shall have a crankcase drain pipe at least 8 inches from the floor, equipped with a readily accessible shutoff valve. 140220 GENERATOR The generator shall be rated for continuous standby duty at 30 kW, power factor 0.8 lagging, 3-phase, 60 -Hertz, 480 -volt, grounded wye-connected. The generator rating shall be based on the requirements for NEMA Class F requirements. The generator shall be a 4 -pole or 6 -pole rotating field, self -ventilated, open-dripproof type machine. The generator shall be capable of delivering its rated kilowatt output at a power factor of 0.8 lagging, and at a frequency between 59 and 61 Hertz. The generator rotor shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The degree of dynamic imbalance of the generator rotor shall be minimal and insufficient to cause adverse vibration. The generator bearings shall be anti -friction type. The generator shall be equipped with amortisseur windings. The exciter shall be brushless type using a rotating rectifier bridge circuit. The rectifying unit shall be mounted on the generator rotor shaft and shall supply the field excitation current for the generator. The exciter shall be capable of delivering its rated current continuously at rated generator output. The voltage regulator shall utilize solid state electronics and shall not require forced cooling. Adjustable droop range shall be included. The regulator shall be equipped with circuitry designed to sustain at least 300 percent of rated current for 10 seconds to allow selective circuit breaker tripping in the distribution system. 1990 14B-6 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 14-B 0 0 0 0 0 0 The specified standby kW shall be for continuous electrical service during interruption of the normal utility source. These ratings must be substantiated by the manufacturer's standard published curves. Special or maximum ratings are not acceptable. 140230 GENERATOR SYSTEM OPERATIONS 140231 GENERAL All controls and instrumentation necessary to sequentially start, operate, control, and stop the generator system shall be supplied by the manufacturer. 140232 ENGINE STARTING SEQUENCE The automatic engine start sequence shall be initiated by a short signal from the master control system to open the 12 volt fuel solenoid valve then the starter motor shall automatically crank the engine. 140233 ENGINE SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE The engine shall shutdown immediately if an emergency stop button is activated, or any of the following conditions occur: overspeed, high coolant temperature, or low oil pressure. These conditions shall also be annunciated. High coolant temperature and low oil pressure shall also have pre -shutdown alarms and lights. Manual alarm reset shall be required after the malfunction is corrected and before restart. A stop signal shall cause the engine to run for a cool down period and then stop and close the automatic solenoid valve. 140234 CONTROL PANEL The manufacturer shall furnish a generator mounted control panel constructed of a minimum of 14 -gauge cold -rolled steel. All devices shall be constructed of corrosion -resistant materials, protected against vibration and enclosed in a NEMA Type 1 case. The following devices shall be mounted and labeled on the control panel face: A. AC ammeter. B. Emergency stop lamp. C. Meter phase selector switch. D. Wattmeter. E. Frequency meter. F. Voltage adjustment rheostat. G. Oil pressure gauge. H. Cooling water temperature gauge. I. Voltmeter. 1990 14B-7 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 14-B J. Battery charge rate ammeter. K. Alarm and shutdown indication lights for low oil pressure, high coolant temperature. Shutdown indication lights for overspeed and overcrank. L. Switch for auto, off/reset, and manual/test. M. Running time meter. N. Panel illumination lights. 0. Lamp test switch. P. Not -in -auto lamp (red). Q. System ready lamp (green). R. Run-off/reset-auto switch (engine start)-local/remote two -wires. All gauges shall be 2.0 percent minimum accuracy. The control panel shall be powered by the starting battery system. The control panel shall include the following: A. Automatic cyclic cranking per NFPA-110. B. Cooldown timer. C. Dry contacts for running and failure. All control components associated with the generator system shall be wired to one electrical junction box located on the skid to facilitate wiring of components and engine maintenance. 140240 PAINTING The engine and accessories shall be shop painted in accordance with DIVISION 9. 140250 INSTALLATION Installation shall be done by competent personnel experienced and regularly engaged in field installation of power generation systems. The Contractor shall provide lubricating oil, grease, ethylene glycol, and chemical water conditioner for initial startup and testing. 140260 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings of each component making up the standby generator package in one package. No approvals will be made until the entire submittal is made. Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Standard Specifications. The shop drawings shall include detailed descriptions of all the components, weight of the engine generator skid and 1990 14B-8 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 14-8 silencer, air flow and fuel usage, exhaust back pressure calculations, torsiograph records or torsional vibration analysis and silencer noise attenuation. Engineering drawings containing complete dimensions with sufficient detail to define the installation, anchor bolt layout, piping connections, wiring inter- connections, and special requirements of all separately mounted equipment shall be submitted by the supplier. These drawings shall include installation drawings, electrical schematics, and inter -connect wiring diagrams. Instruction manuals containing operation and maintenance procedures shall be supplied with the shop drawings submittal. Upon acceptance of the installation, four (4) suitably bound copies of the Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall be submitted. A recommended list of special tools and spare parts with quantity, pricing, and supplier shall be submitted with the shop drawings submittal. 140261 TORSIONAL VIBRATION The complete engine generator set shall be so designed, constructed, and installed as to be free from objectionable vibration in any mode. 140262 SPARE PARTS The following spare parts for the engine/generator shall be supplied to the Owner prior to the acceptance of work: A. Three sets of lube, oil filters, and gaskets. B. Two sets of air filters. C. Two sets of belts. D. One dozen spare lamps. E. Two fuses (for each control circuit). F. Three sets of fuel filters and gaskets. G. Three sets of spark plugs. 140263 SPECIAL TOOLS A set of specialty tools necessary for routine maintenance of the equipment shall be furnished. Included shall be a hydrometer and two-pronged battery voltmeter. 140270 INSTRUCTION OF OPERATING PERSONNEL On completion of the installation, startup shall be performed by a factory - trained dealer service representative. One organized training session totaling not less than four hours shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with two weeks written notice regarding the date of the scheduled training session. The training 1990 32666.10 Div. 14-B 14B-9 W3266B.10 session shall be given after all required startup and testing procedures have been acceptably performed, but prior to the Owner's seven-day test specified in the SPECIAL CONDITIONS. 140280 TESTING, STARTUP, AND SERVICES 140281 FACTORY TESTING The equipment supplied under this Specification shall be factory -tested as a complete unit together with subsystems. The test program shall cover the following functions: A. Verification that all set -mounted components are correctly installed and interconnected. B. Verification that each subsystem is complete and functions according to design criteria. C. Individual test of each protective device and verification of the accuracy of instrumentation set points. D. Operation of the generator unit from 0 to 100 percent load starting at no load and increasing in increments of 25 percent and check at each load point to verify stable operation, fuel consumption, engine performance, and generator performance. Load test shall be performed at 0.8 power factor. The units shall be factory load tested for two hours at each load prior to shipment by the manufacturer. E. Performance of full load transient tests verifying that voltage and frequency transient characteristics are within the requirements of this Specification. F. Verification that equipment is free of all vibrations throughout operating range. The primary supplier shall submit certified copies of the results of the factory tests. 140283 FIELD TESTING AND STARTUP Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer shall issue a certification of compliance with the Plans and Specifications. Startup shall be performed by a factory -trained service representative. The generating system shall be full -load tested at the site in the presence of the Engineer for a period of eight hours, with the primary supplier providing necessary resistive load banks. Prior to acceptance of the installation, the equipment shall also be subjected to load tests, with all available motor load, but not to exceed the generator's name plate rating for a period of four hours. All defects which become evident during testing shall be corrected by the Contractor. 1990 32668.10 Div. 14-8 14B-10. W3266B.10 0 DIVISION 14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SECTION 14-C ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS 140310 LOUVERS Furnish and install all outside air intake and exhaust air louvers of the size and capacity specified. Louvers that do not meet the following standards shall not be considered for approval. 40 140320 GENERAL 0 All louvers shall be products of one nationally recognized manufacturer specializing in the design, fabrication, finishing, and testing of louvers that bear AMCA seals for water penetration and static pressure loss and is listed in the current AMCA Publication 261, "Directory of Licensed Products". Performance statements are understood to refer to terms and definitions used in AMCA Standard 500-85, "Test Methods for Louvers and Shutters" and ASTM E90-85, "Standards for Airborne Sound Transmission Loss Through Louvers". Acoustical louvers shall be as manufactured by Airolite Company, Model T9112, 41 Construction Specialties, Model 12370, or approved equal. 0 0 11 0 140330 PERFORMANCE Louvers shall be wall mounted, stationary acoustical type of the size shown on the Plans. 140330.1 AIR PERFORMANCE Acoustical louvers shall have free area equal to at least 0.25 of the total louver area. Pressure drop through the free area admitting air shall not exceed 0.15 -inches W.G. with a velocity through the free area of 1,000 FPM. Water penetration shall not exceed 0.02 ounces per square foot of free area at an air flow of 760 FPM free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes per AMCA Standard 500-85. Louvers shall have the ability to exhaust air at a velocity of 1,000 FPM through the net free area at not over 0.15 -inches W.G. pressure loss. 140330.2 NOISE REDUCTION Acoustical louvers shall have the ability to reduce free -field noise per the following table. Frequency (Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Noise Reduction (dB) 8 13 17 23 23 20 20 1990 32668.10 Div. 14-C 14C-1 W3266B.10 140340 ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS Acoustical louvers shall have a 12 -inch minimum depth and be designed to resist a wind load of not less than 20 pounds per square foot with a deflection of not more than L/180, in both interior and exterior directions. Aluminum extrusion thickness for frames and blades shall be a minimum of 0.081 -inches and made from Type 6063-T52 extruded aluminum alloy (ASTM B221). Frames shall be fabricated, including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation, including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work. Louvers shall be furnished with an 18- by 16- mesh, aluminum wire insect screen within an extruded aluminum frame and a 1/2 -inch mesh, 0.063 -diameter wire intercrimp bird screen. Screens shall be replaceable within extruded frames. Louvers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 140350 PAINTING 140350.1 GENERAL Apply finishes to all surfaces, including mounting hardware and integral structural members in factory after products are assembled. All louvers to be free from scratches and blemishes, being factory finished with a Kynar 500 resin. Color shall be as selected by the District from available standard colors. 1990 14C-2. W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 14-C DIVISION 15 PIPING, VALVES, GATES, AND SPECIALTIES 150000 GENERAL Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Plans. If the Contractor desires to change any of the piping layouts shown on the Plans, he shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, his detailed proposed layouts. Any pipe which does not meet specifications or has been rejected, shall be removed from the jobsite and disposed of by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Owner. Where new fittings are to be cut into or attached to existing piping or where connections are to be made to existing piping, the Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, fittings, etc. needed to accomplish the cutting -in or connections, whether specifically indicated on the Plans or not. Lines under low head shall be laid flat or with a continuous grade so that there will be no air traps or humps in them, except at the ends where means for venting shall be provided. In no case shall copper or copper alloy pipe or fittings carrying water or water based solutions or slurries be attached to cast iron or steel pipe except by means of a dielectric coupling expressly made for this purpose and service. All pipe which will operate under pressure shall be properly blocked at all fittings where the pipeline changes direction, changes size, or ends, using concrete thrust blocks in trenches and suitable anchors in structures. Concrete thrust blocks shall be sized so as to give bearing against undisturbed vertical earth banks sufficient to absorb the thrust from line pressure, allowing an earth bearing of 200 pounds per square foot per foot of depth below natural grade to a maximum of 1,000 pounds per square foot. Earth bearing value may be increased, if substantiated by soils analysis.) The line pressure shall be the product of the nominal cross sectional area of the pipe and the test pressures as specified for each type of pipe. The concrete shall be placed, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Plans, so that the pipe joints and fittings will be accessible. 150010 EXPOSED PIPING Where not detailed, exposed pipe shall be installed in straight runs parallel to the axes of the structures. Pipe runs shall be horizontal and vertical except that gravity drain lines shall be pitched down in the direction of flow not less than 1/8 -inch per foot. No exposed piping shall be erected until all equipment to which the pipe is to be attached has been installed and it can be determined where piping and fittings shall be located to make a neat efficient arrangement. 1990 15-1 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 The Plans shall be taken as diagrammatic for piping that is not shown in detail. Sizes of piping and their locations are indicated, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting nor every structural difficulty that will be encountered during the installation of the work. The alignment of pipes shall be varied from that indicated on the Plans, without extra expense to the Owner where necessary to avoid structural or mechanical difficulties or to avoid the work of any other trades. The Contractor shall furnish such parts and pieces as may be necessary to provide a complete and operable system. Pipework shall be suspended and supported in such manner as to prevent sagging or overstressing of pipe and connections and, furthermore, shall be supported so that no item of the piping system will transfer any load or stress to any equipment. Air bleeder cocks shall be installed at all high points in pipe systems and pump cases and shall be of the size indicated on the Plans or minimum of 1 inch. Air bleeder cocks shall be 1 or 2 -inch plug valves in accordance with these Specifications. Piping shall be made up with a sufficient number of unions or flanged joints to permit ready breaking of lines as necessary for inspection and maintenance, in addition to such joints as are definitely shown on the Plans. Pipe and fittings shall be assembled so there will be no distortion or springing of the pipelines. Flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections shall come together at the proper orientation. The fit shall not be made by springing any piping nor shall orientation alignment be corrected by taking up on any flange bolts. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, etc. shall slip freely into place. If the proper fit is not obtained, the piping shall be altered to fit. 150011 WALL AND SLAB PENETRATIONS No pipe shall pass through or be built into any reinforced masonry or concrete wall, floor, ceiling, roof, pilaster, column, pier, or beam, unless it is inside of a sleeve. Exceptions will be indicated on the Plans with a specific note, or specified in the Specifications, and unless so stated in words, no exception shall be considered as having been allowed in the Contract Docu- ments. Such sleeves shall have an inside diameter not less than the outside diameter of the pipe plus 1 -inch, except that for pipe smaller than 1 -inch the ID of the sleeve shall be not less than twice the OD of the pipe. Such sleeves shall be placed not closer than three diameters center to center, nor shall they impair the strength of construction. The arrangement of sleeves shall be such that pipe can be pulled out of a sleeve and replaced without disturbing the structural member. Ends of sleeves shall be flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster. 150020 BURIED PIPING All pipelines laid in open trenches shall conform to applicable parts of DIVISION 2. 1990 15-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 Where two lines of similar service run parallel to each other, they may be laid in the same trench as close together as possible and still provide adequate room for jointing. The laying of the pipe shall be in finished trenches free from water or debris and shall be commenced at the lowest point. Pipe shall be laid on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full length of the barrel. If the pipe bears top or bottom markings, it shall be placed with the markings in the proper position. All adjustments to line and grade shall be made by scraping away or filling in under the pipe. If the joints are the type which require external grouting, banding, or pointing, space shall be provided under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid of such shape and size as to permit sufficient room for the grouting, banding, or pointing of the joints. Before excavation is started for any run of underground piping, the Contractor shall locate and expose all existing structures, piping, conduit, etc., which intersect the line of the piping, to avoid possible damage to these during excavation operations and so that it may be determined if there will be any conflicts in location. In the event of conflicts in location or grade or both, between new piping and existing piping, the Contractor shall make the adjustments in location or grade of new piping as directed by the Engineer. These adjustments, including additional fittings, shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified, where pipe of any type is to be encased in concrete, the encasement shall provide a minimum of 6 inches of concrete completely around the pipe, shall fill the bottom of the trench from bank to bank, if not formed, and shall be reinforced with four continuous longitudinal reinforcing bars, one in each corner of the encasement. Concrete shall be Class C. The length of encasement shown on the Plans, or specified, shall be the minimum length, and the encasement shall end at each end at a joint in the pipe. Reinforcing bars shall be No. 4 for encasement of pipe 36 inches and smaller and No. 6 for encasement of pipe larger than 36 inches. Where buried cast iron, ductile iron, reinforced concrete, asbestos cement, vitrified clay, or similar rigid pipe enters a structure, it shall be by means of a coupling or wall piece cast into the wall, having a mechanical push -on, or similar flexible joint as specified or shown on the Plans at the outside face of the wall. An additional similar joint shall be installed in the line at the edge of the structure excavation where the pipe trench leaves undisturbed ground. For steel pipe a single joint may be used located not more than 2 feet from the outside face of the wall. 150030 CLEANING AND TESTING The interior of all pipelines, above or below grade, shall be thoroughly cleaned of all adhering matter and other debris to the approval of the Engineer. No testing of any pipeline shall be started until the cleaning is complete and approved. Special precautions required in the cleaning of a particular pipeline shall be as stated in the various parts of this Division of these Specifications. 1990 15-3 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 All pipelines, above or below grade, shall be tested to the pressures indicated in the various parts of this Division of these Specifications. Any piping for which test pressure is not specified shall be tested under a pressure of 25 psi above the operating head or as directed by the Engineer. Pipe underground may be tested before backfilling unless otherwise specified, and pipes to be encased in concrete or under concrete slabs shall be tested before the encasement or slabs are poured. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary personnel, supplies, equipment, bulkheads, and whatever additional equipment is required to make any and all tests specified and shall make any and all repairs, including relaying if necessary, to any and all pipelines failing to pass the testing requirements of these Specifications. The Contractor shall give the Engineer a list of the scheduled pipeline tests by noon of the day preceding the scheduled test or tests. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer by written memorandum of his readiness (not just his intention) to test a line or portion of line. All bulkheads, thrust blocks, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, etc. shall be in place before the Contractor's notification of readiness is given to the Engineer. After testing, all pipes shall be flushed or blown out and left clean. In testing with water, the test pressure specified shall be the pressure at the lowest point in the piping concerned. In testing with water, the lines shall be examined and any visible leaks repaired. Testing shall be repeated until the lines are in satisfactory condition. Despite any previous testing, any leaks developing before the end of the one year guarantee period shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 150033 PIPING TESTS All piping except chlorine lines shall be tested with water at the pressure specified under PIPING TEST SCHEDULE. Gas lines tested under water pressure shall be thoroughly dried using hot air. Clean, dried air shall be used to remove water from the tested line until a dewpoint reading of minus 40 degrees F is reached on the exhaust side of the line. 150060 PIPING SCHEDULE Where not specifically noted on the Plans or otherwise specified, pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule. Pipe listed as "aboveground" shall include those within buildings, tunnels, or other structures without regard to its elevation. "Underground" piping shall be taken to mean only that piping actually buried in the soil or cast in concrete masonry. "Underwater" piping shall mean piping which extends below tops of walls or concrete deck into basins or concrete tanks containing water. The Contractor may, at his expense, furnish piping of the same material as shown in the PIPING SCHEDULE but of greater pressure rating than that specified. 1990 15-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 Where bell and spigot joints are shown on the Plans or specified, mechanical joints or push -on joints may be used. The Contractor is responsible for furnishing and installing all necessary piping to make all equipment and other parts of the plant functional. Should the type of pipe for a given use be not shown, the following paragraphs shall serve as a guide with the approval of the Engineer in the selection of the proper pipe to use for a given service. Clean water and potable water piping less than 4 inches in size may be galvanized steel pipe (aboveground), rigid plastic pipe (underground), or copper pipe. Water pipe 4 inches and over in size may be cement lined ductile iron pipe. Air, oil, and gas piping may be steel pipe. Steel pipe 4 inches and over in size shall be black steel. All gas pipe shall be pitched to drain to drip traps as indicated, not less than 1/8 -inch per foot where condensate flows against the gas and not less than 1/16 -inch per foot where condensate flows with gas. At high points of straight runs, tapered filler pieces between flanges shall be used to secure the reversal of pitch without springing the pipe. Sewage piping may be ductile iron pipe, vitrified clay pipe, or reinforced concrete pipe. Sludge piping shall be ductile iron or ductile iron pipe. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for sludge lines shall not be cement lined and shall be coal tar epoxy lined cast iron pipe. Culvert pipe may be galvanized corrugated metal pipe or concrete pipe. Chlorine liquid and gas piping shall be Schedule 80, ASTM A 106, Grade A. Cast iron pipe of equal strength may be substituted for ductile iron pipe at Contractor's option. Grooved end ductile or cast iron pipe may be substituted for aboveground flanged pipe at the Contractor's option. Control air piping 3/8 -inch and smaller shall be of Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel and shall be as specified under STAINLESS STEEL TUBING. All clamps and bolting shall be stainless steel. Control air piping 1/2 -inch and larger shall be of Schedule 40 black steel. 1990 15-5 W3266B.10 32660.10 Div. 15 PIPE SCHEDULE Test Use Piping Joints/Fittings Pressure Force main connecting Schedule 80 Solvent 100 psi convert vacuum main PVC welded to MH -A45 Connection between Schedule 80 Solvent 100 psi existing 2-1/2" force PVC welded main and existing 4" vacuum main to be converted Air/vacuum release Galvanized N.P.T. 100 psi valve piping Steel threaded Piping within Galvanized N.P.T. 100 psi submersible pump Steel threaded stations Piping between Schedule 80 Solvent welded new and existing PVC or coupling as tanks at VVS-3 required New electrical conduit Schedule 80 PVC Drains, roof Engine exhaust Engine lube oil Propane gas 3" and under Sliplining for existing 4 -inch vacuum main Solvent welded Galvanized steel, Galvanized, Plug and Schedule 40 screwed fill with water to high point Black steel, Flanged, 150# 50 psi, no Schedule 20, welded welding steel leakage insulated) (insulated) allowed Black steel, Black malleable 125 psi Schedule 40, iron, 150# pickled) (pickled) Black steel, Welded or screwed Schedule 80, wrapped black malleable, if buried, painted 150# if exposed Polyethylene 3.5 -inch O.D., SDR 17, 100 psi 100 psi Butt Welded 100 psi 1990 15-6 W3266B.10 326613.10 Div. 15 All valves installed in a given line shall be designed to withstand the test pressure as listed above for that particular line and shall be fabricated with ends to fit the piping. 150070 CONNECTION TO IN-SERVICE LINES Existing pipe to which connections are to be made shall be exposed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer, to permit field changes in line, grade, or fittings, if necessary. All connections to existing lines shall be constructed according to the Plans and Specifications. When shutdown of an in-service line is necessary in order to connect to the new lines, a conference between the Contractor's representative, the Engineer, and operating supervisory personnel shall establish the time and procedures to insure that the shutdown will be for the shortest possible time. If necessary, shutdowns may be scheduled during other than normal working hours, at no additional cost to the Owner. 150200 STEEL PIPE Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, steel pipe and fittings shall be as follows. Steel pipe 12 inches and smaller in nominal diameter shall be seamless or straight seam electric resistance welded pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 120. Pipe 6 inches and smaller shall be Schedule 40. Pipe over 6 inches but not larger than 12 inches shall be no lighter than Schedule 20. Steel pipe over 12 inches in nominal diameter shall be in accordance with AWWA C 200, except that butt strap, riveted, or swaged joints may not be used. Pipe over 12 inches in diameter shall have a wall thickness of not less than 1/4 -inch to 72 -inch diameter and 5/16 -inch over 72 -inch diameter, unless indicated otherwise on the Plans. All pipe shall be black unless indicated otherwise on the Plans or specified to be galvanized. If galvanized, it shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120. The working stress for any of the steels specified as acceptable for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield point of the steel used. Wherever Dresser or Victaulic couplings are to be used on pipe 24 inches in diameter, or over, having a wall thickness of less than 1/2 -inch, stub ends not less than 6 inches long and 1/2 -inch in thickness shall be provided for insertion into the couplings. Steel pipe for liquid or gaseous dry chlorine shall be ASTM A 106, Grade A, Schedule 80, assembled with 300 psi malleable iron fittings and ammonia type flanges. Steel pipe and fittings shall be designed in accordance with AWWA Manual Mil. 1990 3266B.10 Div. 15 15-7 W3266B.10 150210 JOINTS Steel pipe joints shall be screwed, welded, or flanged as is appropriate to the pipe size and application, except that galvanized pipe shall not be welded. Welding shall be in accordance with AWWA C 206. Piping shall be made up with a sufficient number of unions, flexible couplings, or flanged joints to permit ready breaking of lines for maintenance in addition to any unions or flanges indicated on the Plans. The Engineer may direct the location of any unions, flexible couplings, or flanged joints, in addition to those indicated on the Plans, at his discretion. Unions shall be railroad type with bronze -to -iron seat, galvanized if used with galvanized pipe. Flanged joints may be used instead of unions. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, pipe joints shall be of the type specified below. Pipe smaller than 2 inches shall have screwed joints or flexible couplings. Pipe 2 inches through 4 inches shall have screwed, flanged, or welded joints, or flexible couplings. Pipe larger than 4 inches shall have flanged or welded joints or flexible couplings. Threading shall be done with clean, sharp dies. Pipe threads carelessly made, wavy, rough, or chewed shall be rejected. All screwed joints shall be tightly and neatly made up with an application of Teflon tape or approved paste compound applied to the male threads only, except that liquid and dry chlorine lines and liquid LPG lines shall be made up with litharge and glycerine. Flanges shall come together at the proper orientation with no air gaps between the flanges after the gaskets are in place. The fit shall not be made by springing any piping, nor shall the orientation alignment be corrected by taking up on any flange bolts. Flange bolts shall slip freely into place with absolutely no binding. If the proper fit is not obtained, the piping shall be altered. Machined flanges or tapered fillers shall be used to accomplish changes in grade or to slope lines for drainage. All welded joints shall be electric welded. Welding shall be in accordance with AWWA C 206. Qualification of welders shall be as covered in AWWA C 206. All testing of welders shall be at the Contractor's expense, including cost of test nipples, welding rod, and equipment. 150220 FITTINGS Fittings used with screwed pipe shall be 200 pounds malleable iron banded screwed fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.3, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 if used with galvanized pipe, or cast iron drainage screwed fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.12, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 if used with galvanized pipe. Drainage fittings shall be used with drain lines, and other lines which are required to be graded. Flanged fittings 12 inches and smaller shall be 125 pounds cast iron flanged fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 or 150 pounds steel flanged fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.5. Flanged fittings for pipe larger than 12 -inch may be as above or may be fabricated from sections of steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C 208, with flanges as specified in AWWA C 207. 1990 15-8 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 11 ft ft tft Companion flanges 4 inches and smaller may be 125 pounds screwed cast iron companion flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 or 150 -pound slip-on or welding neck steel flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.5, except that ammonia type flanges shall be used on chlorine liquid or gas piping. Companion flanges for pipe from 4 inches to and including 12 inches shall be slip-on or welding neck flanges in accordance with ANSI B 16.5. Companion flanges for pipe larger than 12 inches may be as above or may be steel plate or raised hub flanges in accordance with AWWA C 207. Slip-on flanges shall be attached to pipe by two fillet welds, in accordance with AWWA C 207. Welding neck flanges shall be secured by full penetration butt welds without backing rings. After welding in place, the faces of flanges shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe, or, in the case of fittings, at the proper angle to each other, and bolt holes shall be in proper alignment. Flanges shall be shop welded to pipe or fittings before lining is applied. Machined flanges or tapered fillers shall be used to accomplish changes in grade, or to slope lines for drainage. Flange bolts shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.1, except that flanges underground or in water shall have Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, or Everdur bolts and nuts. All flange bolts shall be cut and finished to project not more than 1/4 -inch beyond outside face of nut after joint is assembled. Where cap screws or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be provided with tapped holes for such cap screws or stud bolts. Gaskets shall be ring gaskets of 1/16 -inch Cranite, Garlock, or equal. Welding fittings for pipe 8 inches and smaller in size shall be butt -welding fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.9, standard wall or standard weight. Welding fittings for pipe larger than 8 inches shall be butt -welding fittings in accordance with ANSI B 16.9, or may be made up out of sections of pipe welded together, except where smooth bends are indicated in air lines. Fittings made up of sections of pipe welded together shall be made of pipe of at least the same wall thickness as the pipe with which used, and bends shall be miter bends, fabricated in accordance with AWWA C 208 and as supplemented by AWWA Manual No. M11. Welding of these made-up fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C 206. Outlets and four branch fittings shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AWWA Manual No. M11. 150240 PIPE COATING Aboveground steel pipe shall be painted as provided in DIVISION 9 of these Specifications. Before coating, pipe surface shall be free of dust, dirt, loose rust, moisture, welding residue, oil, and grease. Surface shall then be power tool cleaned or commercial blast cleaned to conform to SSPC Specification SP -3 or SP -6. 1990 15-9 W3266B.10 41 32668.10 Div. 15 150242 PLASTIC TAPE WRAP Pipe shall be given a protective coating consisting of not less than two spirally applied wrappings of polyethylene or PVC tape, over a suitable prime coat, to a minimum system thickness of not less than 40 mils. Each wrapping shall be lapped not less than 1/2 inch. A single wrap lapped 50 percent or more shall not be acceptable. The primer shall be Polyken No. 919 for power machine wrapped pipe, Polyken 927 for hand machine or hand wrapped pipe, Plicoflex No. 105, or equal. The first wrapping shall consist of one or two plies of self-adhesive polyethylene or PVC tape to a total thickness of approximately 20 mils, Polyken 900 or 920; Plicoflex No. 340; or equal. The finish wrapping shall consist of a self-adhesive protective overwrap of approximately 25 mils thickness, Polyken 955-25, Plicoflex Rockshield, or equal, or a protective adherent felt coating approved by the Engineer. In wrapping welded joints, the sharp edges of weld spatter and slag, shall be removed with a file or ball peen hammer. A single thickness of tape shall first be applied around the weld. Then the wrapping shall be started 4 inches back on the pipe wrap, and the tape shall be spiral wrapped over the joint, holding the proper tension and overlap, and finished 4 inches back on the pipe wrap on the other side of the joint. The second wrapping shall then be similarly applied. Fittings, valves, and other odd shaped components in the pipeline shall be wrapped with not less than two thicknesses of conformable polyethylene or PVC tape over a suitable prime coat, Polyken joint wrap tape No. 930 over primer No. 927 or No. 935; Plicoflex Moulding tape over No. 105 primer; or equal. 151800 PLASTIC PIPE, TUBING, AND FITTINGS Except as otherwise specified herein, or as called for on the Plans, plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be as follows. Extruding and molding material shall be virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except that, where permitted in the referenced standard specifications, clean rework material generated from the manufacturer's own operations may be used as long as the end product meets the requirements of this specification. Pipe and tubing, except for drainage pipe, shall meet the requirements of the National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratories Inc. and shall bear the "NSF" seal. All plastic pipe delivered to the jobsite shall be plainly marked as to nominal pipe or tubing size, type, class, schedule or pressure rating, and manufacturer. Fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe and of equal of greater pressure rating, except that drainage waste and vent (DWV) fittings need not be pressure rated; and all fittings shall conform to the appropriate ASTM 1990 15-10 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 Specification. In general, fittings for rigid pipe shall be socket type for solvent or fusion welding, and fittings for nonrigid pipe shall be insert or flare fittings as specified or approved by the Engineer. Transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe shall be by molded transition fittings, not by threading the plastic pipe. Unions 2-2/2 inches and smaller shall be socket end screwed unions, and unions 3 inches and over shall be made up of socket flanges with 1/8 -inch full face soft rubber gasket. Unions shall be located where shown on the Plans and elsewhere as directed by the Engineer for adequate access to the piping system for inspection and cleaning. Nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose shall be serrated. 15801 POLYETHYLENE PIPE Pipe used for sliplining shall be made of virgin high density polyethylene that meets the requirements of ASTM D -1248-81a, Type III, Class B, Grade P34. The density of the material shall be between 0.950 and 0.959 g./cu. cm. and shall contain ultraviolet and antioxidant stabilizers. The pipe made from these materials shall have a long term strength rating of 1,250 psi or more. The nominal flow rate of the materials shall be between 0.1 and 1.5 gallons/ 10 minutes in accordance with ASTM D-1238-82 and the environmental stress - crack resistance when tested under Condition C of ASTM D-1693 shall be greater than 1,000 hours before reaching the 50 percent failure rate. All pipe shall be homogenous throughout and be free from all cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other deleterious faults. Polyethylene sliplining pipe shall have a minimum internal design pressure rating of 40 psi and a minimum external buckling pressure rating of four feet based on a 75 percent F temperature and a 50 -year stress life. It shall meet the applicable requirements of ASTM D-3035-83 and shall have an SDR of 17.0. Sliplining pipe diameters shall be as follows: ID of Min. OD Original of Slip Pipe Liner 4 inches 3.5 inches Polyethylene sliplining pipe shall be as manufactured by Driscopipe, Polaris Duratuff, Du Pont Sclairpipe, or equal. 151802 SLIPLINING Sewer sections to be sliplined shall be cleaned prior to lining. Wherever the polyethylene liner pipe is not encased by the original sewer, i.e., at service connections, access where offsets are removed, etc., it shall be encased with cement stabilization sand. All debris, water and mud shall be removed and the area excavated along each side of the pipe to undisturbed soil. Width of the void shall not exceed (main O.D. + 2 ft.) or (service line O.D. + 2 ft.). Cement stabilized sand shall consist of equal parts of Type II or Type V portland cement and fine aggregates and shall be mixed dry and placed in 6 -inch lifts within the void to 8 inches over the top of the exposed polyethylene liner pipe. Each lift shall be hand tamped and care shall be 1990 15-11 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 15 exercised at all times to prevent damage to the polyethylene liner pipe, service connections, etc. After the concrete or cement stabilized sand is in place and accepted, backfill shall be placed and compacted to the required finish grade. The installation of the polyethylene solid wall sewer pipe liner shall conform to this specification and to ASTM Specifications F 858, D2657, and 2321. The Contractor shall clean each reach of sewer main to be lined. A sizing "pig" shall be pulled through the existing sewer to ensure there are no obstructions. The sizing "pig" shall be of a configuration recommended by the pipe supplier and approved by the Engineer. 151802.5 LINER HANDLING The liner shall be handled with care to minimize the possibility of it being cut, kinked, gouged or otherwise damaged. Ropes, fabric, rollers, or rubber - protected slings and straps may be used when handling the liner. The use of cables, chains or hooks will not be permitted. Liner shall be stored on level ground or surface, free of sharp objects which could cause damage. The liner shall be pulled on rollers, or otherwise protected from damage during the pulling operation. Sections of the liner damaged, cut, or gouged shall be repaired by cutting out the section of pipe containing the damaged areas and then re -joining the liner sections as specified herein. 151803 JOINTING All joining of liner pipe shall be done aboveground by the butt -fusion method in strict accordance with the pipe and equipment manufacturer's recommendations, including heating and cooling times. Butt -fusion joining shall be done by personnel trained by the pipe supplier and the butt -fusion machine manufacturer. The butt -fusion machine shall be approved by the pipe supplier and shall be sized for the specific pipe being joined. It shall be provided with a means of accurately controlling pipe alignment and the joining force. The butt -fusion machine shall also be provided with a powered facing unit to trim irregularities from the pipe ends. The heating plate shall be electrically heated and shall be provided with a thermostatic control and a temperature indicator. If the softened pipe sticks to the heater plate, the bead is not uniform, the joint is porous, or the joint is any way faulty, it shall be cut out, the faces retrimmed, and the pipes rejoined. If so requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide two test specimens from each size joint used in the work. The specimens shall be prepared in conformance to ASTM D1599-82. 151804 INSERTION The access excavation shall have a 2h to lv maximum entry slope. All sharp rocks and pavement corners shall be removed from areas where the liner travels. When possible, the access excavation shall coincide with the connection excavations to minimize traffic disturbances. All connections shall be excavated prior to insertion of each slipline section. The excavations shall comply with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations and shall provide adequate room for reconnection of laterals and connection of liner sections. The top of the existing sewer shall be exposed to the springline for the full length of the excavation prior to removal of the crown 1990 15-12 W32668.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 portion of the existing sewer. The crown shall be removed for a length of at least five times the inside diameter of the existing sewer. Any jagged edges shall be removed and all debris quickly removed from the pipeline. Prior to insertion of the liner a test run shall be made with the pulling head attached to a length of liner as recommended by the sliplining pipe manufacturer. If the test liner is crushed, deeply scratched or damaged in any way which might reduce its effective service life, that portion of the existing sewer which caused the damage shall be repaired or removed and the test rerun. A power winch in conjunction with a manhole downhole puller shall be used to pull the assembled liner into place. The equipment shall be designed and operated in a manner which will not cause any damage to the liner, or manhole. Any portions of the liner which are damaged prior or during the insertion shall be removed and the liner rejoined. Where polyethylene liner pipe is inserted from a point of access between two manholes the ends of the liner pipe shall be joined together with a shear ring type rubber compression coupling in accordance with ASTM C425-77 (1982). The exposed liner and clamp shall then be encased with cement stabilized sand. 151805 CONNECTIONS After the liner is in place and has relaxed to its final position, the service connections shall be connected to the polyethylene liner. The original sewer shall be carefully removed to expose the liner and provide sufficient working space. The connection to the liner shall be made by either strap on saddles with neoprene gaskets and stainless steel bands, or heat fusion saddles. The saddles shall be made of polyethylene, shall accurately match the contour of the liner and shall be installed in a manner which is leakproof and does not damage or deform the liner. Polyethylene service lines shall be joined to the polyethylene service connection fittings by leakproof thermal butt or socket fusion joints. Where deemed acceptable by the Engineer, connections may also be accomplished by shrinkable polyethylene sleeves; elastomeric boot and tightening -band, or by full encirclement clamp fittings having an elastomeric seal member. Polyethylene service lines shall be joined to the existing cast iron or clay house lines by shrinkable polyethylene sleeves, elastomeric boot and tightening -band, or by full encirclement clamp fittings having an elastomeric seal member. The exposed polyethylene liner and service connection shall be encased with cement stabilized sand. The backfill under connections shall be well compacted to support the service lines to prevent settlement and possible damage to the liner pipe service connection. 151806 SEALING ANNULAR SPACE AT MANHOLES, HOUSE CONNECTION SEWERS, AND TERMINAL ENDS The annular space between polyethylene liner pipe and the existing sewer main shall be sealed where the liner enters or exits each manhole, at house connection sewers, terminal ends, or where the annular space is otherwise exposed. For grout sealing, the annular space shall first be caulked with an approved activated oakum. Treated activated oakum shall be placed a minimum of 1990 15-13 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 6 inches (152 mm) from the opening in the existing pipe and shall then be activated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The remaining annular space between the opening and the caulking shall then be filled with non -shrink grout made with Type V cement. A mechanical sealing device, approved by the Engineer, may be used to seal the annular space at manholes and terminal ends. Sealing device shall be LINK -SEAL manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or approved equal. 151810 POLYVINYL -CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS PVC pipe shall be Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 as specified, PVC 1120, conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 1785 and appendices thereto. Pipe shall be extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454 material as specified in ASTM D 1784. Fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2466 or D 2467 for pressure fittings, or to D 2665 for DWV fittings as is appropriate to the service and pressure requirement. PVC pipe shall be tested at the pressure listed in the piping schedule. 151810.10 CLASS 150 PVC PIPE PVC Class 150 pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2241 except that the pipe shall have outside diameters of ductile iron pipe sizes instead of iron pipe sizes. All PVC, Class 150 pipe shall meet the requirements of SDR 17 and Uni-Bell Standard UNI -B-2-72. As an alternate the PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C 900 with pressure class of 150 and DR or not less than 18. Each length of pipe shall be capable of withstanding without failure 600 psi hydrostatic pressure for a minimum of 5 seconds. The integral bell shall be tested with the pipe. Provisions shall be made for contraction and expansion at each joint with a rubber ring and integral thickened bell as part of each joint. The rubber ring shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 1869. The bell section shall be at least as strong as the pipe barrel. At least 85 percent of the total footage of pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths of 20 feet. The remaining footage of pipe may be in random lengths of not less than 10 feet long. Sizes and their respective dimensions shall be as specified in the following tabulation: Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) Outside Pipe Minimum Pipe Wall Diameter (Inches) Thickness (Inches) 4 4.80 0.282 6 6.90 0.406 8 9.05 0.532 10 11.10 0.653 12 13.20 0.776 1990 15-14 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 15 151810.20 PVC PIPE LEAKAGE TEST All PVC pipe shall be tested for leakage at 125 psi, measured at the lowest point in the line. Any sections of pipelines indicating more than the allowable leakage shall be repaired and retested until the leakage is less than the allowable indicated below. The leakage test shall be for a minimum duration of 2 hours. The leakage test shall be made after backfilling. Any visible leaks shall also be repaired. Pipe Diameter Allowable Leakage Inches Gallons/100 Joints/Hour 1-1/2 0.41 2 0.52 2-1/2 0.63 3 0.76 4 0.98 6 1.45 8 1.88 10 2.35 12 2.80 152100 PIPING SPECIALTIES The Contractor shall furnish and install, wherever shown on the Plans, as called for in these Specifications, or as required for proper operation of equipment, all items specified under this heading including gaskets, bolts, caulking materials, hangers, supports, guides, anchors, and such incidental materials and equipment as are required to make the items complete and ready for use. 152110 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS Where shown on the Plans or specified, or elsewhere as approved by the Engineer for the Contractor's convenience, flexible couplings shall be furnished and installed. Flexible couplings shall be galvanized when on galvanized pipe or on pipe which are epoxy or cement lined, or when underground. When flexible type couplings are used as expansion joints, the ends of the pipe shall be separated to allow for expansion. For cast iron pipes, flexible couplings shall be Dresser Style 53; Rockwell Series 430; Baker Series 228; or equal. For steel pipes, flexible couplings shall be Dresser Style 38; Rockwell Series 411; or equal, except where other Styles are required for special conditions. Where indicated on the Plans, flexible couplings shall be suitable for connecting pipes which have different outside diameters. Flanged coupling adapters shall have not less than two anchor studs each. 1990 15-15 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 Where flexible couplings are installed underground, Type 316 stainless steel bolts shall be used. The entire coupling shall be given a 20 -mil coat of T.C. Mastic as manufactured by the Tape Coat Company, Inc.; Bitumastic No. 50 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc.; or equal. As an alternative to Mastic Coating of buried flexible couplings, a fusion bonded coating may be used. The fusion bonded epoxy coating shall be applied in the factory using fluidized bed procedure. Spray on flocking and electrostatic coating will not be acceptable. The fusion bonded epoxy coating shall have the following properties as a minimum. Property Test Description Units Value Specific Gravity (Powder) Air Pycnometer 1.22 Coverage ft2/lb/mil 158 Average Gel Tank (400°F) Seconds 27 Average Cure Time (400°F) Minutes 2 Edge Coverage % 7 Adhesion --Shear ASTM D1002 psi 4700 Hardness ASTM D 2583 (Barcol) 7 Tensile Strength ASTM D638 psi 8350 Elongation ASTM D2370 % 6.2 Compressive Strength STM D2370 psi 1300 All parts to receive fusion bonded epoxy coating shall be blast cleaned to SP10 near white condition and masked. Parts shall be preheated and emersed in fluidized bed to a minimum thickness of 10 mils. Gel and core time shall be as specified. Only alternative gel and cure times as recommended by the raw material manufacture will be allowed. All defects shall be repaired using a field touch-up system approved by the manufacturer. Epoxy coating shall be Scotch Kote 203, 3M St. Paul, MN, or equal. Victaulic couplings, to be used where indicated on the Plans, shall be as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America, Gustin-Bacon, or equal. Victaulic couplings for cast iron pipe shall be Style 31. Couplings for steel pipe shall be Style 77. Adapter bands shall be welded to the ends of the steel pipe as necessary to permit proper installation of couplings. 1990 15-16 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 Gaskets for all couplings except those on the air piping system shall be neoprene rubber, or equal. Gaskets for couplings in the air piping system shall be suitable for operation at a temperature of 250 degrees F. All flexible couplings shall have tie downs unless directed otherwise with a written note on the Plans. 152111 FLEXIBLE RUBBER CONNECTIONS Flexible rubber connections, unless otherwise noted, shall be 3/8 -inch thick neoprene rubber tube with full faced flanged ends to withstand 150 pounds per square inch working pressure. Flexible rubber connections shall be Type 150 Vibraflex as manufactured by the Mercer Rubber Company; Part No. P-5 as manufactured by Red Valve Company, Inc.; or equal. Flexible rubber connections shall be complete with galvanized retaining rings and control rods. 152130 EXPANSION AND VIBRATION CONTROL Piping shall be installed in such a manner that equipment vibration will not be transmitted through the piping system and normal expansion and contraction with temperature changes will not induce damaging stresses in the piping or connected equipment. Where anticipated expansion is greater than can be absorbed by the normal piping configuration, provision shall be made as indicated on the Plans by loops, bends, and expansion joints to absorb the excess. Care shall be taken in packing, shipping, and installing expansion joints to prevent damage to joint bellows or sliding surfaces. Care shall also be taken against damaging joints during pressure test. Expansion joints shall be locked against movement in any direction until the pressure test is completed. Any visible damage to an expansion joint, whatsoever, shall be sufficient cause for the Engineer to reject said joint. A rejected joint shall be replaced with a like joint in a new and undamaged condition at no extra cost to the Owner. 152131 EXPANSION JOINTS Except as otherwise specified or shown, expansion joints shall be of the flexible bellows type with equalizing rings, Keflex Series 308 as manufactured by U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Company; Controlled Flexing Expansion Joint as manufactured by Flexonics Division of Universal Oil Products Company; or equal, rated for 150 psig at 400 degrees F. Bellows shall be of laminated stainless steel and shall be equipped with a self -draining liner guide. Axial traverse of each expansion joints shall be not less than 1.50 inches. End connections shall be 150 -pound ANSI flanges or welding ends. Expansion joints shall be installed in a manner to allow 2 -1/4 -inch expansion per 100 linear feet of pipe. Where possible, expansion joints shall be installed adjacent to an anchor, and piping shall have one concentric guide within 12 pipe diameters, but not more than 5 feet from the end of the joint opposite the anchor. A similar guide shall be located approximately 1990 15-17 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 30 diameters but not more than 10 feet from the first. Any expansion joint not installed adjacent to an anchor shall have two concentric guides similarly located at each end of the joint. Additional guides shall be located as shown on the Plans, but at no greater intervals than recommended by the joint manufacturer. Pipe alignment guides shall be as manufactured by Flexonics Division of Universal Oil Products Company; U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Company; Grinnell; or equal. Intermediate supports shall be a minimum of 10 feet center to center and shall be roller -type as manufactured by Unistrut, Elcen, or equal, and shall be provided with protective saddles tack welded to pipe. 152133 VIBRATION CONTROL Where indicated on the Plans or specified, vibration absorbing connectors shall be installed between pumps, blowers, compressors, and similar equipment and the attached piping. Vibration absorbers shall be protected against end loading and torsional stresses by firmly anchoring the attached pipe not more than 2 feet from the absorber. Size and length shall be as shown on the Plans. In general, every pipe going to or from each piece of mechanical equipment for any purpose whatsoever shall have a flexible vibration joint in that pipe near the equipment at points between vibration and no vibration. Flexible vibration joints 2 inches and smaller shall be braided bronze U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Company, Type KFCB; Flexonics Division of Universal Oil Products, Type Vibra Sorber; Nelson Dunn Series ND -B; or equal. Joints shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 250 pounds per square inch. Flexible vibration joints larger than 2 inches shall be U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Company, Series 151 -TR -1215; Flexonics Division of Universal Oil Products Type TCS; or equal. Vibration joints shall be of the flexible bellows type and shall be rated for 150 psi at 70 degrees F. Vibration joints with higher pressure rating shall be furnished if maximum operating pressure in the piping is higher than 150 psi. The bellows shall be made of stainless steel and shall be equipped with a stainless steel liner. End connections shall be ANSI Class 150 flanges. Vibration joints in the high pressure air lines shall be braided stainless steel U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Company, Type USFNSS-31; Flexonics Division of Universal Oil Products Company, Type FCS; or equal, with ANSI Class 150 flanges and suitable for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi. 152135 PIPE SADDLES Pipe saddles shall be furnished and installed where indicated on the Plans. Pipe saddles shall be Series 336 or Series 338 as manufactured by R. H. Baker and Company, Inc.; Style 304 as manufactured by Ford Meter Box Company, Inc.; or equal. Pipe saddles shall be Type 304 stainless steel with rubber gaskets. Threads on bolts shall have anti -gall coating. Size of the tapped boss shall be as indicated on the Plans. 1990 15-18 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 15 152200 PRESSURE GAUGES 0 Pressure and compound gauges shall be installed as indicated on the Plans and as specified herein. 0 0 0 0 0 s All gauges shall be dual -range with the scales in feet and pounds per square inch. The units of each scale shall be clearly identified on the gauge face. All gauges shall be not less than 4-1/2 inches in diameter, except where noted otherwise. The gauges shall have back flanged aluminum cases with threaded ring, except if for panel mounting, in which case the gauge shall have a front flanged aluminum case with threaded ring. The case shall be fitted with a rupture disc which shall relieve out the back of the case. Gauges shall have Type 316 stainless steel bellows or bourdon tube, depending on pressure range. If maximum pressure is not more than 10 pounds per square inch, the gauge shall use bellows as the measuring element. If maximum pressure is not less than 15 pounds per square inch, the measuring element shall be a bourdon tube. Socket tips for bellows and bourdon tube shall be stainless steel. The socket tips of all gauges shall be not less than 1/2 -inch size. All gauges shall be fitted with shatterproof glass. Pressure gauges shall be Solfrunt Gauges Figure No. 1931T; as manufactured by U.S. Gauge Division of Ametek, Inc.; Ashcroft Figure No. 1379; as manufactured by Dresser Industrial Valve and Instrument Division, Dresser Industries, Inc.; or equal. Gauges shall be mounted on diaphragm seals where indicated on the Plans. Diaphragm seals shall have Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm and bottom housing unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. The bottom housing shall be fitted with a flushing connection. This flushing connection shall be fitted with a Type 316 stainless steel close nipple and a cock. The diaphragm seal gauge assembly shall also be fitted with a snubber. The snubber shall dampen pressure fluctuations in the filled system. All diaphragm seal gauge assemblies shall be filled with silicon and the snubber filter disc shall be sized to prevent the gauge from pulsing violently. The snubber shall be made of stainless steel and shall be as manufactured by Chemiquip, Ashcroft, or equal. The diaphragm seal shall be an Ashcroft Type 101 as manufactured by Dresser Industrial Valve and Instrument Division, Dresser Industries, Inc.; Type AG as manufactured by Mansfield and Green Division of Ametek, Inc.; or equal. All pressure gauges, except gauges with diaphragm seals, shall have pulsation dampeners installed between the gauge and the shut-off valve. The pulsation dampeners shall be made of stainless steel. Pulsation dampeners shall be Ashcroft Figure No. 1106S as manufactured by Dresser Industrial Valve and Instrument Division, Dresser Industries, Inc.; Ray Pressure Snubbers as manufactured by Operation and Maintenance Specialties, Charlotte, North Carolina; or equal. 1990 15-19 W3266B.10 0 3266B.10 Div. 15 The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer for approval. These Shop Drawings shall include information on all items and shall be complete to show that all requirements of the Specifications are being met. 152400 SIGHT GLASSES The Contractor shall furnish and install sight glasses where indicated on the Plans and as specified herein. Sight glasses shall be Type K2 or K3 Cleanable Sight Glass as manufactured by EIMCO Process Machinery Division of Envirotech Corporation, Ernst, or equal. The assembly shall consist of a body casting with ANSI standard adapter flanges. Pyrex glass section, cleaning assembly with scalloped neoprene wipers, operating rod and handle, packing gland with packing and suitable adapter, and cock with solvent hand pump. Sight glasses shall be suitable for 30 psi operating pressure. Equivalent units manufactured by Ernst or equal of pyrex glass will be acceptable. 152250 VACUUM GAUGES Gauges shall be supplied on the drain pumps to measure the suction head as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. Vacuum gauges shall be magnehelic differential pressure gauges, Model 2003, as manufactured by Dwyer; equivalent model as manufactured by Barton; or equal. The gauge shall read from 0-3.0 inches of water, in .10 inch divisions. Vacuum gauges shall be mounted as shown in Detail A of typical 480 as shown on the Plans. 152615 FLASHINGS Vents, roof drains, and pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with not lighter than 4 -pound sheet lead flashings. Flashings shall extend not less than 6 inches up the pipes, where they shall be counterflashed with standard cast iron or malleable iron recessed roof couplings. Flashing for vents may be carried up to the top of the vent and turned down into the pipe. Flashing shields shall extend not less than 8 inches from the vent and pipe in all directions. 152620 ROOF DRAINS Crown roof drains shall be 4 -inch size Zurn Series Z-100, Josam Series 21520, or equal. Scupper roof drains shall be Zurn Z-187, Josam 24700, 2 -inch pipe size, or equal. Down spout nozzles shall be turn Z-199, Josam 25010, or equal. Scupper and roof drains shall be constructed of dura -coated cast iron. The drains shall be installed as indicated on the Plans. 1990 15-20 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 153000 VALVES The Contractor shall furnish all valves where indicated on the Plans, as called for in these Specifications, or as required for proper operation of the equipment in general. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or specified in other sections of these Specifications, valves shall conform to the requirements as specified herein. Valves shall be manufactured by a manufacturer whose valves have had successful operational experience in comparable service. The valve manufacturer shall furnish detailed technical information as required by the Engineer for evaluating the quality of the valves and as required by the Contractor for proper valve installation. The technical information shall include complete dimensions, weights, and material lists. No valve will be approved for installation until the required information has been received and approved. The Contractor shall furnish three sets of complete installation operation and maintenance instructions for each type of valve furnished. Instructions shall be bound in a cover. Wherever stainless steel is specified in this section, it shall be AISI Type 316, or Type 304 unless otherwise specified. Where valve, gate, and operator bolts and nuts are submerged in sewage or water, occur in an enclosed space above sewage or water, are installed below the tops of walls of structures containing sewage or water and are installed at openings in concrete or metal decks, bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel unless specifically noted otherwise. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, stainless steel bolts shall be used. Underground bolts shall be low - alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C 111, unless specifically noted to be otherwise. The zinc content of bronze or brass used in any valve parts shall not exceed 6 percent. The aluminum content of bronze shall not exceed 2 percent. The method of connection of valves to each piping system shall be as detailed on the Plans. In general, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or specified, all valves 3 -inch size and larger shall have flanged ends or shall be designed for bolting to flanged pipe, and all valves less than 3 -inch size shall have screwed ends. The Contractor shall furnish to the pipe supplier, after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the face-to-face dimensions of all flanged valves and check valves to be installed in flanged pipelines so that the pipe may be fabricated to the proper length. All buried valves shall have cast iron valve boxes. The boxes shall be asphalt varnished, or enameled cast iron, adjustable to grade, and installed perpendicularly, centered around and covering the upper portions of the valve or valve operator. The box shall not be supported in any manner by the valve, valve operator, or the pipe. The top of each valve box shall be placed flush with finish grade unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Valve boxes shall be two-piece Mueller Company, Tyler Pipe Industries Inc., or equal. 1990 15-21 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 All buried valves and other valves located below the operating deck or level, specified or noted to be key operated, shall have an operator shaft extension from the valve or valve operator to finish grade or deck level, a 2 -inch square AWWA operating nut, and cover or box and cover, as may be required. Except as otherwise specified, all buried valves shall be painted with two coats of asphalt varnish in accordance with the requirements of AWWA Standard C 500. This protective coating shall be protected from damage until valve is backfilled. After installation the valves shall be wrapped with polyethylene as specified for cast iron pipe. Globe and gate valves shall be installed with stems horizontal or vertical above the pipe, except as specifically indicated otherwise. All butterfly valves and plug valves above grade not specified to have geared operators shall be fitted with ell or tee wrench or handles for operation. Wrenches shall be secured to the valve head or stem except that if a wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel it shall be stowed immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or receptacle. Where proper operation and utilization of equipment and facilities requires installation of valves not shown or specified, the Contractor shall provide and install, upon approval by the Engineer, valves similar and comparable to valves specified for similar and comparable duty in other parts of the project, without additional cost to the Owner. 153010 INSTALLATION OF VALVES The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install the valves complete in place at the locations indicated on the Plans in accordance with the details and these Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish all incidental materials necessary for installation of the valves such as flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, and all other materials required for the complete installation. The Contractor shall provide the necessary concrete bases and blocking to support the valves. Manually operated valves and gates located not more than 6 feet above the operating level shall be provided with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels as is appropriate. Valves over 5 feet to center line shall be rolled toward the operating side to make the handwheel or wrench more accessible to the operator of average height. Valves located below the operating level or deck shall be provided with extensions for key operation or floor stands and handwheels as appropriate. Valves over 6 feet above the operating level shall be fitted with chain operated handles or valve wheels as appropriate. Chains shall reach to approximately 4 feet above the operating level. If, when not in use, chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, they shall be provided with hold backs or other means of keeping them out of the way. Valves shall be installed in all cases so that handles clear all obstructions when moved from full -open to full -closed position. 1990 15-22 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 153210 GATE VALVES UNDERGROUND Gate valves for buried installation shall be iron body, resilient seat, nonrising stem, conforming to AWWA C 509, with double 0 -ring stem seal. Valves shall open counterclockwise. Valve ends shall be flanged, mechanical joint. 153300 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES Plug valves, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, shall be nonlubricated eccentric plug valves. Valves located at a height 6 feet or less above the floor shall be equipped with a lever operator for valves of 4 -inch size and smaller and with a worm gear operator for valves of 6 -inch size and larger. Each valve shall be furnished with an operating wrench or worm gear operator. Eccentric plug valves shall be semi -steel, (ASTM 126, Class B) eccentric type with neoprene or Buna N faced plug. The body seats in all valves of 3 -inch size and larger shall have an overlay of not less than 90 percent nickel on all surfaces contacting the plug face. The stem bearing and bottom bearing shall be of stainless steel material. All internal parts except the body and plug shall be Series 300 stainless steel, Monel, or nickel. Eccentric plug valves shall be designed and constructed for 150 psig working pressure. Eccentric plug valves shall be DeZurik, Homestead "Ballcentric," or equal. Eccentric plug valves shall have ends as required by the piping details as indicated on the Plans. Plug valves in screwed pipelines may be screwed or flanged at the Contractor's option. The resilient face of the plug shall be of material which will operate satisfactorily at a temperature of 185 degrees F continuous and 215 degrees F intermittent for all valves except that valves in compressed air service shall be suitable for duty at 250 degrees F continuous. Valves shall be clearly marked to indicate their open and close positions. 153400 CHECK VALVES Except as otherwise specified, shown on the Plans, or approved by the Engineer, check valves shall be as follows: Check valves shall be for 125 -pound or better service and suitable for operation in either horizontal or vertical position. 153410 SWING CHECK VALVES Swing check valves shall be of sizes indicated on the Plans and of a pressure rating as specified below. All check valves shall be designed for operation in either horizontal or vertical position. Check valves 2-1/2 inches in size and smaller shall be 200 -pound, Y -pattern, bronze, regrinding, swing check valves with screwed ends, Crane No. 36, Kennedy Figure No. 444, or equal, except check valves in welded steel pipes shall be 150 -pound flanged Crane No. 38, Lunkenheimer No. 596, or equal. Check valves 3 inches in size and larger shall be iron body, bronze mounted, flanged -end, swing check valves, special Mueller A-2600 as manufactured by Mueller Company; H341 and H342 Ludlow -Rensselaer as manufactured by Patterson - 1990 15-23 w3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 Ludlow Division of Banner Industries Inc. with no parts made of brass or bronze containing over 6 percent zinc and no aluminum, and rated at 175 pounds per square inch; or equal. Hinge pins shall be stainless steel. Valves shall be equipped with outside lever and weight. The lever and weight shall be so constructed and so positioned that it can operate without interference by any piping, supports, or equipment. 153415 CUSHIONED CHECK VALVE The valve shall be swing check in configuration with a pneumatic dampening chamber. The valve shall be constructed of cast iron in accordance with ASTM A 126 Class B for body cover and disc, stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 157-C9 or A 276 for seat, Buna-N for disc seat, and bronze B 62 for cushion cylinder. Valves shall be rated Class 250. Valves shall be shockless Swing -Check Valve Figure No. 250-U by G A Industries; Air Cushioned Swing - Check Valve Series 6000 by APCO; or equal. 153841 AIR -VACUUM RELEASE VALVES - SEWAGE The Contractor shall furnish and install air -vacuum release valves where indicated on the Plans, and specified herein. Air -vacuum release valves shall be Universal Air Valve as manufactured by Multiplex Manufacturing Company; APCO; or equal. Valves shall be furnished with a 1 -inch screwed inlet fitting, a 1/4 -inch orifice, and a Protectop. Valve bodies shall be cast iron, and valves shall have a working pressure of not less than 165 psi. Note: Low profile air vacuum release valves are required for the purpose of this Project. 154500 VALVE AND GATE OPERATORS All valve operators other than T -wrenches or keys, and portable operators intended for operating more than one valve, or type of valve, shall be furnished by the valve or gate manufacturer as an integral part of the valve or gate. All similar operators shall be of one manufacturer. All gates and hand operating lifts shall be of the same manufacturer. All hydraulic gate lifts shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be furnished with shop drawings through the manufacturer of the gates as completely integrated units. Similarly all hydraulic valve operators shall be of one manufacturer, and all motorized operators shall be of one manufacturer. Operators for gates or valves having threaded stems that project above the operator as the gate or valve is opened shall have stem covers to cover the threaded portion of the greased stem. Stem covers shall be aluminum pipe with threaded cap on top and bolted aluminum flange on bottom. Slots, 1 inch wide and 12 inches long at 18 inches on center shall be cut in front and back of pipe. Flange, pipe, and cap shall be etched and anodized after fabrication in accordance with The Aluminum Association, Inc., Standard Designation C 22, medium matte finish, and A 41 clear anodic coating. After installation of the gate and stem cover, the stem cover shall be marked at the point where the top of the stem is at full -open position and where the top of the stem is at the closed position. Gate stem cover shall be plumb and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. 1990 15-24 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 All other operators shall have a means of determining the valve position. These may be tail rods on hydraulic cylinders, dial indicators calibrated in number of turns or percentage of opening, or other means acceptable to the Engineer. Dial indicators shall have the full -open and full -closed positions clearly indicated. All manual or power operators shall be sized to deliver the maximum force that may be required under the most severe specified operating conditions including static and dynamic forces, seat and wedge friction, seating and unseating forces, etc., with a safety factor of 5 unless otherwise specified. All operators shall be capable of supporting the weight of any suspended shafting unless such shafting is carried by bottom thrust bearings. Shaft guides with wall mounting brackets shall be furnished and installed as required. Where specified or indicated, crank or handwheel operated geared valve operators or lifts, shall be positioned and equipped for alternate operation by means of a tripod mounted portable gate operator. Operators for all valves and gates shall turn counterclockwise to open and shall have an arrow and legend so indicating cast on the handwheel or chain wheel rim, crank, or other prominent place on the operator. All operators shall have suitable and adequate stops, capable of resisting at least twice the normal operating force, to prevent overrun of the valve or gate in open or closed position. Buried operator housings for buried valves shall be oil and watertight, shall be specifically designed for buried service, and shall be factory packed with a suitable grease. The space between the operator housing and the valve body shall be completely enclosed such that no moving parts are exposed to the soil. Operators for buried valves shall be furnished with a 2 -inch square AWWA operating nut. Gearing on worm gear operators shall be self-locking, and the gear ratio shall be such that a torque in excess of 160 foot pounds will not have to be applied to operate the valve at the most adverse conditions for which the valve is designed. Traveling nut operators shall be designed such that a torque in excess of 100 foot pounds will not have to be applied to operate the valve at the most adverse condition for which the valve is designed. Limit stops shall be installed on the input shaft of all manual operators in the OPEN and CLOSED positions. The vertical axis of the operating nut shall not move as the valve is opened or closed. Sluice and slide gate operators shall be as listed in the GATE SCHEDULE on the Plans. 154520 KEY OPERATED VALVES The Contractor shall furnish the number of keys or wrenches specified, but not less than four, for operating key operated valves. Each key or wrench shall have a 4 -foot shaft and 3 -foot handle. Keys having pipe handles shall have the handles supplied by the Contractor. 1990 15-25 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 15 154530 GEARED VALVE OPERATORS All manually operated butterfly valves larger than 6 inches on liquid service or 10 inches on gas or air and all plug valves 6 inches and larger shall be provided with geared operators. These operators shall be mounted on the valves at the factory. Valves mounted 6 feet or less above the floor shall have handwheel operators. Valves mounted more than 6 feet to center line above the floor shall have chain wheel operators. Operator shall have cut gears, either spur or worm, and shall be sized to operate the valve at the most adverse design condition with a pull at the handwheel or chain wheel rim of not more than 40 pounds. Traveling nut operators will not be acceptable. 154600 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS The Plans do not, in all cases, show where or how pipe is supported; however, it is intended that all pipe and fittings shall be properly supported, suspended, or anchored as required to prevent sagging, overstressing, or longitudinal movement of certain piping, and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against pumps, meters, and other equipment. The pipe support manufacturers shall determine the proper support size where sizes have not been indicated on the Plans. In addition to supports indicated on the Plans, exposed piping shall be supported at the base of all risers, at intervals not to exceed 3 feet on all horizontal runs of pipe 2 inches and smaller, and at intervals not to exceed 10 feet on all horizontal runs of pipe larger than 2 inches. Piping 4 inches and larger through fill, backfill, or disturbed ground shall be supported at intervals not to exceed 10 feet with supports as detailed on the Plans. Plastic pipe and tubing, copper pipe and tubing, and rubber hose and tubing shall be supported at close enough intervals to prevent noticeable sagging (in no case more than 2.5 feet for diameters of less than 1-1/2 inches and 5 feet for diameters of 1-1/2 inches and larger), or shall be carried in trays. Plastic pipe, valves, and headers shall be securely anchored to prevent any apparent movement during operation of valves. Plastic pipe shall be anchored between expansion loops and/or direction changes to provide for uniform expansion. Where concrete supports are used under piping, the supports shall be poured 1 inch low, then the next day or later, the pipe grouted in place with nonshrink grout. Nonshrink grout shall be used under floor flanges to give level bearing. Floor flanges shall be bolted to the floor with at least two bolts, or as shown on the Plans. Hanger rods shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation, or as shown on the Plans. Supports, clamps, clevises, brackets, or any devices bearing against copper pipe shall be copper plated, copper throughout, or insulated, except trays which shall be galvanized. Special details are shown on the Plans for special supports for heavy pipe and specials. Such supports shall be of heavy or sturdy design to carry the loads imposed thereon. 1990 15-26 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 No use shall be made of chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or other such devices for suspending, supporting, or clamping pipe of any size or type. Brackets, supports, hangers, etc. shall be painted as specified in DIVISION 9. Except as otherwise specified or approved, hangers and supports shall be as follows. 154610 ANCHOR BOLTS AND INSERTS Anchor bolts and concrete anchors shall be in accordance with DIVISION 5. A 0 Where shown on the Plans, continuous concrete inserts, Unistrut Series P3200, or Elcen "Speed Strut" Figure 1150 of the lengths shown or specified shall be furnished and installed. Where not otherwise shown or specified, inserts in concrete ceilings and beam soffits may be malleable iron inserts, Grinnell Figure 152 or 282; Bergen -Patterson Part 108; Unistrut Series P3200; or equal. Wall and side beam inserts shall be Unistrut Series P3200; Elcen "Speed Strut" Figure 1150, or equal. Support members shall be Unistrut Series P-1000, Elcen "Speed Strut" Figure 600, or equal. Support members and brackets shall be painted in accordance with the requirements of DIVISION 9, prior to installation of pipe or trays. Brackets shall be brackets of the model number as called for on the Plans, and made from Unistrut Series P-1000; Elcen "Speed Strut" Figure 600, or equal. Channel inserts shall be installed in all pipe trenches and pipe galleries below grade even under buildings at not more than 5 feet on centers. Channel inserts shall be installed in ceilings where shown on the Plans at not more than 5 feet on centers. Both wall and ceiling inserts shall be placed so that they are staggered at the midpoint spacing of the opposite wall. Channel inserts shall extend to within three inches of top of walls. Vertical channel supports installed opposite inserts shall extend to same height as inserts. Under no circumstances will the use of Slugin or similar anchors relying on the deformation of a lead alloy or similar element for their holding power be permitted. With the Engineers written permission, powder driven studs may be used for the securing of conduit and small pipe to structural metal, but their use will not be permitted in concrete, masonry, and similar materials. 154620 SINGLE PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Single pipe hangers for pipe over 6 -inch shall be adjustable clevis hangers, Bergen -Patterson Part 100; Grinnell Figure 260; or equal. Single pipe hangers for pipes 6 -inch and smaller may be as specified above or may be solid or split malleable iron rings, Bergen -Patterson Part 233 or 240; Grinnell Figure 104 or 101; or equal. Single rod hangers for steam pipe shall be malleable iron or steel yoke and roller hangers, Elcen Figure 14 or 14A; Grinnell Figure 174 or 181; or equal. 1990 15-27 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 Double rod steam pipe hangers, shall be Elcen Figure 15; Grinnell Figure 171; or equal. 154621 WALL OR CEILING CLAMPS Pipe fastened against walls or ceiling shall be spaced out from the surface to allow the make up of unions, fittings, etc. For pipe larger than 2 -inch, supports shall be offset pipe clamps, Elcen Figure 44; Bergen -Patterson Part 179; or equal. For pipe 2 -inch and smaller, supports may be as above, or may be Unistrut standoff pipe clamps. 154630 TRAPEZE HANGERS Use shall be made of trapeze hangers where shown on the Plans or where several pipes are located at the same elevation in a horizontal plane. Unistrut sections, fittings, etc., or their equal, shall be as called for on the Plans. 154640 WALL BRACKETS Wall brackets shall be fabricated steel, Bergen -Patterson Part 84; Grinnell Figure 195; Unistrut P2513, 2513A, or 2542; or equal. 154660 FLOOR STANDS AND STANCHIONS Floor stand or stanchion saddles shall be furnished with U -bolt hold down yokes, Grinnell Figure 259; Bergen -Patterson Figure 125; or equal. Poured concrete pipe supports shall be cast where indicated on the Plans. Vertical corners shall be neatly chamfered. As a minimum of cradling, the concrete shall extend 1/4 of the pipe diameter above the pipe invert and at least 6 inches along the pipe shell. 154670 RISER SUPPORTS All elbows to be supported from the floor shall be furnished and installed as base elbows, whether so indicated on the Plans or not. Supports for the base fittings shall be adjustable metal supports or concrete piers as shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Riser clamps shall be Elcen Figure 29, Grinnel Figure 261, or equal. 1990 15-28. W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 15 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 160100 GENERAL It is the intent of this part of the Contract Documents to cover all work and materials necessary for erecting complete, ready for continuous use, a tested and working electrical system, substantially as indicated on the Plans and as hereinafter specified. 160101 GENERAL PROVISIONS Minimum sizes of equipment, electric devices, etc., are indicated but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural or mechanical difficulty that will be encountered during the installation of the work. All work indicated on the Plans is approximately to scale, but actual dimensions and detailed drawings should be followed as closely as field conditions permit. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is directed since actual locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by field conditions. Discrepancies indicated on different Plans, between Plans and actual field conditions, or between Plans and Contract Documents shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer for a decision. The alignment of equipment and conduit shall be varied due to architectural changes, or to avoid work of other trades, without extra expense to the District. The Contractor shall furnish and install all parts and pieces necessary to the installation of equipment in accordance with the best practice of the trade and in conformance with the requirements of these Contract Documents. All items not specifically mentioned in these Contract Documents or noted on the Plans or accepted shop drawings, but which are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be deemed to be included herein. The Contractor shall lay out and install electrical work prior to placing floors and walls. He shall furnish and install all sleeves and openings through floors and walls required for passage of all conduits. Sleeves shall be rigidly supported and suitably packed or sealed to prevent ingress of wet concrete. The Contractor shall furnish and install all inserts and hangers required to support conduits and other electrical equipment. If the inserts, hangers, sleeves, etc. are improperly placed or installed, the Contractor shall do all necessary work, at his own expense, to rectify the errors. All electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full - rated load, without failure, at an ambient air temperature of 40 degrees C, and specifically rated for an altitude of 6,300 feet. 1990 16-1 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 16 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings, data and details to the Engineer on all controls, fixtures, wiring, electrical equipment, conduit, etc. for review and acceptance prior to use of any components in the work. 160103 REGULATIONS AND CODES Electrical work, including connection to electrical equipment integral with mechanical equipment, shall be performed in accordance with the latest published regulations of the National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), State and local codes, and according to the latest standards of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers IEEE); American National Standards Institute (ANSI); American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM); Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA); National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards; National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) Standard of Installation; and the latest published regulations of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act OSHA). When applicable, the material used in the performance of the electrical work shall be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for the class of service for which they are intended. 160104 SERVICE A new 480 V, 3 phase, 4 wire service shall be installed. Contractor shall coordinate service work with Sierra Pacific Power Co. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate his work with the Engineer and the Owner in order to preclude any unsafe operations. Initial service request is made by the Engineer. However, during the construction, the Contractor shall be responsible to contact and coordinate his work with the utility company to ensure timely completion of the new service. The Contractor shall verify all required work regarding electrical services with the utility company prior to submitting bids. 160105 TEMPORARY POWER The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary power and lighting systems needed for construction. This temporary system shall include weatherproofing panel(s) for the Contractor's main breakers and distribution system. Ground fault interrupting equipment shall be installed. All connections shall be watertight with wiring done with Type SO portable cable. After construction is completed, the Contractor shall remove all temporary power equipment and devices. 160106 CUTTING AND REPAIRING Where it becomes necessary to cut into existing work for the purpose of making electrical installations, core drills shall be used for making circular holes. Other demolition methods for cutting or removing shall be reviewed by the Engineer prior to starting the work. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused thereby and restore damaged areas to original condition. 1990 16-2 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 160107 CORROSION PROTECTION Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come in contact, the Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with neoprene washers, 9 mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets. Where fastening conduit, electro plated, or equivalent fasteners and stainless steel bolts shall be used. Factory finishes damaged and/or rusting shall be restored to original new condition. All electrical panels, switchgear, motor control centers, etc. shall be shipped in sealed dust and moisture -proof plastic sheet enclosures and the seal maintained until units are installed. Said units shall be in new condition, no dirt, dust, water, grease, rust, damaged parts, components, etc. All relay, starter, circuit breaker, switches, etc., contacts, insulators, mechanisms, and buses shall be free of dust, dirt, oil, moisture, metal shavings, etc. before testing and energizing. Once equipment is installed, it shall be protected at all times with plastic sheet covers until the area is secure from dirt, dust, workers, paint spray, water, etc. Heat shall be provided to eliminate condensation. 160108 COORDINATION OF THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RATING The Contractor shall verify all actual equipment and motor full -load and locked -rotor current ratings. The necessary minimum equipment, wire, and conduit sizes are indicated on the Plans. If the Contractor furnishes equipment of different ratings, the Contractor shall coordinate the actual current rating of equipment furnished with the branch circuit conductor size, the overcurrent protection, the controller size, the motor starter, and the branch circuit overcurrent protection. The branch circuit conductors shall have a carrying capacity of not less than 125 percent of the actual full -load current rating. The size of the branch circuit conductors shall be such that the voltage drop from the overcurrent protection devices up to the equipment shall not be greater than 2 percent when the equipment is running at full -load and rated voltage. The motor running overcurrent protection devices shall be rated or selected to trip at no more than 125 percent of the motor full -load current rating for motors marked to have a temperature rise not over 40 degrees C or motors marked with a service factor not less than 1.15 and at no more than 115 percent for all other types of motors. The motor controller size shall be coordinated to the current rating and horsepower size of the installed motor. The motor -branch -circuit overcurrent protection device shall trip open in 30 seconds or less on locked -rotor current of the motor. This device shall also protect the motor -branch -circuit conductors and the motor control apparatus against overcurrent due to short-circuits or grounds. The motor control circuits shall have overcurrent protection of the type indicated on the Plans. 1990 3266B.10 Div. 16 16-3 W3266B.10 160109 TEST The electrical work shall be free from improper grounds and from short circuits. The correctness of the wiring shall be verified first by visual comparison of the conductor connections with connection diagrams. Individual circuit continuity checks shall next be made by using electrical circuit testers. Last, the correctness of the wiring shall be verified by the actual electrical operation of the electrical and mechanical devices. Any deviation from the wiring indicated on the Plans or accepted drawings shall be corrected and indicated on the Plans. 160110 CONFORMS TO RECORD DOCUMENTS DRAWINGS Prior to completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a set of electrical plans marked with any changes, deviations or additions to any part of the electrical work. Each conductor shall be identified as required by the Contract Documents. This identification shall be indicated on the record documents drawings to enable rapid and accurate circuit tracing by maintenance personnel. 160111 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS Single line diagrams, as indicated on the Plans, show circuit voltages, (4xx is 480V, 3xx is 277V, 2xx is 240V, lxx is 120V circuits), wire and conduit sizes, circuit protection rating, and other pertinent data. Where conflicts exist on the Plans the single line diagrams shall take precedence. Grounding conductors are not necessarily indicated. See grounding requirements specified elsewhere herein. 160112 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION The 3-phase wires shall be identified at the switchgear, motor control center, and panelboard as Phases A, B and C. Color coding for the conductors shall be as follows: System Service Insulation Color 480V, 3-phase Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow 240V, 1 -phase L1 Black L2 Red 120V, 1 -phase L Black All Control Violet All Neutral White All Ground Green In addition to color coding all conductors, each conductor shall be identified in each pull box, manhole, panelboard, cable tray, or termination with circuit identification markers. This identification is applicable to all power, control, alarm, and instrumentation conductors and these markings shall be recorded on the Record Documents. Markers shall be slip-on PVC sleeve type as manufactured by Brady, Seaton, or equal. 1990 16-4 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 Markers for other cabling shall be B-292 vinyl as manufactured by Brady, Seaton, or equal. 160113 NAMEPLATES Where indicated on the Plans, the Contractor shall furnish and install nameplates which shall be black lamicoid with white letters. The nameplates shall be fastened to the various devices with round head brass screws. Each disconnect means for service, pushbutton station, feeder, branch, or equipment conductors shall have nameplates indicating its purpose. 160114 AUTOMATIC EQUIPMENT WARNING SIGNS Permanent warning signs shall be mounted at all mechanical equipment which may be started automatically or from remote locations. Signs shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations and shall be suitable for exterior use. The warning signs shall be fastened with round head brass screws or bolts, located and mounted in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Warning signs shall be 10 inches high by 14 inches wide, colored red, black, and white on not less than 18 gauge vitreous enameling steel. Sign shall read: DANGER THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AUTOMATICALLY BY REMOTE CONTROL 160116 CONDUCTOR FASTENERS Glue -on type conductor fasteners shall not be used in any panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, motor control centers, or other enclosures containing electrical devices and/or conductors. 160200 GENERAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 160201 GENERAL All materials, equipment, and parts comprising any unit or part thereof specified or indicated on the Plans shall be new and unused, of current manufacture, and of highest grade consistent to the state of the art. Damaged materials, equipment and parts are not considered to be new and unused and will not be accepted. Field verification of scale dimensions on Plans is directed since actual locations, distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. The Contractor shall also review architectural, structural, yard, mechanical and other Plans, and the accepted electrical and mechanical shop drawings, and shall adjust his work to conform to all conditions indicated thereon. The fabricator of major components, such as distribution panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, shall also be the manufacturer of the major devices therein. 1990 32663.10 Div. 16 16-5 W3266B.10 160202 RACEWAYS Raceways include rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or any other channel for holding wires, cables, or bus bars that is designed for, and used solely for, this purpose. 160202.10 CONDUIT 160202.11 GENERAL All conduit shall be rigid steel unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Plans. All wiring, except as otherwise noted, shall be in conduit. Conduit size shall not be less than the National Electrical Code (NEC) size required for the conductors therein and shall not be smaller than 3/4 -inch. No underground conduit shall be less than one inch. Conduit runs are schematic only, and shall be modified as required to suit field conditions, subject to review and acceptance by the Engineer. Conduit shall run continuously between outlets and shall be provided with junction boxes where connections are made, except in special pull boxes indicated on the Plans. Conduits entering or exiting concrete shall be PVC coated or equivalent. Conduit runs shall be straight and true; elbows, offsets, and bends shall be uniform and symmetrical. Changes in direction shall be made with long radius bends or with fittings of the condulet type. Condulet type fittings shall be Crouse -Hinds, Appleton, or equal with wedge nut covers. Conduit runs in buildings and structures shall be exposed except as specifically noted or accepted by the Engineer. Conduit runs shall not interfere with the proper and safe operation of equipment and shall not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches. Exposed conduits shall be securely fastened with regulation clamps or straps. All exposed conduit shall be run on the walls and ceiling only and shall be parallel to the planes of the walls or ceiling. No diagonal runs will be permitted. Flexible conduit shall be used only for short lengths required to facilitate connections between rigid conduit and motors or control equipment. The maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 5 feet. Where flexible conduit is used, it shall be grounding type, weatherproof and watertight as manufactured by American Brass Company, General Electric, or equal. All condulets located outdoors or in wet locations shall be weathertight. Conduit runs on water -bearing walls shall be supported one inch away from the wall on an accepted channel. When channel galvanizing or other coating is cut or otherwise damaged, it shall be field coated to original condition. No conduit shall be run in water -bearing walls, unless specifically designated otherwise. Underground conduit runs shall be concrete encased, as detailed on the Plans, unless otherwise noted. 1990 16-6 W32668.10 32668.10 Div. 16 All conduit shall be thoroughly reamed after the threads have been cut to remove burrs. All joints shall be made with acceptable sealing compound and shall be watertight. Bushings or conduit fittings shall be used at all conduit terminals. The total of all bends in any run between pull boxes or junction boxes shall not exceed 360 degrees. Pull boxes shall be installed at points acceptable to the Engineer. Conduits brought into pull boxes, condulets, and other openings shall be capped until used to prevent the entrance of moisture. All spare conduits shall be capped and shall contain a suitable plastic pulling tape. Joints shall be set up tight. Hangers and fastenings shall be secure and of a type appropriate in design and dimensions for the particular application. After installation of complete conduit runs 2 inches and larger, conduits shall be snaked with a conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of the nominal diameter of the conduit. Conduits through which the mandrel will not pass shall not be incorporated as part of the contract. Conduit runs shall be cleaned and internally sized (obstruction tested) so that no foreign objects or obstructions remain in the conduit prior to pulling in conductors. Couplings, connectors, and fittings shall be threaded and shall be certified types specifically designed and manufactured for the purpose. They shall be installed expertly to provide a firm mechanical assembly and electrical conductivity throughout. Expansion fittings shall be installed across all expansion joints and at other locations where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion fittings shall be OZ type AX with jumper for exposed locations and type DX at structural expansion joints, Spring City, or equal. Shop drawings shall be submitted as requested by the Engineer for review and acceptance showing routing, conduit size, and number and size of wires in each conduit before installation of conduit. 160202.12 RIGID STEEL Conduit and couplings shall be hot -dipped galvanized with zinc coated threads and outer coating of zinc bichromate as manufactured by Triangle PWC, Inc., Allied Tube & Conduit Corporation, or equal. Steel conduit shall not be buried in earth without concrete encasement except in special cases where PVC coating is indicated on the Plans. 160202.14 PVC COATED STEEL PVC coated conduit shall be installed where shown on the Plans or elsewhere specified and shall conform to NEMA RN -1, Current Edition. The zinc surface of the conduit shall remain intact and undisturbed on both the inside and the outside of the conduit throughout the preparation and application processing. A Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) coating shall be bonded to 1990 32668.10 Div. 16 16-7 W3266B.10 the galvanized outer surface of the conduit. The bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the plastic. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be a minimum of 0.040 -inch 40 mil) . A loose coupling shall be furnished with each length of conduit. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the outer surface of the coupling and a PVC sleeve equal to the outside diameter of the uncoated conduit shall extend beyond both ends of the coupling approximately one pipe diameter or 1 1/2 inches, whichever is smaller. The wall thickness of the coating on the coupling and the sleeve shall be a minimum of 0.055 -inch (55 mil). A PVC coating shall be bonded to the outer surface of all conduit bodies and fittings and a PVC sleeve shall extend from all hubs. The wall thickness of the coating on conduit bodies and fittings and the sleeve walls shall be identical to those on couplings in length and thickness. The covers on all conduit bodies shall be coated on both sides and shall be designed to be completely interchangeable. The inside of conduit bodies shall remain undisturbed in the processing and shall retain the manufacturer's cadmium plate -aluminum paint finish. Stainless steel screws shall be furnished and used to attach the cover to the conduit body. All coated material shall be installed and patched according to the manufacturer's recommended installation and patching instructions. PVC coated conduit and fittings shall be as manufactured by Kor Kap Corporation, Occidental Coating Company, or equal. 160202.16 RIGID NONMETALLIC - PVC Where specifically indicated on the Plans, or elsewhere specified, conduit may be high density Schedule 40, 90 degrees C, heavy-duty PVC. The conduit shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound which meets ASTM standards. Smoke emissions shall be limited to less than 6 grams per 100 grams of material tested. Encasement shall be reinforced as indicated on the Plans. Conduit supports shall be installed at 2-1/2 foot intervals. PVC conduit shall be manufactured by Carlon, Triangle Conduit & Cable, or equal. 160202.17 CONDUIT USE Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used on those locations which are not subjected to a corrosive environment such as electrical equipment rooms. Minimum size of conduit installed underground and/or in slab shall be 1 inch. PVC coated steel conduits shall be used where exposed in those areas subjected to a corrosive environment and identified in the Plans as NEMA 4X installations. Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit may be used in lieu of rigid galvanized steel conduit when installed in underground steel reinforced concrete encased banks. Minimum size shall be 2 inches. 1990 16-8 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 160202.30 METAL PULL BOXES 160202.31 GENERAL Furnish and install pull boxes as indicated on the Plans and specified herein. Installation of pull boxes shall be such that access to the pull boxes is not restricted by obstructions such as pipes, valves, ladders, etc. Exact locations and sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to fabrication and installation. Additional pull boxes shall be installed as required to meet cable manufacturer's pulling tension requirements. Covers shall be secured with 316 stainless steel screws or bolts with coated threads. 160202.32 CONSTRUCTION Pull boxes shall be compatible with the type of conduit systems on which they are used. Pull boxes shall be fabricated from 11 -gauge (minimum) steel or aluminum and shall be completely weatherproof with gasketed removable covers. Weatherproof conduit hubs shall be furnished for all conduit connections to pull boxes. 160202.33 FINISH All metal surfaces shall be phosphatized and primed with a rust -resistant paint. Finish shall be two coats of "Safety Red" enamel paint. 160202.35 SIZING Pull boxes shall be sized according to code and shall be sized to provide room for the future conduits and cables indicated on the Plans. 160203 CONDUCTORS 160203.01 GENERAL All wiring shall be as indicated on the Plans. Wires shall be newly manufactured (not more than 12 months old) and shall be soft drawn copper with not less than 97 percent conductivity. The wire and cable shall have size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name permanently marked on the outer covering at not more than 2 -foot intervals. All wires shall conform to the latest Standards of the ASTM and ICEA and shall be tested for their full length by these Standards. Insulation thickness shall be not less than that specified by the National Electrical Code. Wire sizes shall be American Wire Gauge sizes with Class B stranded construction. No. 12 and No. 10 AWG may be solid conductor. No. 2 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded with a separate color for each phase and neutral, which shall be used consistently throughout the system. Larger cables shall be coded by the use of colored tape. 1990 16-9 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 As far as practicable, all circuits shall be continuous from origin to termination without splices in intermediate pull boxes. Sufficient slack shall be left at the termination to make proper connections. In no case shall a splice be pulled into the conduit. 160203.02 PULLING LUBRICANT All cables shall be properly coated with pulling compound recommended by the cable manufacturer before being pulled into conduits so as to prevent mechanical damage to the cables during installation. Other lubricants to be substituted must be accompanied by a statement from the cable manufacturer as to its acceptable use with the cable being installed. 160203.20 600 VOLT CLASS CABLE Individual or multiple conductor cables for power, control, and alarm circuits of 480 volts or less shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts and shall have Type THWN insulation. Cable tray conductors shall have Type TC insulation. Where wire size is not indicated, they shall be of the size required by the NEC, except that no wire external to panels and motor control centers shall be less than No. 12 AWG, unless specifically noted on the Plans. Panel control wiring shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Wire and cable shall be as manufactured by Okonite Company, Anaconda Wire and Cable Company, or equal. The pulling tension and side-wall pressures, as recommended by the cable manufacturer, shall not be exceeded. 160203.21 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES (600 VOLT AND LESS) Terminations shall be terminal board type with set -screw pressure connectors. Splicing shall join conductors mechanically and electrically to provide a complete circuit prior to installation of insulation. Conductors, including grounding conductors, of different sizes shall be spliced and then soldered or welded. Splices in wet locations and all splices below grade shall be waterproof heat shrink type as manufactured by Elastimold, Thomas -Betts, or equal. 160203.22 CONTROL AND SMALL POWER CABLE TERMINATIONS Terminals for control cable termination and for small power cable termination No. 10 and smaller) shall be of welded seam or tubular tinned copper construction. The terminals shall be designed for fastening to the conductor by indenting the terminal sleeves. 160204 GROUNDING The grounding systems shall consist of concrete encased ground conductors and/or ground rods. Each duct bank shall contain a concrete encased system ground conductor. The system ground conductors shall run continuously in duct banks, through manholes, handholes, and other raceway boxes. The system ground shall be connected to the structure grounding systems to provide a continuous ground system. Each metallic raceway, panel, switchboard, and other metallic devices associated with the electrical and instrumentation systems shall be bonded to this grounding system. 1990 16-10 W3266B.10 32663.10 Div. 16 All equipment cases, devices, etc. shall be grounded. Ground rods shall be driven or concrete encased conductors installed before a building or structure is built and ground conductors brought through the concrete to accessible points for grounding equipment. These systems shall be installed at each structure where switchgear, motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, etc. are installed. e s Where ground conductors are not sized, the NEC shall govern. Driven ground rods shall be copperweld, or equal, 5/8 -inch in diameter and not less than 10 feet in length. All connections of ground cable to rods or to cable shall be thermoweld connections. Maximum allowable ground resistance shall be 5 ohms. Tests shall be conducted by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer to determine the ground resistance for the entire system and at each building where there is switchgear, motor control, etc. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that a grounding conductor for all device and equipment grounds shall be run as a separate conductor in the conduit from the equipment to the motor control center or system ground. All wireways, enclosures, etc. shall be properly bonded and grounded, and grounding conductors shall be run for all circuits. 160205 OUTLET, SWITCH, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 160205.01 GENERAL Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Plans, device boxes, condulets and junction boxes shall be heavy-duty cast and shall be compatible with the location and conduit system being used, rigid steel or rigid copper free aluminum and shall be as manufactured by Crouse -Hinds, Appleton, or equal, with stainless steel cover screws and with cover gaskets. Device boxes shall be FD type. 160205.10 FASTENERS Fasteners used with wiring devices shall be aluminum or stainless steel and all screws, nuts, bolts, etc. shall be stainless steel. 160205.20 CONCRETE PULL BOXES The Contractor shall furnish and install precast concrete pull boxes in the locations indicated on the Plans and as required. The pull boxes shall be installed on 12 inches of compacted gravel and shall be installed in such a manner that the cover of the pull box will be flush with finished grade. The pull boxes shall be designed for traffic conditions, and the pull boxes and covers shall be designed for heavy traffic bridge loading. The pull boxes shall be a minimum of 3' x 2' x 30" deep with 3/4 inch diameter pulling irons located at each end. The pull boxes shall be constructed of reinforced Class A concrete. 1990 32668.10 Div. 16 16-11 W3266B.10 The pull boxes shall be Quickset, Utility Vault Co., or equal, with covers. The covers shall be engraved "ELECTRICAL". 160206 LIGHTING SWITCHES 160206.01 GENERAL Snap switches shall have the number of poles as indicated on the Plans, shall be specification grade, rated at 20 ampere, and shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, General Electric, or equal. Special switches, covers, etc. shall be as specified herein or indicated on the Plans. 160206.10 INDOOR Stainless steel cover plates shall be utilized. 160206.20 OUTDOOR AND CORROSION RESISTANT Enclosures shall be weatherproof. 160207 RECEPTACLES 160207.01 GENERAL Duplex receptacles shall be 2 -pole, 3 -wire grounded, 120 volts, industrial, rated at 20 amperes, and shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, General Electric, or equal. Special receptacles, covers, etc. shall be as specified herein or as indicated on the Plans. 160207.10 INDOOR Stainless steel cover plates shall be utilized. 160207.20 OUTDOOR AND CORROSION RESISTANT Enclosures shall be weatherproof with yellow "fiberglass" lift cover plates or accepted equal. 160207.30 GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER RECEPTACLES (GFI) GFI outlets shall be rated 20 amperes at 125 volts AC as manufactured by Leviton, Bryant, or equal. 160207.50 240 VOLT RECEPTACLES 240 volt receptacles shall be of the ampere rating as indicated on the Plans, however, the minimum rating shall be 20 amperes at 250 volts AC and shall be as manufactured by Leviton, Bryant, or equal. 1990 16-12 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 16 160208 PUSHBUTTON STATIONS 160208.01 GENERAL For indoor installation pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be heavy-duty, oiltight Allen-Bradley 800T Series, Furnas Class 52 or equal. They shall be of rugged construction chrome plated lock rings and silver contacts. For outdoor installation and where specified, they shall be Crouse - Hinds N Series, Allen-Bradley 800H Series or equal. Control stations shall be in NEMA 4X enclosures (corrosion resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester) for outdoor and NEMA 12 for indoor installation. Start -Lockout -Stop" pushbutton stations shall be installed adjacent to every motor unless specifically indicated otherwise. Lockout mechanism shall be made of metal. Pilot lights shall be of the push -to -test type. 160209 TRANSFORMERS - DRY TYPE 160209.10 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS - LOW VOLTAGE LIGHTING AND POWER Transformers shall be of the premium high efficiency quiet type and shall be installed where indicated on the Plans. The primary winding of the transformers shall have two 2-1/2 percent taps above and below normal. The transformers shall have a BIL of 10 kv with a temperature class of 185 degrees C for transformers up to 25 kva and a temperature class of 220 degrees C for transformers rated at 30 kva and larger. The sound level shall not exceed 44 dba measured at 5 feet from the transformer after installation. Core and coil assemblies 30 kva and larger shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators designed specifically to reduce 120 HZ sound and multiple harmonics. Transformer standards shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to purchase and installation. Transformers shall be of the types manufactured by General Electric Company, Westinghouse Corp., or equal. 160210 RELAYS 160210.10 CONTROL RELAYS Control relays shall be General Electric, Westinghouse, Square D Company, or equal, industrial 600 volt, 10 amperes type with contact arrangement and operating coils of the proper voltage as required by the control circuit sequence. Each relay shall have a minimum of 4 reversible pole contacts. The coils shall be sealed by pressure molding. 1990 16-13 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 160210.11 INTRINSICALLY SAFE RELAYS Intrinsically safe relays shall allow the use of any type of remote pilot device located in Class 1 hazardous areas by providing a pilot circuit incapable of releasing sufficient electrical energy to ignite gases and vapors classified in Groups A, B, C, and D. The unit shall have an output relay with double pole, double throw contacts rated at least 16 amperes at 120 volts AC, resistive load, and 24 volts DC. They shall operate on the AC supply voltage indicated on the Plans. They shall be Cutler -Hammer, BW Series, or equal. 160211 TIMERS 160211.01 GENERAL Timers which require pins or other removable trip devices shall be provided with at least one pin or trip device for each possible time setting. 160211.10 RESET TIMERS AND REPEAT CYCLE TIMERS Timers of this type shall be heavy-duty industrial timers as manufactured by Eagle, Paragon, or equal. 160211.20 TWENTY-FOUR HOUR TIMERS Timers of this type shall be heavy-duty industrial timers as manufactured by Paragon, Tork, or equal. 160211.30 TIMING RELAYS Timing relays shall be heavy-duty industrial 600 volt, 10 amperes as manufactured by Square D Company, Westinghouse, or equal. 160211.50 RUNNING TIME METERS Running time meters shall measure up to 99999.99 hours and shall draw less than 5 watts at 120V 60HZ. They shall be Westinghouse, Simpson, or equal. 160212 ENCLOSURES 160212.01 GENERAL This specification includes enclosures to house electrical controls, instruments, terminal blocks, etc. If not indicated otherwise they shall be NEMA 12 for indoor and NEMA 4X for outdoor installations, and where specifically indicated. 160212.10 CONSTRUCTION - STEEL (NEMA 12) Enclosures shall be from 14 gauge steel with seams that are continuously welded. Doors shall have full length piano hinges with the door removable by pulling the hinge pin. They shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, Fischer & Porter, or equal. 1990 16-14 W32668.10 32668.10 Div. 16 A rolled lip shall be provided around three sides of the door and around all sides of the enclosure opening. The gasket shall be attached with oil - resistant adhesive and held in place with steel retaining strips. Exterior hardware, such as clamps, screws, and hinge pins, shall be of stainless steel for outdoor installations. A hasp and staple shall be provided for padlocking. Each enclosure shall have a print pocket. 160212.11 FINISH - STEEL (NEMA 12) Finish shall be white enamel interior, light grey enamel, ANSI 61 exterior, over phosphatized surfaces. Special finishes and colors shall be furnished for wet locations. Plans should be checked for special conditions. 160212.20 CONSTRUCTION - FIBERGLASS (NEMA 4X) Enclosures shall consist of base and cover which shall be heavy-duty hot compression molded from fiberglass reinforced polyester compound containing not less than 25 percent fiberglass by weight. Transparent covers, where indicated, shall be polycarbonate. The enclosures shall be provided with cover hinges manufactured from nonmetallic materials. The cover latch system shall be nonmetallic. The gasket system shall be of neoprene material cemented into a molded labyrinth on the cover. The enclosures shall be NEMA 4X and shall be as manufactured by Crouse -Hinds, English Electric Corp., or equal. 160213 SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR, PANELBOARDS 160213.30 PANELBOARDS 160213.31 GENERAL Dead -front panelboards, including lighting distribution and control panels, shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the Plans. All bus shall be copper. Mounting and type enclosures shall be as indicated on the Plans. Where not indicated, indoor enclosures shall be NEMA 12 and outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 4. The minimum interrupting capacity of any device shall be 22,000 amperes. 160213.32 INTERIORS Protective devices shall be such that they can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units. Wire connectors shall be suitable for wire sizes indicated. Branch circuits shall be numbered as indicated on the Plans and a complete typed circuit schedule shall be furnished under a transparent cover and affixed to the panel. Phase busing shall be full height without reduction. Full size neutral bars shall be included and shall have suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring neutral connection. Spaces for future protective devices provided in lighting panels shall be bused for the maximum device that can be fitted into them. A ground bus shall also be provided. 1990 32668.10 Div. 16 16-15 W3266B.10 160213.33 ENCLOSURES Panelboards shall be furnished with a primer, rust -resistant phosphate undercoat and two coats of oven -baked enamel with finish color to be accepted by the Engineer. They shall have sufficient size to provide a minimum of 4 inches of gutter space on all sides. Doors shall be such that they: 1. In making switching devices accessible, shall not uncover any live parts; 2. Are hinged and have latches that require no tool to operate; and 3. Can be locked. Lock and two keys shall be furnished. 4. Indoor pocket with typed circuit directory. 160213.34 IDENTIFICATION Each panelboard shall have, on the outside of the door, a lamicoid nameplate with 3/4 inch letters as specified elsewhere in these Contract Documents. Panelboards shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, General Electric, or equal. 160218 TERMINAL BLOCKS Terminal blocks shall be Square D Co., Buchanan, or equal. Terminal blocks shall be of the size required for conductors therein and a minimum of 50 percent spares shall be provided in each terminal box. All terminal blocks shall be rated at 600 volts. 160220 FLOAT SWITCH Float switch shall be direct acting and consist of a polypropylene housing, mounting clamp, a flexible three -conductor cable with a synthetic rubber jacket and a mercury switch. The float housing shall be a sphere of at least 4-1/2 inches in diameter. The mercury switch shall be embedded in a metal housing inside the float. The cable shall be No. 14 AWG with 105 strands per conductor, made specifically for underwater use and heavy flexing service. The mercury switch shall be connected to two of the three conductors of the cable. The third conductor shall be an internal ground and shall be colored green. The switch shall have a 20 -ampere rating at 115 -volt AC. An additional synthetic rubber jacket shall act as a hinge between the float and where the cable is held by the stationary clamp. This clamp shall be stainless steel with an adapting fitting and two yokes for mounting on a vertical 1 -inch pipe. A liquid rise of 1 inch from the reset position shall operate the float switch, and reset shall occur when the liquid level drops to 1 inch. Operating temperature shall be 0 degrees F to plus 180 degrees F. 1990 16-16 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 16 Weight and buoyancy shall be such that contaminants like a cake of grease will not result in the float switch changing operating level more than 1 inch. A cast aluminum, NEMA 4 junction box shall be supplied for termination of the float cable(s), to allow conventional wiring and conduit to be run from the junction box to a control panel. It shall have terminal blocks for the required number of circuits and shall accept sealed fittings furnished with the float switch. Float switch shall be Flygt ENH-10 or equal. 160400 PUMP STATION CONTROL PANELS (ES -1, ES -2 & ES -3) 160400.01 GENERAL The Contractor shall furnish and install ready to use, pump station control panels for use as indicated on the Plans and specified herein. The control panels shall be weatherproof NEMA 3R. All gasketing to be permanent type that will not peel off or deteriorate. Metal work shall be cold rolled steel 14 gauge throughout. Seams shall be welded and corners shall be grounded smooth. Door(s) shall be padlockable and vandal resistant. All hinges shall be of continuous concealed piano type and constructed of stainless steel. Screws, rivets, and bolts shall not be visible from outside. All screws, nuts and bolts shall be stainless steel. Dead front door latches shall be 1/4 turn adjustable. 160400.02 STANDARDS The type of construction of the control panels shall be NEMA Class II, Type C wiring with control diagrams showing wire numbers in panel. 160400.03 PAINTING All metal surfaces and structural parts shall be given a phosphatizing, or equal, treatment prior to painting. The pump control panels shall then be given a gun-metal gray undercoat which is equal to zinc chromate. Interior surfaces shall be white. The exterior of the enclosure shall be finished in a color selected by the Engineer. 160400.04 DEVICES Devices, such as, but not limited to, starters, circuit breakers, relays, timers, conductors, shall conform to other sections of these Contract Documents. 160400.05 SPARE PARTS In addition to spare parts installed in the pump control panels as shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall provide the following spare parts to the Owner at no additional cost: One dozen pilot lights. One dozen control fuses 480V -120V. Two control power transformers. 1990 16-17 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 160400.06 INFORMATION FOR REVIEW The control panels shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of Standards for Industrial Control No. ICS published by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. The following minimum information and drawings shall be submitted for review and acceptance by the Engineer: 1. Plan, front, side views and overall dimension of each pump control panel. 2. Internal wiring diagram. 3. External connection diagram showing the wiring of the external controls and devices associated with the pump control panel. 4. A one -line and a schematic diagram for pump control panel. 5. Bill of material list. 6. Nameplates schedule with equipment name and circuit designation. 7. Upon acceptance by the Engineer, Contractor shall submit 2 sets of contract record drawings of pump control panels. Drawings and details shall be referenced explicitly to the contract drawings by circuit numbers, equipment designations, locations, etc. 160500 CIRCUIT BREAKERS - LOW VOLTAGE 160500.01 GENERAL All circuit breaker frame and trip ratings shall be as indicated on the Plans, except that they shall be coordinated with the ratings of the equipment actually furnished and shall be modified where necessary to suit this equipment. Circuit breakers to be used in motor control centers shall be as indicated on the Plans. Where no indication of type is given on the Plans, the following shall govern: Circuit breakers protecting motors rated 7.5 horsepower or less shall be motor circuit protectors, all other circuit breakers shall be molded case circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, General Electric, or equal. 160500.10 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Circuit breakers for mounting in motor control centers or for separate mounting shall be of the air -break type, quick -make and quick -break, 600 volt, with number of poles as indicated on the Plans. The minimum frame size shall be 100 amperes. Each pole of these breakers shall provide inverse time delay and instantaneous circuit protection. 1990 16-18 W3266B.10 3266B.10 Div. 16 A A 0 0 0 0 The breakers shall be operated by a handle and shall have a quick -make, quick - break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuming a position between the manual ON and OFF positions. All latch surfaces shall be ground and polished. All poles shall be so constructed that they open, close and trip simultaneously. Breakers must be completely enclosed in a molded case. Noninterchangeable trip breakers shall have their covers sealed; interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be of nonwelding silver alloy. Arc extinction must be accomplished by means of arc chutes. The minimum interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal to the available short circuit at the line terminals, but not less than 22,000 A RMS symmetrical. Circuit breakers shall conform to the applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Publication No. AB1. Circuit breaker ratings, modifications, etc. shall be as indicated on the Plans. Molded case circuit breakers shall be ambient compensating that provides inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermal magnetic element. Compensation shall be accomplished by a secondary bimetal that will allow the breaker to carry rated current between 25 degrees C and 50 degrees C with tripping characteristics that are approximately the same throughout this temperature range. On breakers with interchangeable, thermal, adjustable magnetic trip, the accessibility and position of the adjustment knob shall not be changed from those on the standard breaker. 160500.20 MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS Electrical circuits shall be protected by motor circuit protectors (MCP) as manufactured by Westinghouse Electric Corporation, General Electric, or equal. The MCP shall be operated by a handle and shall have a quick -make, quick -break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuming a position between the manual ON and OFF positions. All latch surfaces shall be ground and polished. All poles shall be so constructed that they open, close, and trip simultaneously. MCP's must be completely enclosed in a molded case. MCP's shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible. Contacts shall be of nonwelding silver alloy. Arc extinction must be accomplished by means of arc chutes. 1990 32668.10 Div. 16 16-19 W3266B.10 Each pole of these MCP's shall provide instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a single adjustable magnetic only element. The single adjustment screw shall adjust all poles simultaneously. Provision shall be furnished in the MCP for locking the maximum achieveable trip setting to values less than maximum obtainable trip setting. Each adjustment shall have 8 main setting points and mid -setting points following a linear scale so that each point has a significant value within calibration tolerances. MCP's shall be suitable for use with current limiters, having 100,000 ampere interrupting capacity and a built-in trip indicator, that are fully coordinated with the MCP so that the MCP will open all 3 phases if the limiter operates. Current limiters shall be constructed that they can only be replaced by an identical or similar limiter having the same interrupting capacity. The minimum interrrupting ratings of the MCP shall be at least equal to the available short circuit at the line terminals, but not less than 22,000 A RMS symmetrical. MCP ratings, modifications, etc., shall be as indicated on the Plans. 160500.40 MODULAR OVERLOAD RELAYS Where called for on the Plans, modular overload relays shall be provided with the motor starters. The modular overload relays shall be 3 -pole solid state devices set by one plug-in heater and shall protect all 3 phases of the motor in ambient temperatures ranging from -20 degrees to +70 degrees C. The jam modules shall plug in the modular overload relays and shall provide for instantaneous trip of the overload relay should the current exceed a preset value at any time after the motor has accelerated. The modules shall be adjustable to any value between 150 percent and 400 percent of the motor full -load current. The underload modules shall plug in the MOR and shall provide for overload relay trip whenever the current falls below a set value after the motor has accelerated. The modules shall be adjustable between 50 percent and 90 percent of the full load value of the motor full load current. Each module shall provide individual trip indication and reset for each trip condition, visible without opening the motor control center compartment door. Each module shall provide an auxiliary contact for remote trip indication. All solid state circuits shall be completely protected from damage arising from line transients and voltage spikes. They shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, Square D Co., or equal. 1990 16-20 W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 16 160600 MOTOR CONTROL - LOW VOLTAGE 160600.01 GENERAL Starters Size 2 and larger shall have arc quenchers on all load breaking contacts. Starters shall be suitable for the horsepower ratings specified, except the Contractor shall verify the motor ratings and coordinate the starter and overload trip ratings with the actual horsepower ratings of the motors installed. Extended overload reset buttons shall be mounted so as to be accessible for operation without opening the door of the enclosure. Magnetic contactors shall be factory adjusted and shall be chatter free. Magnetic contactors shall have bimetallic type overload relays in each line conductor as indicated on the Plans. Starters shall be furnished complete with a 120 -volt control transformer unless otherwise noted. Where above normal ambient temperatures are anticipated, circuit breaker trip elements and starter overload trip elements shall be supplied to meet such conditions and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Control fuses shall be furnished where indicated in the schematics. The magnetic contactors shall not be smaller than the size indicated on the Plans. Starters shall be sized to handle motors furnished even if motors should be larger than indicated on the Plans. The minimum size starter shall be NEMA Size 1. 160600.10 MANUAL STARTERS Manual starters as indicated on the Plans shall be across -the -line manual motor starters for motors up to one hp, 600V having the electrical characteristics indicated on the Plans. Manual starters shall have: Enclosures as indicated on the Plans, handles that clearly indicate the ON, OFF with lockout, and TRIPPED positions, pilot light, and positive, quick -make, quick -break mechanisms. The manual starters shall be Square D, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, or equal. 160600.20 MAGNETIC STARTERS 160600.21 FULL VOLTAGE Across -the -line full voltage magnetic starters for up to 600V shall have electrical characteristics indicated on the Plans. Magnetic starters shall have: NEMA 12 enclosures unless otherwise noted; positive, quick -make, quick -break mechanisms; padlockable enclosure doors; 3 overload relays; 15 percent adjustment from nominal heater rating on the overload relay; cover mounted reset button; and at least 3 reversible contacts in addition to the hold -in contact. 1990 32668.10 Div. 16 16-21 W3266B.10 Magnetic starters shall be built in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards and shall be manufactured by Westinghouse Electric Corporation, General Electric, or equal. 163100 LIGHTING 163110 GENERAL Lighting fixtures shall be as described below and as indicated on the Plans. Fixtures shall include lamps, ballasts, poles, mounting hardware, etc. to provide complete operating units. Lamps shall be as manufactured by Westinghouse, Sylvania, or equal. High pressure sodium lamps shall be color corrected. Fluorescent fixtures shall be rapid start type. Catalog data including applicable coefficients of utilization tables, isolux chart of illumination on a horizontal plane, beam efficiency, horizontal and vertical beam spread, and beam lumens shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance for all fixtures before fixtures are manufactured. Substitutions will be permitted only if acceptable to the Engineer. Fixture shall be as designated in the fixture schedule. 160120 INSTALLATION Surface and flush mounted fixtures shall be solidly connected to a junction box. Suspended fixtures shall be hung utilizing pendant mounting or stainless steel chains and hooks. Each fixture, or row of fixtures, shall be electrically connected by a length of Type SO flexible cord, 3 conductor No. 14 AWG, minimum, with a twist -lock plug to a twist -lock receptacle mounted in an individual junction box. Plugs and receptacles shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, General Electric Company, or equal. Pole mounted fixtures shall be mounted on steel or aluminum poles as designated in the fixture schedule or Plans. All metal poles shall be bonded to the plant ground system. Poles shall have adequate handholes and weatherproof receptacles where indicated. All anchor bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel. Contractor shall paint all steel poles with aluminum paint or other color in accordance with these Contract Documents. 163130 BALLASTS Ballasts shall be ETL/CBM certified for the purpose intended with built-in thermal protector that disconnects the ballast permanently prior to actual ballast failure. Where required by code, ballasts shall be two winding. Ballasts shall be high efficiency, high power factor, constant wattage type and shall be fused. Ballasts windings shall be copper. Ballasts shall be Advance, Universal, or equal. 1990 16-22 W3266B.10 32668.10 Div. 16 163140 FIXTURE SCHEDULE FIXTURE TYPE "F" (120 -VOLT): The fixture shall be industrial type Fluorescent 2-40 watts rapid start with procelain reflector finish with high power factor CBM certified energy saving ballast. The fixture shall be DAY-BRITE CFI -10 40211-4, Benjamin, or equal. 167100 METER AND MAIN DISCONNECT COMBINATION The meter/main service disconnect combination shall be furnished and installed as detailed on the Plans. It shall be suitable for use outdoor and shall be vandalproof. The utility company will provide and install the meter. The Contractor, therefore, shall verify with the utility company that the meter socket be of the approved type prior to installation. The main circuit breaker section shall have provision for padlocking. The main breaker shall be as specified elsewhere in this division. A ground bus shall be provided for connection to ground rod and bonding to the neutral at this location. Provide all required hardwares for complete installation of this unit as shown on the Plans. The top of the unit shall not be mounted more than 66 inches above finished grade. Provide a nameplate with stainless steel screws Metering Station - Main disconnect". 169840 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 169840.10 GENERAL Automatic transfer switch(es) shall be furnished and installed, as indicated on the Plans, with full load current rating at 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz. The switch(es) shall be capable of switching all classes of load, and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a nonventilated enclosure. Withstand current rating shall be 22,000 A RMS. The transfer switch shall be double throw, actuated by a single electrical operator momentarily energized with a total transfer time not to exceed one- sixth second. The switch(es) shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70 percent or rated voltage applied to the terminals. The normal and standby contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both the normal and standby positions without the use of hooks, latches, or magnets, and shall be silver alloy protected by arcing contacts, with magnetic blowouts on each pole. Parallel main contacts are not acceptable. The transfer switch(es) shall be equipped with a manual operator that is designed to prevent injury to personnel if the electrical operator should become energized during manual transfer. The transfer switch(es), including all parts and supports, shall meet a seismic loading equal to their weights multiplied by a force factor, Cp. The directions of force, simultaneously and separately, shall be in any horizontal and vertical planes. The switch(es) shall be capable of normal operation 1990 3266B.10 Div. 16 16-23 W3266B.10 during and after seismic loading. Seismic loading shall not cause false operation. The force factor, Cp, shall be as defined in the Uniform Building Code. 169840.20 ACCESSORIES The transfer switch(es) shall be equipped with the following: 1. Nominal 1- to 3 -second time delay to override momentary outages. 2. Field adjustable 2- to 25 -minute time delay to retransfer to normal source with 5 -minute unloaded running time of standby plant. A switch shall be provided to bypass this feature with transfer to normal source made manually. Time delay shall be nullified if standby power fails and normal power is available. 3. Differential protection on 3 phases. Dropout and pickup. 4. Test switch. 5. Auxiliary contacts which close when normal source fails. 6. Auxiliary contacts which open when normal source fails. 7. Auxiliary contacts on main contacts, closed on normal. 8. Auxiliary contacts on main contacts, closed on emergency. 9. Voltage and frequency lockout relay. 10. Six indicating lights - each indicating power on phases of normal and/or standby power sources. 11. To avoid excessive inrush currents, an integrally mounted phase monitor shall prevent transfer or retransfer until the phase angle between the power sources is within then electrical degrees within a frequency differential of two hertz. The monitor shall not require any control wiring to the generator. The monitor shall be bypassed if the load carrying source fails and the alternate power source is available. UPS system(s) are or will be a power source. 169840.30 OPERATIONAL TESTING A means shall be provided to automatically start and run the standby generating set for a set period of time for the purpose of testing or exercising the complete engine, generator, and load transfer control. After completion of the set period of time for testing and exercising, the standby source shall be automatically shut down. Such periods for testing and exercising shall be adjustable in multiples of 15 minutes per period with the period repeated on any combination of days over a cycle of 7 days before recycling. During the period of testing and exercising, standby power shall not automatically assume its load. 1990 16-24 W32668.10 32668.10 Div. 16 169840.40 TESTING When conducting temperature rise tests in accordance with UL -1008, the manufacturer shall include post -endurance temperature rise tests to verify the ability of the switches to carry full rated current after completing the overload and endurance tests. The transfer switch, complete with all accessories, shall be listed by UL under Standard UL -1008. The manufacturer shall issue a certification of compliance with the Plans and Contract Documents. On completion of the installation, start-up shall be performed by a factory - trained service representative in the presence of the operating personnel and the Engineer. Prior to acceptance of the installation, the equipment shall be subjected to: Load tests with all available motor load, but not to exceed generator's nameplate rating. Any defects which become evident during this test shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense. The transfer switches shall be as manufactured by Automatic Switch Company, Russelectric Company, or equal. 169920 ALARM PANELS (ANNUNCIATORS) Alarm panels or annunciators shall be furnished and installed as indicated in the Contract Documents. Alarm panel annunciators shall be suitable for mounting in a control panel complete with appropriate bezel mounting hardware. Each alarm panel shall have an alarm horn. Annunciators shall have all required terminals and auxiliary dry contacts for remote alarming of individual alarm points to another location for use in a computer addition annunciator, or relay panel. Each alarm panel shall have test/acknowledge button. After receiving an alarm condition, the respective window shall flash and horn shall sound. On pressing the "acknowledge" button, the alarm window shall become steady illuminated and the horn shall cease. Subsequent alarms shall repeat this sequence. The alarm annunciator window shall go out only after the acknowledge button has been pressed and alarm condition corrected. Each annunciator shall have a "first out" feature to indicate which alarm point occurred first when multiple alarm conditions apparently occur simultaneously. 1990 32668.10 Div. 16 16-25 W3266B.10 Annunciators shall have rectangular display flange with barrier mounting on the short side, separate removable lampholder section with four lamps, to enable lamp replacement without tools, clear lamps with colored buttons, while spacing barriers, three piece screens with white legend inserts, transformer 120/240 volts AC for the operation of the entire alarm system. Two SPDT silver contacts for each push .button and switch. Where remote annunciator panel is shown, the necessary switches and/or equipment shall be provided at the local panel to provide indication and pushbutton control at each interconnected panel. Where the annunciator system is required to transmit alarm signals to a remote location using leased telephone lines, the Contractor shall furnish and install telemetering equipment to transmit the alarm condition together with remote location receiving and alarm indication equipment. The annunciator(s) shall be manufactured by Panalarm, Ronan, or equal. 1990 16-26. W3266B.10 32666.10 Div. 16 BID FORM THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT EL DORADO COUNTY, CALIFORNIA SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT EL DORADO COUNTY, CALIFORNIA SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT FALLEN LEAF LAKE SEWAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM IMPROVEMENTS - PHASE I UNDERSIGNED, AS BIDDER, HEREBY AGREES AND DECLARES THAT: BID IRREVOCABLE FOR 90 DAYS Bids delivered to the District at the time set for opening of bids shall be irrevocable, and may not be withdrawn for a period of ninety (90) days after the date set for the opening of bids. SCHEDULE OF PRICES All applicable sales taxes, State and/or Federal, and any other special taxes, patent rights, or royalties are included in the prices quoted in this Bid. All prices must be filled in. LUMP SUM BID For construction of The South Tahoe Public Utility District Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System Improvements - Phase I complete in place in accordance with the Plans and Specifications therefor, for the Lump Sum Bid of: in figures) written in words) Dollars COSTS INCLUDED IN PRECEDING LUMP SUM BID The undersigned declares that the cost for all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for the completion of the South Tahoe Public Utility District Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System Improvements - Phase I is included in the Lump Sum Bid of this Bid and that such cost is as indicated in the following: 1990 BD -1 W3266B.10 32666.10 BD a s s i i i i 0 Permits, licenses and insurance necessary for the performance of the Work, the sum of in figures) written in words) Dollars Sheeting, shoring and bracing necessary for the performance of the Work, the sum of 41 (in figures) A 1, 0 written in words) Dollars LIST OF EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS The name of the manufacturer of each piece of equipment listed below that will be installed in this project is set forth below. Only one manufacturer of each item shall be listed and all blanks shall be completed. Bidder agrees that in the event any so listed manufacturer is not specifically named in the Specifications, he will, prior to award, submit complete information satisfactory to the Engineer that such manufacturer's equipment complies with all requirements of the Specifications. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the so listed manufacturer's equipment does not comply with the Specifications, the bid may be rejected unless, prior to award, the Bidder, in writing agrees to supply approved equipment without a change in the bid price. 30 kW Emergency Generator Discharge Pumps LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS The name and location of place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvements in an amount in excess of one-half of one (0.5) percent of the Contractor's total bid, and the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor is set forth as follows. Those subcontractors who are Minority Business Enterprises (MBE's) shall be identified as such. Circumvention by the Contractor of the requirement to list subcontractors by the device of listing one subcontractor who will in turn sublet portions constituting the majority of the work covered by this Contract shall be considered a violation of Chapter 2 of Section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code and shall subject the Contractor to the penalties set forth in Sections 4110 and 4111 of said Code. 1990 BD -2 W3266B.10 3266B.10 BD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Portion Name Location of Business (Type of Work) 1990 BD -3 W3266B.10 I/ 32668.10 BD a a a a EXPERIENCE DATA The Contractor shall, when requested by the District during consideration of a bid, submit a brief description of the character of the work previously executed and the locations of the major projects, giving the year in which it was done, the manner of its execution, name and address of owner, overall cost when constructed, and such other information as will tend to show ability to prosecute vigorously the work required by this Specification. 1990 BD -4 W3266B.10 3266B.10 BD r i 0 CLOSING STATEMENT In conformance with current requirements of Section 1861 of the Labor Code of the State of California, the undersigned confirms the following as his certification: I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract. The undersigned has the legal authority to bind the bidder to a contract for the execution of the Work object of this Proposal. Legal name of bidder: Type of firm: If corporation, incor- porated in the State of: Business address: sole proprietor; _ partnership; _ corporation Other Telephone: California Contractor's License: Expiration date, ; Classification, ; Number, Addenda: The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda Nos. The undersigned further acknowledges that manditory attendance at the prebid conference is a condition of an acceptable bid. 1990 BD -5 W3266B.10 32668.10 BD PERSONS AND PARTIES INTERESTED IN THIS PROPOSAL The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing Proposal as principals are as follows: List first and last names in full; for corporation, identify the President, Secretary, Treasurer, and Manager; and for partnerships and joint ventures, give names and Post Office addresses of all the individual members.) DECLARATION I/We declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing statements in this Proposal are true and correct. Date, at , California. By (signature): Printed name and position: Seal: Co-signed or attested (signature): Printed name and position: 1990 BD -6 W3266B.10 32668.10 BD a SAMPLE 00 BIDDER'S BOND 10 Percent Of The Lump Sum Bid) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the South Tahoe Public Utility 00 District, El Dorado County, California, in the sum of w 00 Dollars ($ to be paid to the said District its successors and assigns, for which payment, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these present. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, That if the certain bid of the above bounden South Tahoe Public Utility District, El Dorado County is accepted by the said District and if the above bounden his heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, shall duly enter into and execute a Contract for such construction, and shall execute and deliver the Labor and Material, Bond, Performance Bond, and other Contract Documents described, within ten (10) days from the date of the award and notice to the above bounden by and from the said District that said Contract is ready for execution, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and virtue. 1990 32668.10 BD BD -7 W3266B.10 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, We hereunto set our hands and seals this day of 198_. Name of Surety Seal) 0% Address Attach here Acknowledgement on Standard Form) Signature of Representative Telephone Number Name of Contractor Seal) Address Signature of Representative Telephone Number 1990 BD -8 W3266B.10 PO 32668.10 BD STATE OF COUNTY OF This Affidavit to be fully executed NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 88. A , affiant, the Position) 00 Name of the Firm A 0 0 party making the foregoing bid, having first been duly sworn, deposes and says that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. Signature of affidant Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 19 Signature of Notary Public in and for the County of State of 1990 BD -9. w3266B.10 32668.10 BD FORMAL CONTRACT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this between day of 1990, by and hereinafter referred to as "Contractor," and South Tahoe Public Utility District, El Dorado County, CALIFORNIA, hereinafter referred to as "District." WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the promises and agreements hereinafter made and exchanged, the District and the Contractor agree as follows: 1. That the Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, services, appliances, and appurtenances for the construction of the Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System Improvements - Phase I in accordance with the Plans and Specifications therefor, adopted by the Board of Directors of the above District as prepared by John Carollo Engineers. 2. That the District will pay the Contractor progress payments and the final payment in accordance with the method set forth in the Specifications with warrants drawn on the appropriate fund or funds as required, according to the prices as bid and accepted, based upon the Plans, Specifications, and Addenda, as follows: Lump Sum Bid $ Dollars and Cents 1990 CD -1 3266B.10 32668.10 CD 3. Contractor agrees to complete said work within one hundred (100) calendar days from the day following the issuance of the Notice to Proceed (or approved extensions thereof), and to the entire satisfaction of the District before final payment is made. 4. Time is of the essence on this Contract. 5. That pursuant to the provisions under LIQUIDATED DAMAGES in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of said Specifications, five hundred dollars ($500) shall be the amount of liquidated damages for every day of delay in the completion of the work. 6. That the Contractor will pay, and will require all subcontractors to pay, all employees on said work a salary or wage at least equal to the prevailing salary or wage established for such work as set forth in the wage determinations and wage standards applicable to this work, as contained in or referenced by the Specifications for this work. 7. That the Contractor shall forfeit to the District, as a penalty, Twenty - Five Dollars ($25) for each calendar day or portion thereof for each workman paid (either by him or any subcontractors under him) less than the prevailing rate set forth herein on the work provided for in this Contract, all in accordance with Section 1775 of the Labor Code of the State of California. 8. That the Contractor shall submit certified payroll forms with each payment request for work completed by workers on the performance of this Contract in accordance with California Labor Code Section 1776. 9. That in the performance of this Contract, not more than eight (8) hours shall constitute a day's work, and the Contractor shall not require more than eight (8) hours of labor in a day from any person employed by him hereunder, except as provided in the Labor Code of the State of California. That the Contractor shall conform to Article 3, Chapter 1, Part 7 (Section 1810, et 1990 CD -2 3266B.10 32668.10 CD seq.) of the Labor Code of the State of California, and it is agreed that the Contractor shall forfeit to the District as a penalty the sum of Twenty -Five 25) Dollars for each workman employed in the execution of this Contract by the Contractor or any subcontractor for each calendar day during which any workman is required or permitted to labor more than eight (8) hours in violation of said Article. 10. That the Contractor shall carry workmen's compensation insurance and require all subcontractors to carry workmen's compensation insurance as required by the Labor Code of the State of California. 11. The Contractor shall, prior to the execution of the Contract, furnish Certificates of Insurance as required by the General Conditions, and furnish two bonds approved by the District, one in the amount of One Hundred (100) Percent of the Contract price, to guarantee the faithful performance of the work, and one in the amount of One Hundred (100) Percent of the Contract price to guarantee payment of all claims for labor and materials furnished. This Contract shall not become effective until such bonds and certificates are supplied to and approved by the District. 12. This Formal Contract by reference includes the Notice Inviting Bids, Information for Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions, Specifications, Bid, Certificates of Insurance and Affidavits, Payment Bond, Performance Bond, Plans, Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed, and Addenda if any, all as the term "Contract" is defined in the Specifications. 1990 CD -3 3266B.10 32663.10 CD IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Contractor and the South Tahoe Public Utility District, by Resolution No. of the Board of Directors of said thereunto duly authorized, have caused the names of said parties to be affixed hereto, each in duplicate, the day and year first above written. SOUTH TAHOE PUBLIC UTILITY DISTRICT, Contractor EL DORADO COUNTY, CALIFORNIA By By Title Title Approved as to form and Attest legality District's Counsel 1990 CD -4 3266B.10 32668.10 CD 0 0 0 0 0 SAMPLE PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT, WHEREAS, the South Tahoe Public Utility District, El Dorado County, California, hereinafter designated the "District," has, on , 19_, awarded to hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for the construction of Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System Improvements - Phase I. WHEREAS, said Principal is required to furnish a bond in connection and with said contract, providing that if said Principal, or any of his or its subcontractors, shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor done thereon of any kind, the Surety of this bond will pay the same to the extent hereinafter set forth: NOW, THEREFORE, WE, the Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the District the penal sum of dollars ($ lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if said Principal, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall fail to pay for any materials, provisions, or other supplies used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for any work or labor thereon of any kind or for amount due under the Unemployment Insurance Act with respect to such work or labor, or for any amounts due, or to be withheld pursuant to Sections 18806 of the Revenue and Taxation Code of the State of California with respect to such work or labor, as required by the provisions of Chapter III, Division V, Title I, of the Government Code of the State of California, and provided that the persons, companies, or corporations so furnishing said materials, provisions, or other supplies, appliances, or power use, in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be executed or performed, or any person who performs work or labor upon same, or any person who supplies both work and materials, thereto, shall have complied with the provisions of said Government Code, then said surety will pay the same in or to an amount not exceeding the amount hereinabove set forth, and also will pay in case suit is brought upon this bond, such reasonable attorney's fees to the District as shall be fixed by the court. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all persons, companies, and corporations entitled to file claims under said Government Code, so as to give a right of action to them or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. And the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition of the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall, in any way, affect its obligations of this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, 1990 CD -5 32668.10 3266B.10 CD or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. Said Surety hereby waives the provisions of Sections 2819 and 2845 of the Civil Code of the State of California. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their seals this day of , 19_, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. Seal) Seal) Principal Signature for Principal Title Surety Signature for Surety Title 1990 CD -6 3266B.10 32668.10 CD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SAMPLE FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT, WHEREAS, the South Tahoe Public Utility District, California, hereinafter designated the "District," has, on 19_, awarded to hereinafter designated as the "Principal," a contract for the construction of Fallen Leaf Lake Sewage Collection System Improvements - Phase I. WHEREAS, said Principal is required under the terms of said contract to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said contract: NOW, THEREFORE, WE, the Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the District the penal sum of dollars ($ lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the above bounden Principal, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and faithfully perform the covenants, conditions, and agreements in the said contract and any alterations made as therein provided, on his or their part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless, the District, its officers and agents as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and virtue and Principal and Surety, in the event suit is brought on this bond, will pay to the District such reasonable attorney's fees as shall be fixed by the court. As a condition precedent to the satisfactory completion of the said contract, the above obligation in the said amount shall hold good for a period of one (1) year after the completion and acceptance of the said work, during which time if the above bounden Principal, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns shall fail to make full, complete, and satisfactory repair and replacements or totally protect the said District from loss of damage made evident during said period of one year from the date of acceptance of said work, and resulting from or caused by defective materials and/or faulty workmanship in the prosecution of the work done, the above obligation in the said amount shall remain in full force and effect. However, anything in this paragraph to the contrary notwithstanding, the obligation of the Surety hereunder shall continue so long as any obligation of the Principal remains. And the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall, in any way, affect its obligations on this bond, 1990 CD -7 3266B.10 32668.10 CD and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. Said Surety hereby waives the provisions of Sections 2819 and 2845 of the Civil Code of the State of California. As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the amount specified therefor, there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorney's fees, incurred by the District in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to be taxed as costs and included in any judgment rendered. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their seals this day of , 19, the name Band corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body. Seal) Seal) Principal Signature for Principal Title Surety Signature for Surety Title 1990 CD -8. 32668.10 32668.10 CD f 0 a M